GUITAR CENTER INC
S-1/A, 1997-03-10
RADIO, TV & CONSUMER ELECTRONICS STORES
Previous: STYLE SELECT SERIES INC, 497, 1997-03-10
Next: MEGO MORTGAGE FHA TITLE I LOAN TRUST 1996-2, 10-K, 1997-03-10



<PAGE>
   
     AS FILED WITH THE SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION ON MARCH 10, 1997
    
 
                                                      REGISTRATION NO. 333-20931
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
                       SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
                             WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549
                            ------------------------
   
                                AMENDMENT NO. 2
                                       TO
    
                                    FORM S-1
                             REGISTRATION STATEMENT
                                     UNDER
                           THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
                            ------------------------
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
             (EXACT NAME OF REGISTRANT AS SPECIFIED IN ITS CHARTER)
 
<TABLE>
<S>                              <C>                              <C>
           DELAWARE                           5733                          95-4600862
 (State or other jurisdiction     (Primary Standard Industrial           (I.R.S. Employer
              of                  Classification Code Number)         Identification Number)
incorporation or organization)
</TABLE>
 
                            ------------------------
                              5155 CLARETON DRIVE
                         AGOURA HILLS, CALIFORNIA 91301
                                 (818) 735-8800
         (Address, including zip code, and telephone number, including
            area code, of registrant's principal executive offices)
                            ------------------------
                                   BRUCE ROSS
                   VICE PRESIDENT AND CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                              5155 CLARETON DRIVE
                         AGOURA HILLS, CALIFORNIA 91301
                                 (818) 735-8800
          (Name and address, including zip code, of agent for service)
                            ------------------------
                                   COPIES TO:
 
<TABLE>
<S>                                       <C>
         Anthony J. Richmond                       Nicholas P. Saggese
           Latham & Watkins                Skadden, Arps, Slate, Meagher & Flom
  633 West Fifth Street, Suite 4000                        LLP
    Los Angeles, California 90071                 300 South Grand Avenue
            (213) 485-1234                    Los Angeles, California 90071
                                                      (213) 687-5000
</TABLE>
 
                            ------------------------
        APPROXIMATE DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF PROPOSED SALE TO THE PUBLIC:
  AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE AFTER THIS REGISTRATION STATEMENT BECOMES EFFECTIVE.
                            ------------------------
 
    If  any of the securities being registered on this Form are to be offered on
a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to  Rule 415 under the Securities Act  of
1933, as amended (the "Securities Act"), check the following box. / /
    If  this Form  is filed  to register  additional securities  for an offering
pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, please check the following box
and list  the  Securities  Act  registration statement  number  of  the  earlier
effective registration statement for the
same offering. / /
- --------------
    If  this Form  is a post-effective  amendment filed pursuant  to Rule 462(b)
under the Securities Act, check the following box
and list  the Securities  Act registration  statement of  the earlier  effective
registration statement for the same
offering. / /
- --------------
    If  delivery of the prospectus  is expected to be  made pursuant to Rule 434
under the Securities Act, please check the following box. / /
                            ------------------------
 
    THE REGISTRANT HEREBY  AMENDS THIS  REGISTRATION STATEMENT ON  SUCH DATE  OR
DATES AS MAY BE NECESSARY TO DELAY ITS EFFECTIVE DATE UNTIL THE REGISTRANT SHALL
FILE  A  FURTHER  AMENDMENT  WHICH SPECIFICALLY  STATES  THAT  THIS REGISTRATION
STATEMENT SHALL THEREAFTER BECOME EFFECTIVE  IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 8(a)  OF
THE  SECURITIES ACT, OR UNTIL THE  REGISTRATION STATEMENT SHALL BECOME EFFECTIVE
ON SUCH DATE AS THE SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION, ACTING PURSUANT TO  SAID
SECTION 8(a), MAY DETERMINE.
 
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<PAGE>
                                EXPLANATORY NOTE
 
    This  Registration Statement  contains two separate  prospectuses. The first
prospectus relates  to a  public  offering in  the United  States  of up  to  an
aggregate  of 6,210,000 shares of Common Stock (the "U.S. Offering"). The second
prospectus relates to a concurrent international offering outside of the  United
States  of  up  to  an  aggregate  of  1,552,500  shares  of  Common  Stock (the
"International  Offering").  The   prospectuses  for  the   U.S.  Offering   and
International  Offering will  be identical with  the exception  of the following
alternate pages  for  the  International  Offering:  a  front  cover  page,  the
Underwriting  section and a back cover page. Such alternate pages appear in this
Registration Statement  immediately following  the complete  prospectus for  the
U.S. Offering.
<PAGE>
Information   contained  herein  is  subject   to  completion  or  amendment.  A
registration statement  relating to  these securities  has been  filed with  the
Securities  and Exchange  Commission. These securities  may not be  sold nor may
offers to buy be accepted prior  to the time the registration statement  becomes
effective.  This  prospectus  shall  not  constitute an  offer  to  sell  or the
solicitation of an offer to buy nor shall there be any sale of these  securities
in  any State in which such offer,  solicitation or sale would be unlawful prior
to registration or qualification under the securities laws of any such State.
<PAGE>
   
                  SUBJECT TO COMPLETION, DATED MARCH 10, 1997
    
 
                                6,750,000 SHARES
 
   [LOGO]
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                                  COMMON STOCK
 
                          (PAR VALUE $0.01 PER SHARE)
                            ------------------------
 
    Of the 6,750,000 shares of Common Stock offered, 5,400,000 shares are  being
offered  hereby in the United States and 1,350,000 shares are being offered in a
concurrent international offering outside the United States. The initial  public
offering  price  and  the  aggregate underwriting  discount  per  share  will be
identical for both offerings. See "Underwriting."
 
    Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for the Common Stock
of the Company. It is currently estimated that the initial public offering price
per share will be  between $14.00 and  $16.00. For factors  to be considered  in
determining the initial public offering price, see "Underwriting."
 
    SEE  "RISK FACTORS" BEGINNING ON PAGE  9 FOR CERTAIN CONSIDERATIONS RELEVANT
TO AN INVESTMENT IN THE COMMON STOCK.
 
    The Company's Common  Stock has been  approved for quotation  on the  Nasdaq
National Market under the symbol "GTRC."
 
                            ------------------------
 
 THESE  SECURITIES HAVE NOT BEEN APPROVED OR DISAPPROVED BY THE SECURITIES AND
  EXCHANGE  COMMISSION  OR  ANY  STATE  SECURITIES  COMMISSION  NOR  HAS  THE
   SECURITIES  AND EXCHANGE  COMMISSION OR ANY  STATE SECURITIES COMMISSION
     PASSED  UPON   THE   ACCURACY   OR  ADEQUACY   OF   THIS   PROSPECTUS.
      ANY   REPRESENTATION  TO   THE  CONTRARY  IS   A  CRIMINAL  OFFENSE.
 
                            ------------------------
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                            INITIAL PUBLIC          UNDERWRITING            PROCEEDS TO
                            OFFERING PRICE           DISCOUNT(1)            COMPANY(2)
                         ---------------------  ---------------------  ---------------------
<S>                      <C>                    <C>                    <C>
Per Share..............            $                      $                      $
Total (3)..............            $                      $                      $
</TABLE>
 
- ------------------------
 
(1) The Company  has  agreed  to  indemnify  the  Underwriters  against  certain
    liabilities,  including liabilities  under the  Securities Act  of 1933. See
    "Underwriting."
 
(2) Before deducting estimated expenses of $1,100,000 payable by the Company.
 
(3) The Company  has granted  the U.S.  Underwriters an  option for  30 days  to
    purchase  up to an additional 810,000 shares  of Common Stock at the initial
    public offering price per share,  less the underwriting discount, solely  to
    cover   over-allotments.   Additionally,   the  Company   has   granted  the
    International Underwriters a  similar option with  respect to an  additional
    202,500  shares as  part of the  concurrent international  offering. If such
    options were to  be exercised  in full,  the total  initial public  offering
    price,  underwriting discount and proceeds to  the Company would be $      ,
    $     and $     , respectively. See "Underwriting."
 
                            ------------------------
 
    The shares offered hereby are offered severally by the U.S. Underwriters, as
specified herein, subject to receipt and acceptance by them and subject to their
right to reject any order in whole or in part. It is expected that  certificates
for  the shares will  be ready for delivery  in New York, New  York, on or about
March   , 1997, against payment therefor in immediately available funds.
 
GOLDMAN, SACHS & CO.  DONALDSON, LUFKIN & JENRETTE
                            SECURITIES CORPORATION
 
MONTGOMERY SECURITIES  DAIN BOSWORTH                       CHASE SECURITIES INC.
                          Incorporated
                           --------------------------
 
                 The date of this Prospectus is March   , 1997.
<PAGE>
    Photographs depicting the  interior of  a Guitar Center,  Inc. retail  store
with the following captions:
 
    a. "Each  store features  a display  of 300  to 500  guitars on  its 'guitar
       wall'."
 
    b. "Customers are encouraged play instruments."
 
    c. "Flagship Hollywood store and home of Rock Walk."
 
    d. "Each  department   offers  an   extensive   selection  of   brand   name
       merchandise."
 
    e. "Knowledgeable salespeople demonstrate the latest technology."
 
    CERTAIN  PERSONS PARTICIPATING IN  THIS OFFERING MAY  ENGAGE IN TRANSACTIONS
THAT STABILIZE,  MAINTAIN OR  OTHERWISE AFFECT  THE PRICE  OF THE  COMMON  STOCK
OFFERED HEREBY. FOR A DESCRIPTION OF THESE ACTIVITIES, SEE "UNDERWRITING."
A  map  of the  United States  depicting  all Guitar  Center Store  locations at
January 31, 1997 appears in the inside back cover.
 
STORE LOCATIONS
 
<TABLE>
<S>                    <C>                    <C>                    <C>
SOUTH                  NORTHERN               TEXAS                  MICHIGAN
CALIFORNIA             CALIFORNIA             Dallas                 Detroit
Hollywood              San Francisco          Arlington              Southfield
San Diego              San Jose               South Houston          MINNESOTA
Fountain Valley        El Cerrito             North Houston          Twin Cities
Sherman Oaks           Pleasant Hill          MASSACHUSETTS          FLORIDA
Covina                 ILLINOIS               Boston                 North Miami
Lawndale               South Chicago          Danvers                South Miami
San Bernardino         North Chicago          OHIO
Brea                   Central Chicago        Cleveland
San Marcos             Villa Park
</TABLE>
 
*Existing Store Locations as of January 31, 1997.
 
                                       2
<PAGE>
                                    SUMMARY
 
    THE FOLLOWING SUMMARY IS QUALIFIED IN ITS ENTIRETY BY, AND SHOULD BE READ IN
CONJUNCTION  WITH, THE MORE  DETAILED INFORMATION, INCLUDING  "RISK FACTORS" AND
THE COMPANY'S FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS AND  NOTES THERETO,  APPEARING ELSEWHERE  IN
THIS   PROSPECTUS.  EXCEPT  WHERE  OTHERWISE   SPECIFIED,  INFORMATION  IN  THIS
PROSPECTUS REGARDING THE SALE  OF THE COMMON STOCK,  $.01 PAR VALUE (THE  "COMON
STOCK"),  OFFERED IN  THE CONCURRENT  UNITED STATES  AND INTERNATIONAL OFFERINGS
(TOGETHER, THE "OFFERING") GIVES EFFECT TO THE FOLLOWING EVENTS: (I) A  100-TO-1
STOCK SPLIT EFFECTUATED ON JUNE 5, 1996; (II) THE REINCORPORATION OF THE COMPANY
FROM  A CALIFORNIA TO  A DELAWARE CORPORATION, EFFECTUATED  ON OCTOBER 11, 1996;
(III) A 2.582-TO-1  STOCK SPLIT EFFECTUATED  ON JANUARY 15,  1997; AND (IV)  THE
MANDATORY  CONVERSION OF  EACH OUTSTANDING SHARE  OF 8%  JUNIOR PREFERRED STOCK,
$.01 PAR VALUE (THE "JUNIOR PREFERRED STOCK"), OF THE COMPANY UPON  CONSUMMATION
OF  THIS  OFFERING  INTO  6.667  SHARES  OF  COMMON  STOCK  AS  DESCRIBED  UNDER
"DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK -- PREFERRED STOCK -- JUNIOR PREFERRED STOCK" (THE
"JUNIOR  PREFERRED   STOCK  CONVERSION").   UNLESS  OTHERWISE   INDICATED,   ALL
INFORMATION  IN  THIS  PROSPECTUS  ASSUMES  NO  EXERCISE  OF  THE  UNDERWRITERS'
OVER-ALLOTMENT OPTION.
 
                                  THE COMPANY
 
    Guitar Center,  Inc. (the  "Company"  or "Guitar  Center") is  the  nation's
leading  retailer of guitars, amplifiers,  percussion instruments, keyboards and
pro audio and  recording equipment  with 28 stores  operating in  14 major  U.S.
markets  as of December 31, 1996, including,  among others, areas in or near Los
Angeles, San Francisco,  Chicago, Miami,  Houston, Dallas,  Detroit, Boston  and
Minneapolis.  From fiscal 1992 through fiscal  1996, the Company's net sales and
operating income before  deferred compensation expense  grew at compound  annual
rates  of 25.6% and 43.0%, respectively.  This growth was principally the result
of strong and consistent comparable store sales growth, averaging 14.8% per year
over such five-year period, and the opening of 13 new stores.
 
    Guitar Center offers a unique retail concept in the music products industry,
combining an interactive,  hands-on shopping experience  with superior  customer
service and a broad selection of brand name, high-quality products at guaranteed
low  prices. The Company creates an  entertaining and exciting atmosphere in its
stores with bold and dramatic merchandise presentations, highlighted by  bright,
multi-colored  lighting, high  ceilings, music  and videos.  Management believes
approximately 80%  of  the Company's  sales  are to  professional  and  aspiring
musicians  who  generally  view  the  purchase of  music  products  as  a career
necessity. These sophisticated customers  rely upon the Company's  knowledgeable
and  highly trained salespeople  to answer technical questions  and to assist in
product demonstrations.
 
    The Guitar Center prototype  store generally ranges in  size from 12,000  to
15,000  square feet (as compared to a  typical music products retail store which
averages approximately 3,200 square feet) and is designed to encourage customers
to hold and play instruments. Each store carries an average of 7,000 core  stock
keeping  units ("SKUs"), which management believes is significantly greater than
a typical music products retail store,  and is organized into five  departments,
each  focused on one  product category. These departments  cater to a musician's
specific product needs and are staffed by specialized salespeople, many of  whom
are practicing musicians. Management believes this retail concept differentiates
the Company from its competitors and encourages repeat business.
 
    Guitar Center stores historically have generated strong and stable operating
results.  All of  the Company's  stores, after  being open  for at  least twelve
months, have had positive store-level operating income in each of the past  five
fiscal years.
 
    The following summarizes certain key operating statistics of a Guitar Center
store  and is based upon the 21 stores operated by the Company for the full year
ended December 31, 1996:
 
<TABLE>
<S>                                                              <C>
Average 1996 net sales per square foot.........................  $      707
Average 1996 net sales per store...............................   9,148,000
Average 1996 store-level operating income (1)..................   1,402,000
Average 1996 store-level operating income margin (1)...........       15.3%
</TABLE>
 
- ------------------------
   
(1) Store-level operating income includes individual store revenue and  expenses
    plus  allocated rebates,  cash discounts and  purchasing department salaries
    (based upon individual store sales).
    
 
                                       3
<PAGE>
   
    Guitar Center stores have typically generated positive store-level operating
income within the first  three months of opening.  In addition, based on  stores
which  have opened since fiscal 1993 and operated for at least 14 months, Guitar
Center  stores  have   demonstrated  high  store-level   operating  income   and
store-level  operating income  margins averaging approximately  $0.6 million and
11.5%, respectively, and sales per square foot averaging $498, during the  first
full twelve months of operations.
    
 
    The  United States retail market for music products in 1995 was estimated in
a study by MUSIC TRADES magazine to be approximately $5.5 billion in net  sales,
representing a five-year compound annual growth rate of 7.9%. Products currently
offered  by  Guitar  Center include  categories  of products  which  account for
approximately $4.0 billion  of this  market, representing  a five-year  compound
annual  growth rate of 8.6%. The industry is highly fragmented with the nation's
leading five  music products  retailers (as  measured by  the number  of  stores
operated  by such retailers) accounting for approximately 8.4% of the industry's
estimated net sales in  1995. Furthermore, approximately  90% of the  industry's
estimated  8,200 retailers operate only one  or two stores. The Company believes
it benefits from several advantages  relative to smaller competitors,  including
volume  purchasing  discounts,  centralized operations  and  financial controls,
advertising economies  and the  ability to  offer an  extremely broad  and  deep
selection of merchandise.
 
    For  the fiscal years  ended December 31,  1994, 1995 and  1996, the Company
recorded net income (loss) of $8.8  million, $10.9 million and ($72.4)  million,
respectively.  The results for 1996 reflect  $11.6 million for transaction costs
and financing fees incurred in connection with the Recapitalization (as  defined
herein)  and  non-recurring  deferred  compensation  expense  of  $71.8 million,
substantially all of which related to the Recapitalization.
 
                               BUSINESS STRATEGY
 
    EXPANSION STRATEGY.  Guitar  Center's expansion strategy  is to continue  to
increase  its market  share in existing  markets and  to penetrate strategically
selected new markets.  The Company plans  to continue pursuing  its strategy  of
clustering   stores  in  major  markets  to  take  advantage  of  operating  and
advertising efficiencies and to enhance awareness  of the Guitar Center name  in
new  markets.  The Company  opened seven  stores in  fiscal 1996,  and currently
anticipates opening approximately eight stores in each of fiscal 1997 and  1998.
In   preparation  for  this  expansion,  management  has  dedicated  substantial
resources over  the  past  several  years to  building  the  infrastructure  and
management  information systems necessary to support  a large national chain. In
addition, the Company believes that it has developed a methodology for targeting
prospective store sites which  includes analyzing demographic and  psychographic
characteristics  of  potential store  locations.  Management also  believes that
there may  be  attractive  opportunities  to  expand  by  selectively  acquiring
existing music products retailers.
 
    EXTENSIVE  SELECTION  OF MERCHANDISE.    Guitar Center  offers  an extensive
selection of brand  name music products  complemented by lesser  known, hard  to
find  items and  unique vintage equipment.  The average 7,000  core SKUs offered
through each Guitar Center store provide  a breadth and depth of in-stock  items
which  management  believes is  not  available from  traditional  music products
retailers.
 
    HIGHLY INTERACTIVE,  MUSICIAN-FRIENDLY STORE  CONCEPT.   Each Guitar  Center
store  contains  creative  instrument  presentations  and  colorful, interactive
displays which encourage the customer to hold and play instruments as well as to
participate in  product demonstrations.  In addition,  private  sound-controlled
rooms   enhance  a   customer's  listening  experience   while  testing  various
instruments.
 
    EXCEPTIONAL CUSTOMER  SERVICE.    The Company  conducts  extensive  training
programs  for  its salespeople,  who  specialize in  one  of the  Company's five
product categories. Many of the  Company's salespeople are also musicians.  With
the advances in technology and continuous new product introductions in the music
products industry, customers increasingly rely on qualified salespeople to offer
expert advice and assist in product demonstrations. Management believes that its
emphasis  on training and customer service  distinguishes the Company within the
industry and is a critical part of Guitar Center's success.
 
                                       4
<PAGE>
    INNOVATIVE PROMOTIONAL  AND  MARKETING  PROGRAMS.   Guitar  Center  sponsors
innovative   promotional   and   marketing   events   which   include   in-store
demonstrations, famous  artist  appearances  and  weekend  themed  sales  events
designed  to create  significant store  traffic and  exposure. In  addition, the
Company's special  grand  opening activities  in  new markets  are  designed  to
generate  consumer awareness for each new  store. Management believes that these
events help  the  Company build  a  loyal  customer base  and  encourage  repeat
business.  Since its inception,  the Company has  compiled a unique, proprietary
database containing  information  on  more  than  one  million  customers.  This
database  enables Guitar Center to advertise to select target customers based on
historical buying patterns.
 
    GUARANTEED LOW PRICES.  Guitar Center  endeavors to be the low price  leader
in each of its markets which is underscored by a 30-day low price guarantee. The
Company's size permits it to take advantage of volume discounts for large orders
and other vendor supported programs. Although prices are usually determined on a
regional  basis, store managers  are trained and authorized  to adjust prices in
response to local market conditions.
 
    EXPERIENCED AND MOTIVATED MANAGEMENT TEAM.   The executive officers and  key
managers  have  an average  of  11 years  with  the Company.  In  addition, upon
consummation of this Offering and the application of the net proceeds therefrom,
executive officers and key managers will beneficially own approximately 18.8% of
the Company's outstanding Common Stock.
 
                              THE RECAPITALIZATION
 
    On June 5, 1996, the Company consummated a series of transactions to  effect
a  recapitalization of the Company (the "Recapitalization") in order to transfer
ownership of the Company from its sole stockholder, the Scherr Living Trust (the
"Scherr Trust"), to  members of  management, Chase  Venture Capital  Associates,
L.P.  ("Chase Ventures")  and an affiliated  entity, Wells  Fargo Small Business
Investment Company, Inc. ("Wells  Fargo") and Weston  Presidio Capital II,  L.P.
("Weston  Presidio").  Chase  Ventures,  Wells  Fargo  and  Weston  Presidio are
collectively referred to  herein as the  "Investors." See "The  Recapitalization
and Related Transactions."
 
                           FORWARD LOOKING STATEMENTS
 
    Information   contained   in  this   Prospectus   includes  "forward-looking
statements" that are based largely on the Company's current expectations and are
subject to a number of  risks and uncertainties. Forward-looking statements  can
be  identified by the use of  forward-looking terminology such as "may," "will,"
"should," "expect," "anticipate," "estimate," "continue," "plans," "intends"  or
other similar terminology. See "Risk Factors."
 
    The  Company is a Delaware corporation  with its principal executive offices
located at  5155  Clareton  Drive,  Agoura  Hills,  California  91301,  and  its
telephone number is (818) 735-8800.
 
                                       5
<PAGE>
                                  THE OFFERING
 
   
<TABLE>
<S>                                      <C>
Common Stock offered by the Company:
  United States Offering...............  5,400,000 shares
  International Offering...............  1,350,000 shares
    Total..............................  6,750,000 shares
Common Stock to be outstanding after
  the Offering (1).....................  18,316,579 shares
Proposed Nasdaq National Market
  Symbol...............................  GTRC
Use of proceeds........................  The  net  proceeds of  this Offering  are currently
                                         intended to be used  to: (i) redeem (or  repurchase
                                         through  open market  purchases or  otherwise) at a
                                         premium, and pay  all accrued  and unpaid  interest
                                         with  respect  to,  an  aggregate  of approximately
                                         $33.3 million principal amount of the Company's 11%
                                         Senior  Notes   due   2006   (approximately   $37.9
                                         million);  (ii) redeem  at a  premium, and  pay all
                                         accrued and unpaid dividends  with respect to,  all
                                         of  the  outstanding  shares of  the  Company's 14%
                                         Senior Preferred Stock, $.01 par value (the "Senior
                                         Preferred Stock"),  having  an  original  aggregate
                                         liquidation  value of  $20.0 million (approximately
                                         $22.9  million);  and  (iii)  redeem  approximately
                                         1,317,000  shares of  Common Stock  held by certain
                                         executive  officers  and  other  employees  of  the
                                         Company    (approximately   $18.4   million)   (the
                                         "Management Tax Redemption").  The balance will  be
                                         used  for general corporate purposes, including the
                                         repayment of  amounts  outstanding under  the  1996
                                         Credit  Facility  (as  defined  herein)  which  are
                                         expected to be  approximately $6.0  million at  the
                                         consummation   of   this   Offering   and  possible
                                         acquisitions. See "Use of Proceeds."
</TABLE>
    
 
- ------------------------
(1) Assumes the  Underwriters' over-allotment  option  is not  exercised.  Gives
    effect to the Junior Preferred Stock Conversion. See "Description of Capital
    Stock   --  Preferred  Stock  --  Junior  Preferred  Stock."  Excludes:  (i)
    outstanding employee stock options for  the purchase of 1,509,752 shares  of
    Common  Stock (at an exercise price per  share of $10.89), none of which are
    exercisable as of the date of this Prospectus; and (ii) outstanding Warrants
    (as defined herein) for the purchase  of 676,566 shares of Common Stock  (at
    an  exercise price per share  of $0.01), all of  which are exercisable as of
    the date  of this  Prospectus. See  "Management --  Management Stock  Option
    Agreements; -- 1996 Performance Stock Option Plan" and "Certain Transactions
    -- Transactions with DLJ and Chase Securities." Also excludes 875,000 shares
    of  Common  Stock reserved  for  issuance under  the  1997 Plan  (as defined
    herein), none of which have been granted as of the date of this  Prospectus.
    See "Management -- 1997 Equity Participation Plan."
 
                                       6
<PAGE>
                SUMMARY HISTORICAL AND PRO FORMA FINANCIAL DATA
 
    The  financial data  for the  fiscal year  ended October  31, 1992,  the two
months ended December  31, 1992 and  the fiscal years  ended December 31,  1993,
1994,  1995 and 1996 has  been derived from the  audited financial statements of
the Company. The  PRO FORMA financial  data set forth  below is not  necessarily
indicative  of the results that would have been achieved or that may be achieved
in the future.  The summary historical  and PRO FORMA  financial data should  be
read  in  conjunction  with  "The  Recapitalization  and  Related Transactions,"
"Selected Historical Financial Data,"  "Unaudited Pro Forma Condensed  Financial
Data,"  "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results
of Operations" and the financial statements of the Company and the notes thereto
included elsewhere herein.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                    FISCAL
                                                     YEAR
                                                     ENDED    TWO MONTHS                 FISCAL YEAR
                                                    OCTOBER     ENDED                       ENDED
                                                      31,    DECEMBER 31,               DECEMBER 31,
                                                    -------  ------------   -------------------------------------
                                                     1992        1992        1993      1994      1995      1996
                                                    -------  ------------   -------  --------  --------  --------
                                                              (IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA AND
                                                                 STORE AND INVENTORY OPERATING DATA)
<S>                                                 <C>      <C>            <C>      <C>       <C>       <C>
INCOME STATEMENT DATA:
  Net sales.......................................  $85,592    $18,726      $97,305  $129,039  $170,671  $213,294
  Gross profit....................................  25,472       5,393       28,778    36,764    47,256    60,072
  Selling, general and administrative expenses....  20,998       3,547       21,889    26,143    32,664    41,345
  Deferred compensation expense (1)...............   --            373        1,390     1,259     3,087    71,760
  Operating income (loss).........................  4,474        1,473        5,499     9,362    11,505   (53,033)
  Non recurring transaction expense...............   --         --            --        --        --       (6,942)
  Net income (loss)...............................  3,987        1,385        5,105     8,829    10,857   (72,409)
 
PRO FORMA FOR INCOME TAX PROVISION: (2)
  Historical income (loss) before provision for
   income taxes...................................  $4,076     $ 1,424      $ 5,251  $  9,155  $ 11,202  $(72,270)
  Pro forma provision for income taxes............  1,753          773        2,856     4,478     6,144     --
                                                    -------  ------------   -------  --------  --------  --------
  Pro forma net income (loss).....................  $2,323     $   651      $ 2,395  $  4,677  $  5,058  $(72,270)
                                                    -------  ------------   -------  --------  --------  --------
                                                    -------  ------------   -------  --------  --------  --------
  Pro forma net income (loss) per common share....                                                       $  (3.72)
                                                                                                         --------
                                                                                                         --------
  Weighted average shares outstanding (3).........                                                         19,408
                                                                                                         --------
                                                                                                         --------
 
OPERATING DATA:
  Net sales per gross square foot (4).............  $ 429       --          $   478  $    546  $    661  $    707
  Stores open at end of period....................     15           15           17        20        21        28
  Net sales growth................................  14.3%        18.7%        13.7%     32.6%     32.3%     25.0%
  Increase in comparable store sales (5)..........  11.5%        18.7%        11.4%     17.3%     23.4%     10.2%
  Inventory turns.................................   3.3x         3.4x         3.1x      3.4x      3.7x      3.4x
  Capital expenditures............................  $ 445      $   966      $ 2,618  $  3,277  $  3,432  $  6,133
</TABLE>
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                             FISCAL YEAR ENDED
                                                                                             DECEMBER 31, 1996
                                                                                             ------------------
                                                                                               (IN THOUSANDS,
                                                                                              EXCEPT PER SHARE
                                                                                                   DATA)
<S>                                                                                          <C>
PRO FORMA DATA: (6)
  Net sales................................................................................      $  213,294
  Operating income.........................................................................          19,159
  Net income...............................................................................           6,456
  Net income per share.....................................................................      $     0.33
  Weighted average shares outstanding (3)..................................................          19,408
</TABLE>
 
                                             FOOTNOTES APPEAR ON FOLLOWING PAGE.
 
                                       7
<PAGE>
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                AS OF DECEMBER 31, 1996
                                                                             ------------------------------
                                                                             HISTORICAL    AS ADJUSTED (7)
                                                                             -----------  -----------------
                                                                                     (IN THOUSANDS)
<S>                                                          <C>             <C>          <C>
BALANCE SHEET DATA:
  Cash and cash equivalents................................                   $      47       $  11,750
  Net working capital......................................                      27,436          42,675
  Total assets.............................................                      74,849          85,429
  Total long term and revolving debt (including current
   maturities).............................................                     103,536          66,667
  Senior preferred stock...................................                      15,186          --
  Junior preferred stock...................................                     138,610          --
  Warrants.................................................                       6,500           6,500
  Stockholders' equity (deficit)...........................                     (68,815)         (6,180)
</TABLE>
 
- ------------------------------
(1)  For 1996,  the  Company  recorded  a  non-recurring  deferred  compensation
     expense   of  $71.8  million,  of  which   $69.9  million  related  to  the
     cancellation and  exchange  of management  stock  options pursuant  to  the
     Recapitalization  and $1.9 million  related to a  non-cash charge resulting
     from the grant of stock options to management by the Investors. The Company
     has not, and will not, incur  any obligation in connection with such  grant
     of  options  by  the  Investors.  See  "The  Recapitalization  and  Related
     Transactions" and "Certain Transactions -- Options Granted by the Investors
     to Certain Members of Management."
 
(2)  Pro forma  provision  for income  taxes  reflects the  estimated  statutory
     provision  of  43%  for  income  taxes  assuming  the  Company  was  a  "C"
     corporation.
 
(3)  Weighted average  shares outstanding  assumes that:  (i) the  Common  Stock
     offered  hereby, the Common Stock issuable pursuant to the Junior Preferred
     Stock Conversion and  the Common Stock  issuable upon the  exercise of  the
     Warrants and other common stock equivalents were outstanding during each of
     the  periods presented and (ii) the Common Stock to be redeemed pursuant to
     the Management Tax Redemption was not outstanding during any of the periods
     presented. See "Management -- Management  Stock Option Agreements; --  1996
     Performance  Stock Option Plan," "Certain Transactions -- Transactions with
     Affiliates of DLJ and Chase  Securities; -- Management Tax Redemption"  and
     "Description  of  Capital  Stock  -- Preferred  Stock  --  Junior Preferred
     Stock."
 
(4)  Net sales per gross square foot  does not include new stores opened  during
     the  reporting period.  Information for the  two months  ended December 31,
     1992 is not meaningful.
 
(5)  Compares  net  sales  for  the  comparable  periods,  excluding  net  sales
     attributable to stores not open for 14 months.
 
(6)  The  pro forma  data reflect  adjustments as  if the  Recapitalization, the
     Junior Preferred Stock Conversion, the sale of the Senior Notes (as defined
     herein), this Offering and  the application of  the estimated net  proceeds
     therefrom   to  redeem  all  of  the  shares  of  Senior  Preferred  Stock,
     approximately $33.3 million aggregate principal amount of the Senior  Notes
     and  shares  of Common  Stock  in the  Management  Tax Redemption  had been
     consummated and were effective as of January 1, 1996.
 
(7)  The pro forma balance sheet data give effect to the Junior Preferred  Stock
     Conversion, this Offering and the application of the estimated net proceeds
     therefrom   to  redeem  all  of  the  shares  of  Senior  Preferred  Stock,
     approximately $33.3 million aggregate principal amount of the Senior  Notes
     and  shares of Common  Stock in the  Management Tax Redemption,  as if such
     transactions had been consummated and were effective on such date.
 
                                       8
<PAGE>
                                  RISK FACTORS
 
    PRIOR  TO  MAKING  AN  INVESTMENT  DECISION,  PROSPECTIVE  INVESTORS  SHOULD
CAREFULLY  CONSIDER  THE  FOLLOWING  SPECIFIC  INVESTMENT  CONSIDERATIONS.   SEE
"MANAGEMENT'S  DISCUSSION  AND ANALYSIS  OF FINANCIAL  CONDITION AND  RESULTS OF
OPERATIONS" AND  "BUSINESS" FOR  A DESCRIPTION  OF OTHER  FACTORS AFFECTING  THE
BUSINESS OF THE COMPANY.
 
AGGRESSIVE GROWTH STRATEGY
 
    The  Company  intends to  pursue an  aggressive  growth strategy  by opening
additional stores in new  and existing markets. The  Company, which operated  28
stores  as of December 31, 1996, opened  seven stores in fiscal 1996 and expects
to open approximately eight stores in each of fiscal 1997 and fiscal 1998, which
represents significant increases in the  number of stores previously opened  and
operated by the Company. Although historically the Company has opened new stores
and  expanded or relocated  existing stores, prior  to 1996 the  Company had not
opened more than four new stores for any twelve-month period for the prior three
fiscal years.  See "Business  -- Properties."  The Company's  expansion plan  is
dependent  upon a  number of factors,  including the  identification of suitable
sites, the negotiation of acceptable leases for such sites, the hiring, training
and retention of skilled personnel, the availability of adequate management  and
financial  resources, the adaptation  of its distribution  and other operational
and management information systems to such sites, the ability and willingness of
the Company's vendors to supply its needs  on a timely basis and other  factors,
some  of which are beyond the control of  the Company. There can be no assurance
that the Company will be successful in  opening such new stores on schedule,  if
at  all, or that such  newly opened stores will  achieve sales and profitability
levels comparable to existing stores, if they are profitable at all, or that the
Company will improve its overall market  position and profitability as a  result
therefrom.
 
    The  Company's expansion strategy includes clustering  stores in each of its
markets which has, in certain instances, resulted in some transfer of sales from
existing stores to new locations. There can be no assurance that the opening  of
one  or more new stores in a market  area containing an existing store or stores
will not reduce the sales and profitability  level of any of the stores in  such
market  area.  In addition,  the  Company's expansion  into  new markets  has in
certain circumstances presented  competitive and  merchandising challenges  that
are  different from those  currently encountered by the  Company in its existing
markets. These challenges include the effective management of stores that are in
distant locations and  the incurrence of  significant start-up costs,  including
costs related to promotions and advertising. Although the Company is continually
evaluating  the adequacy of its existing systems and procedures, including store
management, financial controls and management information systems in  connection
with the Company's planned expansion, there can be no assurance that the Company
will  adequately  anticipate all  of the  changing  demands which  its expanding
operations will impose on such systems.  The failure by the Company to  identify
and  respond to such demands may have an adverse effect on the Company's results
of operations, financial condition, business and prospects.
 
   
    The Company  also believes  that there  may be  attractive opportunities  to
expand  by selectively acquiring  existing music product  retailers. The Company
regularly considers and  evaluates potential acquisition  candidates in new  and
existing market areas, is currently evaluating several such opportunities and is
in  negotiations regarding one  possible acquisition. Any  such transactions may
involve the  payment by  the Company  of cash  or securities  (including  equity
securities),  or  a  combination  of  the foregoing.  As  of  the  date  of this
Prospectus, the Company has no existing agreements or commitments to effect  any
such  acquisition. Accordingly, there can be  no assurance that the Company will
be able  to  identify suitable  acquisition  candidates available  for  sale  at
reasonable prices or consummate any acquisition or that any current negotiations
will  result in  an acquisition. Further,  acquisitions may involve  a number of
special risks, including diversion of  management's attention, the inability  to
integrate   successfully  any   acquired  business,  the   incurrence  of  legal
liabilities and  unanticipated events  or circumstances,  some or  all of  which
could  have a  material adverse effect  on the Company's  results of operations,
financial condition, business and prospects. See "Business."
    
 
DEPENDENCE ON SUPPLIERS
 
    The  Company's  business  and  its  expansion  plans  are  dependent  to   a
significant  degree  upon its  suppliers.  As it  believes  is customary  in the
industry, the Company  does not  have any  long-term supply  contracts with  its
suppliers.  The loss  of certain  key vendors  or the  failure to  establish and
maintain
 
                                       9
<PAGE>
relationships with brand name  vendors could have a  material adverse effect  on
the  Company's business. The  Company believes it  currently has adequate supply
sources; however,  there can  be no  assurance, especially  given the  Company's
expansion  plans, that the Company will be able to acquire sufficient quantities
and an  appropriate mix  of such  merchandise at  acceptable prices  or at  all.
Specifically, the establishment of additional stores in existing markets and the
penetration  of  new  markets  is  dependent  to  a  significant  extent  on the
willingness of vendors to supply those additional retail stores, of which  there
can  be  no assurance.  As the  Company  continues to  expand, the  inability or
unwillingness of a  supplier to supply  some or  all of its  merchandise to  the
Company  in one  or more  markets could  have a  material adverse  effect on the
Company's results of operations, financial condition, business and prospects.
 
FLUCTUATIONS IN COMPARABLE STORE SALES RESULTS
 
    Historically, the Company's  sales growth  has resulted in  large part  from
comparable  store sales growth. There can be  no assurance that such growth will
continue. A  variety of  factors  affect the  Company's comparable  store  sales
results  including,  among  others, competition,  economic  conditions, consumer
trends, retail sales, music  trends, changes in  the Company's merchandise  mix,
distribution  of  products,  transfer  of  sales  to  new  locations,  timing of
promotional events and the  Company's ability to  execute its business  strategy
efficiently, including its strategy of clustering stores in certain markets. The
Company's  quarterly comparable store  sales (net sales  for comparable periods,
excluding net sales attributable to stores not open for 14 months) results  have
fluctuated  significantly  in the  past.  The Company's  comparable  store sales
growth was 24.4%, 30.1%, 25.5% and 16.3% in the first, second, third and  fourth
quarters  of fiscal 1995, respectively,  and 14.5%, 9.3%, 7.6%  and 10.1% in the
first, second,  third and  fourth  quarters of  fiscal 1996,  respectively.  The
Company  does  not expect  comparable  store sales  to  continue to  increase at
historical rates, and there can be no assurance that comparable store sales will
not decrease in the future.  As is the case  with many specialty retailers,  the
Company's  comparable store  sales results could  cause the price  of the Common
Stock to fluctuate substantially. See  "Management's Discussion and Analysis  of
Financial Condition and Results of Operations."
 
DEPENDENCE ON KEY PERSONNEL
 
    The  Company believes  that its continued  success depends  to a significant
extent on  the services  of  Larry Thomas,  its  President and  Chief  Executive
Officer,  and Marty Albertson, its Executive  Vice President and Chief Operating
Officer, as  well  as  on its  ability  to  attract and  retain  additional  key
personnel  with  the  skills  and expertise  necessary  to  manage  its existing
business and effectuate its  planned growth. The loss  or unavailability of  the
services of one or both of these individuals or other key personnel could have a
material  adverse effect on  the Company. In  June 1996, in  connection with the
Recapitalization, the Company entered into a five-year employment agreement with
each of Messrs.  Thomas and  Albertson. The  Company currently  carries key  man
insurance  on the lives of  Messrs. Thomas and Albertson  in the amounts of $5.0
million and  $3.5 million,  respectively. See  "Management." Historically,  when
filling its senior operations, sales and store management positions, the Company
has  generally followed a policy of "promotion  from within." The success of the
Company's growth strategy will  also depend on its  ability to promote  existing
well-trained  store personnel to senior management and to retain such employees,
as well as on its ability to attract and retain new employees who have the skill
and expertise to manage  the Company's business. Any  inability to hire,  retain
and promote such personnel could have a material adverse effect on the Company's
results   of  operations,  financial  condition,  business  and  prospects.  See
"Business -- Customer Service" and "Management."
 
COMPETITION
 
    The  retail  market  for  musical  instruments  is  fragmented  and   highly
competitive.  The Company  competes with many  different types  of retailers who
sell many or most of  the items sold by  the Company, including other  specialty
retailers  and catalogue retailers. The Company's  expansion into new markets in
which its  competitors  are  already established,  competitors'  expansion  into
markets in which the Company is currently operating, the adoption by competitors
of  innovative store  formats and  retail sales  methods or  the entry  into the
Company's markets by competitors with  substantial financial or other  resources
may  have  a material  adverse effect  on the  Company's results  of operations,
financial condition, business and prospects. See "Business -- Competition."
 
                                       10
<PAGE>
POTENTIAL CONSEQUENCES OF SIGNIFICANT LEVERAGE; RECENT LOSS
 
    After giving effect to  this Offering and the  application of the  estimated
net  proceeds therefrom, the Company will continue to have significant financial
leverage. On a  PRO FORMA  basis after  giving effect  to this  Offering, as  of
December  31, 1996,  the Company would  have had approximately  $66.7 million of
outstanding long-term indebtedness, its ratio  of total long-term debt to  total
capitalization  would  have been  approximately  110% and  it  would have  had a
stockholders' deficit of  approximately $6.2 million.  See "Capitalization"  and
"Unaudited Pro Forma Condensed Financial Data."
 
    The   degree  to  which  the  Company  is  leveraged  could  have  important
consequences to the holders  of the Common Stock,  including the following:  (i)
the  Company may not  generate sufficient cash to  service its debt obligations;
(ii) the Company's ability to obtain financing for future working capital  needs
or  other purposes may be limited; (iii)  a significant portion of the Company's
cash flow from operations  will be dedicated to  debt service, thereby  reducing
funds  available for operations;  and (iv) the  substantial indebtedness and the
restrictive covenants to  which the Company  is subject under  the terms of  its
indebtedness,  including the terms of the 1996 Credit Facility and the indenture
under which the Senior Notes were  issued, may make the Company more  vulnerable
to  economic downturns, may  hinder its ability to  execute its growth strategy,
may reduce  its  flexibility to  respond  to changing  business  conditions  and
opportunities  and may limit its ability to withstand competitive pressures. See
"Description of Certain Indebtedness."
 
    The Company's ability to generate sufficient  cash to meet its debt  service
obligations  will depend on future operating performance, which will be subject,
in part, to factors beyond its control, including prevailing economic conditions
and financial, business and other factors. While the Company believes that  cash
flow  from operations  will be  adequate to  meet its  debt service obligations,
there can be  no assurance  that the Company  will generate  cash in  sufficient
amounts to meet such obligations. In the event the Company's operating cash flow
is not sufficient to fund the Company's expenditures or to service its debt, the
Company   may  be  required  to   raise  additional  financing  through  capital
contributions, the refinancing of  all or part of  its indebtedness or sales  of
its  assets. There can be  no assurance that the Company  will be able to obtain
any such additional financing or effect satisfactory refinancings or asset sales
on favorable terms,  if at  all. See  "Management's Discussion  and Analysis  of
Financial   Condition  and  Results  of  Operations  --  Liquidity  and  Capital
Resources."
 
    For the year ended December  31, 1996, the Company had  a net loss of  $72.4
million. The results for such period reflect non-recurring deferred compensation
expense  of $71.8 million and $11.6  million for transaction costs and financing
fees  incurred  in  connection  with  the  Recapitalization.  See  "Management's
Discussion  and Analysis  of Financial  Condition and  Results of  Operations --
Fiscal 1996 Compared to Fiscal 1995."
 
CONCENTRATION OF OPERATIONS IN CALIFORNIA
 
    As of  December  31,  1996, 13  of  the  Company's stores  were  located  in
California  and generated 55.9% and 52.8% of  the Company's net sales for fiscal
1995 and 1996,  respectively. Although the  Company has opened  stores in  other
areas  in the United States, a significant percentage of the Company's net sales
is likely  to remain  concentrated  in California  for the  foreseeable  future.
Consequently,  the Company's results  of operations and  financial condition are
heavily dependent  upon  general  consumer trends  and  other  general  economic
conditions  in California and are subject to other regional risks, including the
risk of seismic activity.  The Company does  not maintain earthquake  insurance.
See "Business -- Properties."
 
IMPACT OF ECONOMIC CONDITIONS ON INDUSTRY RESULTS; CHANGING CONSUMER PREFERENCES
 
    The  Company's business is sensitive to consumer spending patterns, which in
turn are subject to, among  other things, prevailing economic conditions.  There
can  be no  assurance that  consumer spending will  not be  affected by economic
conditions, thereby impacting the Company's growth, net sales and profitability.
A deterioration in economic conditions  in one or more  of the markets in  which
the  Company's stores are  concentrated could have a  material adverse effect on
the Company's  results  of  operations, business  and  prospects.  Although  the
Company attempts to stay abreast of consumer
 
                                       11
<PAGE>
preferences  for musical products and  accessories historically offered for sale
by the Company, any sustained failure by the Company to identify and respond  to
such  trends would have  a material adverse  effect on the  Company's results of
operations, financial condition, business and prospects.
 
BENEFITS OF THIS OFFERING TO CERTAIN EXISTING STOCKHOLDERS
 
    In connection with the conversion of management's shares of Junior Preferred
Stock upon completion of this Offering, a significant amount of non-cash  income
will  be deemed to have been earned by  certain employees of the Company who are
also stockholders of the  Company (including Larry  Thomas and Marty  Albertson)
for  federal and state income  tax purposes (whether or  not such employees have
received any cash with respect to  the underlying stock). In February 1997,  the
Company  entered into agreements with Larry  Thomas, Marty Albertson and certain
other senior  employees pursuant  to  which the  Company  agreed to  effect  the
Management  Tax  Redemption  to provide  sufficient  cash to  such  employees to
finance a portion of such federal and state income tax obligations. Pursuant  to
the  terms of the Management Tax  Redemption, the Company will use approximately
$18.4 million of the proceeds from this Offering to redeem for cash that  number
of  shares of Common Stock calculated by dividing the amount of such proceeds by
the initial  public offering  price less  the net  underwriting discount  (I.E.,
approximately  1,317,000  shares of  Common  Stock, assuming  an  initial public
offering price of $15.00 per share). Pursuant to the Management Tax  Redemption,
Larry  Thomas and  Marty Albertson will  receive approximately  $6.7 million and
$4.5  million,  respectively.  Affiliates   of  Donaldson,  Lufkin  &   Jenrette
Securities  Corporation, an underwriter in this Offering ("DLJ"), own all of the
outstanding shares  of Senior  Preferred Stock  and will  receive  approximately
$22.9  million  of  the  proceeds  from this  Offering  in  connection  with the
redemption of  such shares.  See  "Use of  Proceeds," "Certain  Transactions  --
Management  Tax Redemption" and "Description of Capital Stock -- Preferred Stock
- -- Senior Preferred Stock."
 
OWNERSHIP OF THE COMPANY; ANTI-TAKEOVER PROVISIONS
 
    After giving effect to this Offering and the Management Tax Redemption,  the
Company's  executive  officers  and  key  managers, on  the  one  hand,  and the
Investors,  on  the  other  hand,   will  beneficially  own  18.8%  and   32.3%,
respectively, of the outstanding Common Stock. Therefore, after giving effect to
this  Offering and  the Management  Tax Redemption,  such stockholders  will, if
considered together,  beneficially  own  shares  of  Common  Stock  representing
approximately  51.1% of the  voting power entitled to  vote in matters affecting
stockholders generally  and thereby  will continue  to be  able to  control  the
election  of the Board of Directors and  will be able to influence significantly
the affairs  of  the  Company if  they  were  to act  together.  See  "Principal
Stockholders" and "Certain Transactions."
 
    Provisions  of  the Company's  Certificate  of Incorporation,  as  in effect
immediately following the  consummation of  this Offering  (the "Certificate  of
Incorporation"),  and the  Company's Amended and  Restated Bylaws,  as in effect
immediately following the consummation of this Offering (the "Bylaws"), as  well
as  provisions  of Delaware  General  Corporation Law,  may  have the  effect of
delaying or  preventing  transactions  involving  a change  of  control  of  the
Company,   including  transactions   in  which  stockholders   might  receive  a
substantial premium for their  shares over then current  market prices, and  may
limit  the ability of stockholders to approve  transactions that they deem to be
in their best interest. For example, under the Certificate of Incorporation, the
Board of Directors of the Company is authorized to issue one or more classes  of
Preferred  Stock, par value $.01 per  share (the "Preferred Stock"), having such
designations, rights and  preferences as may  be determined by  the Board.  Upon
completion  of this Offering, the Company will  not have any shares of Preferred
Stock outstanding. Further  issuances of  Preferred Stock,  while providing  the
Company  with flexibility  in connection  with general  corporate purposes, may,
among other things, have an  adverse effect on the  rights of holders of  Common
Stock.  Stockholders have no right to take action by written consent and are not
permitted to call special meetings of stockholders. Any amendment of the  Bylaws
by  the stockholders or  certain provisions of  the Certificate of Incorporation
requires the affirmative vote of at least 66 2/3% of the shares of voting  stock
then  outstanding. See  "Description of  Capital Stock  -- Certain Anti-takeover
Effects; -- Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law."
 
POSSIBLE EFFECT OF SHARES AVAILABLE FOR FUTURE SALE
 
    The sale of a  substantial number of  shares of Common  Stock in the  public
market  following this Offering  could adversely affect the  market price of the
Common Stock. Upon completion of this Offering,
 
                                       12
<PAGE>
the Company  will  have  an  aggregate of  18,316,579  shares  of  Common  Stock
outstanding  assuming no exercise of the Underwriters' over-allotment option and
no exercise of outstanding options and warrants. The 6,750,000 shares of  Common
Stock  sold  in this  Offering will  be freely  tradable without  restriction or
further  registration  under  the  Securities  Act  of  1933,  as  amended  (the
"Securities  Act"), unless such shares are  held by "affiliates" of the Company,
as that term is defined under the Securities Act and the regulations promulgated
thereunder.
 
    The remaining 11,566,579  shares of Common  Stock (the "Restricted  Shares")
are subject to restrictions under the Securities Act. Holders of such Restricted
Shares  have  registration  rights  with  respect to  all  of  such  shares, and
11,300,327 of such shares  are subject to lock-up  agreements pursuant to  which
the holders thereof have agreed not to sell or otherwise dispose of any of their
shares  for a period of  180 days after the date  of this Prospectus without the
prior written  consent of  Goldman, Sachs  &  Co. In  addition, holders  of  the
outstanding  Warrants for  the purchase of  676,566 shares of  Common Stock have
registration rights  with respect  to  such shares,  and  all of  such  Warrants
(including  the shares issuable thereunder) are  also subject to 180-day lock-up
agreements. Following this Offering, the Company intends to file a  registration
statement on Form S-8 under the Securities Act to register the 713,782 shares of
Common  Stock issuable upon the exercise of  options granted under the 1996 Plan
(as defined herein), the  875,000 shares of Common  Stock reserved for  issuance
under  the 1997 Plan  and the 795,970  shares of Common  Stock issuable upon the
exercise of options granted to Messrs. Thomas and Albertson. See "Management  --
Management  Stock Option Agreements;  -- 1996 Performance  Stock Option Plan; --
1997 Equity Participation Plan," "Certain Transactions -- Registration  Rights,"
and "Shares Eligible for Future Sale."
 
DILUTION
 
    Purchasers  of the  shares of Common  Stock in the  Offering will experience
immediate and  substantial dilution  in the  net tangible  book value  of  their
shares from the initial public offering price. See "Dilution."
 
ABSENCE OF PRIOR TRADING MARKET; POTENTIAL VOLATILITY OF STOCK PRICE; NO
DIVIDENDS
 
    Prior  to this  Offering, there  has been  no public  market for  the Common
Stock. There can be no assurance that an active trading market will develop  or,
if  one develops subsequent  to this Offering,  that it will  be maintained. The
initial public  offering  price of  the  Common  Stock will  be  established  by
negotiation  among the Company and the  representatives of the Underwriters. See
"Underwriting" for factors considered in determining the initial public offering
price. The  market price  of the  shares of  Common Stock  could be  subject  to
significant  fluctuations  in response  to the  Company's operating  results and
other factors,  including announcements  by its  competitors. In  addition,  the
stock  market  in  recent years  has  experienced significant  price  and volume
fluctuations that often have been unrelated or disproportionate to the operating
performance of particular companies. These fluctuations, as well as a  shortfall
in  sales or earnings compared to  public market analysts' expectations, changes
in analysts' recommendations  or projections,  and general  economic and  market
conditions, may adversely affect the market price of the Common Stock. Since the
Recapitalization,  the Company  has not  paid any  cash dividends  on its Common
Stock and does not anticipate paying any such cash dividends in the  foreseeable
future. See "Dividend Policy."
 
FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS AND ASSOCIATED RISKS
 
    This  Prospectus contains  certain forward-looking  statements, relating to,
among other things,  future results  of operations, growth  plans, sales,  gross
margin  and  expense  trends,  capital  requirements  and  general  industry and
business conditions applicable to the Company. These forward-looking  statements
are  based largely on  the Company's current  expectations and are  subject to a
number of risks and uncertainties.  Actual results could differ materially  from
these  forward-looking  statements. In  addition  to the  other  risks described
elsewhere in this "Risk  Factors" discussion, important  factors to consider  in
evaluating   such  forward-looking   statements  include   changes  in  external
competitive market factors,  changes in  the Company's business  strategy or  an
inability  to execute  its strategy  due to  unanticipated changes  in the music
products industry or  the economy in  general, the emergence  of new or  growing
specialty retailers of music products and various other competitive factors that
may  prevent  the  Company from  competing  successfully in  existing  or future
markets. In light of  these risks and uncertainties,  there can be no  assurance
that the forward-looking statements contained in this Prospectus will in fact be
realized.
 
                                       13
<PAGE>
                 THE RECAPITALIZATION AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS
 
    On  June  5, 1996,  Guitar Center  consummated a  series of  transactions to
effect a Recapitalization of the Company  in order to transfer ownership of  the
Company  from its sole  stockholder, the Scherr Trust,  to members of management
and the Investors. The Recapitalization included the following transactions: (i)
members of the Company's management  purchased 1,291,000 shares of Common  Stock
for  $0.5 million  in cash;  (ii) members  of the  Company's management received
495,000  shares  of  Junior  Preferred  Stock,  with  an  aggregate  liquidation
preference of $49.5 million, in exchange for cancellation of outstanding options
exercisable  for  127,809,000 shares  of Common  Stock;  (iii) the  Scherr Trust
received 198,000 shares of Junior Preferred Stock, with an aggregate liquidation
preference of $19.8 million, in exchange for 51,123,600 shares of Common  Stock;
(iv) the Investors purchased 1,807,400 shares of Common Stock and 693,000 shares
of  Junior Preferred Stock for $70.0 million  in cash; (v) the DLJ Investors (as
defined herein)  purchased 800,000  shares of  Senior Preferred  Stock, with  an
aggregate  liquidation value of $20.0 million,  and warrants (the "Warrants") to
purchase 190,252 shares of  Common Stock and 72,947  shares of Junior  Preferred
Stock,  for an  aggregate purchase  price of  $20.0 million  in cash;  (vi) GCMC
Funding, Inc. ("DLJ Bridge") purchased $51.0 million aggregate principal  amount
of   senior  unsecured  increasing  rate  notes   for  cash  and  Chemical  Bank
("Chemical")  loaned  $49.0  million  to  the  Company  (together,  the  "Bridge
Facility");  (vii) the  Company repurchased  309,840,000 shares  of Common Stock
from the  Scherr Trust  for approximately  $113.1 million  in cash;  (viii)  the
Company  cancelled options to purchase 82,384,907 shares of Common Stock held by
certain members of  management in  exchange for approximately  $27.9 million  in
cash;  and (ix)  the Company cancelled  its revolving credit  facility (the "Old
Credit  Facility")  upon  repaying  in  cash  the  approximately  $35.9  million
outstanding  pursuant thereto. Transaction costs  and financing fees incurred by
the Company to effect  the Recapitalization and  the Bridge Facility  aggregated
approximately $11.6 million. See "Certain Transactions."
 
    In connection with the Recapitalization, the Company granted options for the
purchase  of 43,344 units  (a unit consisting  of 2.582 shares  of Common Stock,
after giving  effect  to the  stock  splits  described in  this  paragraph,  and
99/100ths  of a share of Junior Preferred Stock (each, a "Unit")) at an exercise
price of  $100  per Unit  to  each of  Larry  Thomas, its  President  and  Chief
Executive  Officer, and Marty Albertson, its  Executive Vice President and Chief
Operating Officer and adopted the 1996 Plan for the benefit of the Company's key
employees. See  "Management  --  Management Stock  Option  Agreements;  --  1996
Performance  Stock  Option  Plan." Upon  consummation  of  the Recapitalization,
management, the  Investors,  and the  Scherr  Trust owned  approximately  35.7%,
50.0%,  and 14.3%, respectively,  of the issued and  outstanding Common Stock of
the Company. Immediately following the Recapitalization, the Company effected  a
100-to-1  stock split.  On October 11,  1996, the Company  reincorporated from a
California corporation to a  Delaware corporation and changed  the par value  of
its  Common Stock, Senior Preferred Stock and Junior Preferred Stock. On January
15,  1997,  the  Company  effectuated   a  2.582-to-1  stock  split.  Upon   the
consummation  of  the  Offering,  each  share  of  Junior  Preferred  Stock will
automatically convert into  6.667 shares  of Common Stock,  and all  outstanding
shares  of Senior Preferred Stock will be redeemed, at a premium, with a portion
of the net  proceeds from this  Offering. See "Description  of Capital Stock  --
Preferred Stock" and "Use of Proceeds." After giving effect to the Offering, the
Junior  Preferred  Stock  Conversion  and  the  Management  Tax  Redemption, the
Company's executive  officers and  key managers,  the Investors  and the  Scherr
Trust  (and affiliated family trusts) will beneficially own approximately 18.8%,
32.3% and 9.3%,  respectively, of the  outstanding shares of  Common Stock.  See
"Principal Stockholders."
 
    Upon  the effectiveness of the Recapitalization,  the Company entered into a
$25 million revolving credit  facility (the "1996  Credit Facility") with  Wells
Fargo  Bank, N.A. ("Wells Fargo Bank"). See "Description of Certain Indebtedness
- -- The 1996 Credit Facility."  On July 2, 1996 the  Company issued in a  private
placement  an  aggregate of  $100  million of  11%  Senior Notes  due  2006 (the
"Original Senior Notes") to DLJ and Chase Securities, Inc. ("Chase Securities"),
as the Initial Purchasers. The proceeds  of the offering of the Original  Senior
Notes were applied to the retirement of the Bridge Facility. The Original Senior
Notes  were resold  by the  Initial Purchasers pursuant  to Rule  144A under the
Securities
 
                                       14
<PAGE>
Act ("Rule 144A") and were later exchanged for a new series of 11% Senior  Notes
due  2006  (the  "Senior  Notes")  in an  exchange  offer  registered  under the
Securities Act which  was consummated  in December  1996. The  Senior Notes  are
substantially  identical to  the Original Senior  Notes (except  that the Senior
Notes are not  restricted for  federal securities  law purposes).  Approximately
$33.3  million principal amount of Senior  Notes will be redeemed or repurchased
(through open market purchases  or otherwise), at a  premium, with a portion  of
the net proceeds from this Offering. See "Description of Certain Indebtedness --
The Senior Notes" and "Use of Proceeds."
 
                                USE OF PROCEEDS
 
   
    The  net proceeds  to the  Company from  this Offering  are estimated  to be
approximately $93.3 million ($107.5 million if the Underwriters'  over-allotment
option  is exercised in full), after  deducting the Company's estimated costs of
the Offering and assuming an initial  public offering price of $15.00 per  share
of  Common Stock. Of such net proceeds,  (i) approximately $37.9 million will be
used to redeem (or repurchase through  open market purchases or otherwise) at  a
premium,  and  to  pay all  accrued  and  unpaid interest  with  respect  to, an
aggregate of  approximately  $33.3  million principal  amount  of  Senior  Notes
pursuant  to  the  optional  redemption provisions  of  the  Senior  Notes; (ii)
approximately $22.9 million will be used to redeem at a premium, and to pay  all
accrued  and unpaid dividends with respect to,  all of the outstanding shares of
Senior Preferred Stock; (iii) approximately $18.4 million will be used to redeem
in the Management Tax Redemption approximately 1,317,000 shares of Common  Stock
held  by certain executive officers and other employees of the Company; and (iv)
the balance of approximately  $14.1 million will be  used for general  corporate
purposes,  including the repayment of amounts  outstanding under the 1996 Credit
Facility which are expected to be approximately $6.0 million at the consummation
of this Offering, and possible acquisitions. The Company regularly considers and
evaluates potential acquisition candidates in new and existing market areas,  is
currently evaluating several such opportunities and is in negotiations regarding
one  possible acquisition. As of the date of this Prospectus, the Company has no
existing agreements or commitments to effect any such acquisition. There can  be
no  assurance that  the Company  will be  able to  identify suitable acquisition
candidates available for sale at reasonable prices or consummate any acquisition
or that any current negotiations will result in an acquisition. See "Description
of Certain Indebtedness -- The Senior  Notes," "Description of Capital Stock  --
Preferred  Stock  --  Senior  Preferred  Stock,"  and  "Certain  Transactions --
Management Tax Redemption."
    
 
                                DIVIDEND POLICY
 
    The Company currently intends  to retain any earnings  to provide funds  for
the  operation and expansion of its business and for the servicing and repayment
of indebtedness and does not intend to pay cash dividends on the Common Stock in
the foreseeable future. Under  the terms of the  indenture governing the  Senior
Notes,  the Company is  not permitted to  pay any dividends  on the Common Stock
unless certain  financial ratio  tests and  other conditions  are satisfied.  In
addition, the 1996 Credit Facility contains certain covenants which, among other
things, limit the payment of cash dividends on the capital stock of the Company.
See  "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of
Operations --  Liquidity  and Capital  Resources"  and "Description  of  Certain
Indebtedness."  Any determination to  pay cash dividends on  the Common Stock in
the future will be at the sole discretion of the Company's Board of Directors.
 
                                       15
<PAGE>
                                    DILUTION
 
    As of December 31, 1996,  the net tangible book  deficit of the Company,  as
adjusted  to give effect  to the Junior Preferred  Stock Conversion, was $(72.6)
million, or $(5.64)  per share of  Common Stock outstanding.  Net tangible  book
deficit  per  share is  determined by  dividing  the tangible  net worth  of the
Company (total  assets less  intangible  assets and  total liabilities)  by  the
number  of shares of Common Stock outstanding  after giving effect to the Junior
Preferred Stock Conversion. Without taking into account any changes in such  net
tangible  book deficit after December 31, 1996, other than to give effect to the
issuance of the 6,750,000  shares of Common Stock  at an assumed initial  public
offering  price of $15.00 per  share and the anticipated  application of the net
proceeds therefrom, the PRO FORMA net tangible book deficit of the Company as of
December 31, 1996 would have been  approximately $(8.9) million, or $(0.48)  per
share.  This  amount  represents an  immediate  reduction in  net  tangible book
deficit of $5.16 per share to current stockholders and an immediate dilution  of
$15.48 per share to new stockholders. Dilution to new stockholders is determined
by  subtracting the net tangible book deficit per share after this Offering from
the initial public  offering price  per share. The  following table  illustrates
this per share dilution.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Assumed initial public offering price per share (1)................             $   15.00
<S>                                                                  <C>        <C>
  Net tangible book deficit per share as of December 31, 1996, as
   adjusted........................................................  $   (5.64)
  Increase in net tangible book deficit per share attributable to
   sale of Common Stock............................................       5.16
                                                                     ---------
PRO FORMA net tangible book deficit per share after giving effect
 to this Offering (2)..............................................                 (0.48)
                                                                                ---------
Dilution in net tangible book value per share to new investors
 (3)...............................................................             $   15.48
                                                                                ---------
                                                                                ---------
</TABLE>
 
    The  following table  summarizes, on  a PRO FORMA  basis as  of December 31,
1996, the number of shares of Common Stock purchased from the Company, the total
consideration paid  and  the  average  price per  share  paid  by  the  existing
stockholders and by new investors for the shares of Common Stock offered hereby.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                          SHARES PURCHASED            TOTAL CONSIDERATION         AVERAGE
                                     --------------------------  -----------------------------     PRICE
                                        NUMBER        PERCENT         AMOUNT         PERCENT     PER SHARE
                                     -------------  -----------  ----------------  -----------  -----------
<S>                                  <C>            <C>          <C>               <C>          <C>
Existing stockholders..............     11,566,579(4)      63.1% $    125,960,045       55.4%    $   10.89
New stockholders...................      6,750,000       36.9         101,250,000       44.6         15.00
                                     -------------      -----    ----------------      -----    -----------
    Total..........................     18,316,579(4)     100.0% $    227,210,045      100.0%    $   12.40
                                     -------------      -----    ----------------      -----
                                     -------------      -----    ----------------      -----
</TABLE>
 
- ------------------------
(1) Before  deducting the  estimated underwriting discounts  and commissions and
    the estimated expenses of this Offering payable by the Company.
 
(2) Does not give  effect to  the exercise of  the Underwriters'  over-allotment
    option. Also does not give effect to the issuance of 676,566 shares reserved
    for  issuance upon the  exercise of the  Warrants (at an  exercise price per
    share of  $0.01) or  the  issuance of  1,509,752  shares issuable  upon  the
    exercise  of  employee stock  options  (at an  exercise  price per  share of
    $10.89), which were outstanding as of December 31, 1996. See "Management  --
    Management Stock Option Plans;
    -- 1996 Performance Stock Option Plan."
 
(3) Dilution  is determined  by subtracting  PRO FORMA  tangible book  value per
    share from the assumed initial public offering price paid by a new  investor
    for one share of Common Stock.
 
(4) Excludes  shares to  be repurchased  in the  Management Tax  Redemption. See
    "Certain Transactions -- Management Tax Redemption."
 
                                       16
<PAGE>
                                 CAPITALIZATION
 
    The following table sets forth the  actual capitalization of the Company  as
of  December 31, 1996 and the as  adjusted capitalization of the Company at that
date after giving effect to  this Offering and the  application of a portion  of
the estimated net proceeds therefrom, as described under "Use of Proceeds." This
table  should  be read  in conjunction  with  "The Recapitalization  and Related
Transactions," "Unaudited  Pro Forma  Condensed Financial  Data,"  "Management's
Discussion  and Analysis of  Financial Condition and  Results of Operations" and
the financial statements of the Company and the notes thereto included elsewhere
in this Prospectus.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                         AS OF DECEMBER 31, 1996
                                                                                        --------------------------
                                                                                           ACTUAL     AS ADJUSTED
                                                                                        ------------  ------------
                                                                                              (IN THOUSANDS)
<S>                                                                                     <C>           <C>
Long-term debt (including current portion)
  Senior notes........................................................................  $    100,000   $   66,667
  1996 credit facility................................................................         3,536       --
                                                                                        ------------  ------------
    Total long-term debt..............................................................       103,536       66,667
                                                                                        ------------  ------------
Senior preferred stock................................................................        15,186       --
 
Stockholders' equity (deficit)
  Junior preferred stock (1)..........................................................       138,610       --
  Warrants............................................................................         6,500        6,500
  Common stock 55,000,000 shares, $.01 par value, authorized; 3,622,804 shares
   outstanding, actual; 18,316,579 shares outstanding, as
   adjusted (1).......................................................................            36          183
  Additional paid-in capital..........................................................        (6,966)     206,396
  Retained earnings (deficit).........................................................      (206,995)    (219,259)
                                                                                        ------------  ------------
    Total stockholders' equity (deficit)..............................................       (68,815)      (6,180)
                                                                                        ------------  ------------
      Total capitalization............................................................  $     49,907   $   60,487
                                                                                        ------------  ------------
                                                                                        ------------  ------------
</TABLE>
 
- ------------------------
 
(1) Under the terms of the Junior Preferred Stock, upon the consummation of  the
    Offering   each  share   of  Junior   Preferred  Stock   will  be  converted
    automatically into  6.667  shares  of Common  Stock.  Also  excludes  shares
    issuable  upon  the  exercise  of  outstanding  employee  stock  options and
    outstanding Warrants. See "Description of  Capital Stock -- Preferred  Stock
    -- Junior Preferred Stock."
 
                                       17
<PAGE>
                       SELECTED HISTORICAL FINANCIAL DATA
 
    The  selected financial data for the fiscal year ended October 31, 1992, the
two months ended December 31, 1992 and the fiscal years ended December 31, 1993,
1994, 1995 and 1996  has been derived from  the audited financial statements  of
the  Company.  The selected  PRO FORMA  financial  data set  forth below  is not
necessarily indicative of the results that would have been achieved or that  may
be  achieved in the future. The selected historical and PRO FORMA financial data
should  be  read   in  conjunction  with   "The  Recapitalization  and   Related
Transactions,"  "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and
Results of Operations" and the financial statements of the Company and the notes
thereto included elsewhere herein.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                              TWO
                                                         FISCAL YEAR        MONTHS
                                                            ENDED            ENDED             FISCAL YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,
                                                         OCTOBER 31,     DECEMBER 31,    ------------------------------------------
                                                            1992             1992          1993       1994       1995       1996
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
                                                         (IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT PER SHARE AND STORE AND INVENTORY OPERATING DATA)
                                                       ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>                                                    <C>              <C>              <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>
INCOME STATEMENT DATA:
Net sales............................................     $  85,592        $  18,726     $  97,305  $ 129,039  $ 170,671  $ 213,294
Cost of goods sold (1)...............................        60,120           13,333        68,527     92,275    123,415    153,222
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
  Gross profit.......................................     $  25,472        $   5,393     $  28,778  $  36,764  $  47,256  $  60,072
Selling, general and administrative expenses.........        20,998            3,547        21,889     26,143     32,664     41,345
Deferred compensation expense (2)....................            --              373         1,390      1,259      3,087     71,760
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
Operating income (loss)..............................     $   4,474        $   1,473     $   5,499  $   9,362  $  11,505  $ (53,033)
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
Other (expense) income
  Interest expense, net..............................          (457)             (49)         (271)      (252)      (368)   (12,169)
  Transaction expense and other expenses.............            59               --            23         45         65     (7,068)
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
                                                          $    (398)       $     (49)    $    (248) $    (207) $    (303) $ (19,237)
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
Income (loss) before provision for income taxes......         4,076            1,424         5,251      9,155     11,202    (72,270)
Provision for income taxes...........................            89               39           146        326        345        139
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
Net income (loss)....................................     $   3,987        $   1,385     $   5,105  $   8,829  $  10,857  $ (72,409)
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
 
PRO FORMA FOR INCOME TAX PROVISION (3):
Historical income (loss) before provision for income
 taxes...............................................     $   4,076        $   1,424     $   5,251  $   9,155  $  11,202  $ (72,270)
Pro forma provision for income taxes.................         1,753              773         2,856      4,478      6,144         --
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
Pro forma net income (loss)..........................     $   2,323        $     651     $   2,395  $   4,677  $   5,058  $ (72,270)
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
                                                       ---------------  ---------------  ---------  ---------  ---------  ---------
Pro forma net income (loss) per common share.........                                                                     $   (3.72)
                                                                                                                          ---------
                                                                                                                          ---------
Weighted average common shares outstanding (4).......                                                                        19,408
                                                                                                                          ---------
                                                                                                                          ---------
 
OPERATING DATA:
Net sales per gross square foot (5)..................     $     429               --     $     478  $     546  $     661  $     707
Net sales growth.....................................          14.3%            18.7%         13.7%      32.6%      32.3%      25.0%
Increase in comparable store sales (6)...............          11.5%            18.7%         11.4%      17.3%      23.4%      10.2%
Stores open at end of period.........................            15               15            17         20         21         28
Inventory turns......................................          3.3x             3.4x          3.1x       3.4x       3.7x       3.4x
Capital expenditures.................................     $     445        $     966     $   2,618  $   3,277  $   3,432  $   6,133
 
BALANCE SHEET DATA:
Net working capital..................................     $  11,923        $  12,679     $  10,243  $  11,468  $   6,002  $  27,436
Property, plant and equipment, net...................         7,888            8,677        10,066     11,642     13,276     14,966
Total assets.........................................        32,082           34,978        37,602     46,900     49,618     74,849
Total long term and revolving debt (including current
 debt)...............................................         6,103            5,001         3,400        825         --    103,536
Senior preferred stock...............................            --               --            --         --         --     15,186
Junior preferred stock...............................            --               --            --         --         --    138,610
Stockholders' equity (deficit).......................        16,612           17,997        18,484     23,424     19,763    (68,815)
</TABLE>
 
                                             FOOTNOTES APPEAR ON FOLLOWING PAGE.
 
                                       18
<PAGE>
FOOTNOTES TO TABLE ON PREVIOUS PAGE.
 
- ----------------------------------
 
(1) Cost of goods sold includes buying and occupancy costs.
 
(2) For the  fiscal year  1996, the  Company recorded  a non-recurring  deferred
    compensation expense of $71.8 million, of which $69.9 million related to the
    cancellation  and  exchange  of  management stock  options  pursuant  to the
    Recapitalization and $1.9  million related  to a  non-cash charge  resulting
    from  the grant of stock options to management by the Investors. The Company
    has not, and will not, incur any obligation in connection with such grant of
    options  by   the  Investors.   See   "The  Recapitalization   and   Related
    Transactions"  and "Certain Transactions -- Options Granted by the Investors
    to Certain Members of Management."
 
(3) Pro forma  provision  for  income taxes  reflects  the  estimated  statutory
    provision for income taxes assuming the Company was a "C" corporation.
 
(4) Weighted  average  shares outstanding  assumes  that: (i)  the  Common Stock
    offered hereby, the Common Stock  issuable pursuant to the Junior  Preferred
    Stock  Conversion and  the Common  Stock issuable  upon the  exercise of the
    Warrants and other common stock equivalents were outstanding during each  of
    the  periods presented, and (ii) the Common Stock to be redeemed pursuant to
    the Management Tax Redemption was not outstanding during any of the  periods
    presented.  See "Management --  Management Stock Option  Agreements; -- 1996
    Performance Stock Option Plan,"  "Certain Transactions -- Transactions  with
    Affiliates  of DLJ and  Chase Securities; --  Management Tax Redemption" and
    "Description of Capital Stock -- Preferred Stock -- Junior Preferred Stock."
 
(5) Net sales per gross  square foot does not  include new stores opened  during
    the  reporting period. Information  for the two  month period ended December
    31, 1992 is not meaningful.
 
(6) Compares  net  sales  for  the  comparable  periods,  excluding  net   sales
    attributable to stores not open for 14 months.
 
                                       19
<PAGE>
                  UNAUDITED PRO FORMA CONDENSED FINANCIAL DATA
 
    The  following unaudited PRO FORMA condensed  financial data (the "Pro Forma
Financial Data")  have  been  prepared  by the  Company's  management  from  the
financial  statements of the Company and the notes thereto included elsewhere in
this Prospectus. The unaudited PRO FORMA condensed statements of operations  for
the  fiscal  year  ended  December  31,  1996  reflects  adjustments  as  if the
Recapitalization, the Junior Preferred Stock Conversion, the sale of the  Senior
Notes,  this Offering  and the  application of  a portion  of the  estimated net
proceeds therefrom to redeem all outstanding shares of Senior Preferred Stock, a
portion of the Senior  Notes and shares  of Common Stock  in the Management  Tax
Redemption  and to repay amounts outstanding  under the 1996 Credit Facility had
been consummated and  were effective as  of January 1,  1996. The unaudited  PRO
FORMA condensed balance sheet as of December 31, 1996 gives effect to the Junior
Preferred  Stock Conversion and the application of the estimated net proceeds of
this Offering as if they had occurred on such date.
 
    The financial effects of the Recapitalization and this Offering as presented
in the Pro  Forma Financial Data  are not necessarily  indicative of either  the
Company's  financial position or the results  of its operations which would have
been obtained had the  Recapitalization and this  Offering actually occurred  on
the dates described above, nor are they necessarily indicative of the results of
future  operations. The Pro  Forma Financial Data should  be read in conjunction
with the  notes thereto,  which  are an  integral  part thereof,  the  financial
statements of the Company and the notes thereto and "Management's Discussion and
Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations."
 
             UNAUDITED PRO FORMA CONDENSED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS
                          YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1996
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                              PRO FORMA
                                                                                                               FOR THE
                                                           ADJUSTMENTS        PRO FORMA                    RECAPITALIZATION,
                                                          RELATED TO THE       FOR THE       ADJUSTMENTS   THE SALE OF THE
                                                         RECAPITALIZATION  RECAPITALIZATION    RELATED       SENIOR NOTES
                                                         AND THE SALE OF   AND THE SALE OF     TO THIS         AND THIS
                                             HISTORICAL  THE SENIOR NOTES  THE SENIOR NOTES    OFFERING        OFFERING
                                             ----------  ----------------  ----------------  ------------  ----------------
                                                                 (IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA)
<S>                                          <C>         <C>               <C>               <C>           <C>
Net sales..................................  $  213,294     $   --           $    213,294     $   --          $  213,294
Cost of sales, buying, and occupancy.......     153,222         --                153,222         --             153,222
                                             ----------       --------     ----------------  ------------  ----------------
Gross profit...............................  $   60,072     $   --           $     60,072     $   --          $   60,072
Operating expenses.........................      41,345           (432)(1)         40,913         --              40,913
Deferred compensation expense..............      71,760        (71,760)(2)        --              --              --
                                             ----------       --------     ----------------  ------------  ----------------
Operating income...........................  $  (53,033)    $   72,192       $     19,159     $   --          $   19,159
Other (expenses) income:
  Interest expense.........................     (12,177)           671(3)         (11,506)         3,792(4)        (7,714)
  Transaction expenses.....................      (6,942)         6,942(5)         --              --              --
  Interest income..........................           8         --                      8         --                   8
  Other....................................        (126)        --                   (126)        --                (126)
                                             ----------       --------     ----------------  ------------  ----------------
                                             $  (19,237)    $    7,613       $    (11,624)    $    3,792      $   (7,832)
                                             ----------       --------     ----------------  ------------  ----------------
Income (loss) before provision for income
 taxes.....................................     (72,270)        79,805              7,535          3,792          11,327
Provision for income taxes.................         139          3,101(6)           3,240          1,631(6)         4,871
                                             ----------       --------     ----------------  ------------  ----------------
Net income (loss)..........................  $  (72,409)    $   76,704       $      4,295     $    2,161      $    6,456
Preferred stock dividends..................      (7,951)        (6,083)(7)        (14,034)        14,034(8)        --
                                             ----------       --------     ----------------  ------------  ----------------
Net income (loss) available for common
 stockholders..............................  $  (80,360)    $   70,621       $     (9,739)    $   16,195      $    6,456
                                             ----------       --------     ----------------  ------------  ----------------
                                             ----------       --------     ----------------  ------------  ----------------
 
PRO FORMA
Historical income (loss) before provision
 for income taxes..........................  $  (80,221)
Pro forma provision for income taxes (9)...      --
                                             ----------
Pro forma net income (loss)................  $  (80,221)
                                             ----------
                                             ----------
Pro forma net income (loss) per common
 share (10)................................  $    (4.13)                                                      $     0.33
                                             ----------                                                    ----------------
                                             ----------                                                    ----------------
Weighted average common shares outstanding
 (11)......................................      19,408                                                           19,408
                                             ----------                                                    ----------------
                                             ----------                                                    ----------------
</TABLE>
 
   See accompanying notes to the unaudited pro forma condensed statements of
                                  operations.
 
                                       20
<PAGE>
        NOTES TO UNAUDITED PRO FORMA CONDENSED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS
 
(1) Represents  a  reduction in  (i) compensation  expense historically  paid to
    Raymond Scherr, the former Chairman of  the Board; and (ii) bonuses paid  to
    certain  key executives based  upon new bonus  plans adopted as  part of the
    Recapitalization and a non-recurring charge associated with options  granted
    to management by the Investors.
 
(2) Represents the elimination of deferred stock compensation expense associated
    with  the  management  stock  options  which  were  partially  redeemed  and
    partially  exchanged   for   Junior  Preferred   Stock   as  part   of   the
    Recapitalization.
 
(3) The interest expense adjustment is as follows:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                 YEAR ENDED
                                                                                                 DECEMBER 31
                                                                                                    1996
                                                                                                -------------
<S>                                                                                             <C>
Historical interest expense...................................................................   $    12,177
Assumed interest expense on new credit facility for working capital purposes..................          (131)
Cash interest expense on the Senior Notes at an interest rate of 11%..........................       (11,000)
                                                                                                -------------
Total cash interest expense adjustment........................................................   $     1,046
Amortization of deferred financing fees
 on the Senior Notes..........................................................................          (375)
                                                                                                -------------
Total interest expense adjustment.............................................................   $       671
                                                                                                -------------
                                                                                                -------------
</TABLE>
 
(4) The interest expense adjustment relating to this Offering is as follows:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                 YEAR ENDED
                                                                                                 DECEMBER 31
                                                                                                    1996
                                                                                                -------------
<S>                                                                                             <C>
Interest expense relating to borrowings under Senior Notes repaid.............................    $   3,667
Amortization of deferred financing fees under Senior Notes repaid.............................          125
                                                                                                -------------
Interest expense adjustment...................................................................    $   3,792
                                                                                                -------------
                                                                                                -------------
</TABLE>
 
(5) Represents  the elimination of non-recurring  transaction expenses which are
    directly attributable to the Recapitalization.
 
(6) Reflects the estimated  statutory provision  for income  taxes assuming  the
    Company  was a "C" corporation, and the increase in net expenses as a result
    of the adjustments described in notes (1), (2), (3), (4) and (5) above.  See
    "Management's  Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of
    Operations -- Income Taxes."
 
(7) Represents accrued dividends on  the Senior Preferred  Stock and the  Junior
    Preferred Stock.
 
(8) Preferred  stock dividends  include the  difference between  the liquidation
    value of the Senior  Preferred Stock and the  financial statement value  for
    all  periods  presented. For  pro  forma financial  statement  purposes, the
    Senior Preferred Stock is assumed to  be redeemed during the period and  the
    Junior Preferred Stock is assumed to be converted into Common Stock.
 
(9) The  Company  was  an  "S"  Corporation prior  to  the  consummation  of the
    Recapitalization on  June 5,  1996. The  pro forma  statement of  operations
    information  reflects adjustments to historical net  income (loss) as if the
    Company had elected "C" Corporation status for income tax purposes.
 
(10)Pro forma net income (loss) per  common share has been computed by  dividing
    pro  forma net income (loss), after reduction for preferred stock dividends,
    by the weighted average number of shares outstanding.
 
(11)Weighted average shares outstanding assumes  that: (i) the 6,750,000  shares
    of  Common Stock offered hereby, the  Common Stock issuable upon exercise of
    the Warrants (and common stock  equivalents) and the Junior Preferred  Stock
    Conversion  are outstanding during  each of the  periods presented, and (ii)
    the Common Stock to  be redeemed pursuant to  the Management Tax  Redemption
    was not outstanding during the period presented.
 
                                       21
<PAGE>
                UNAUDITED PRO FORMA CONDENSED BALANCE SHEET DATA
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                            AS OF DECEMBER 31, 1996
                                                                  --------------------------------------------
                                                                              ADJUSTMENTS        PRO FORMA
                                                                               RELATED TO         FOR THIS
                                                                   ACTUAL    THIS OFFERING        OFFERING
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
                                                                                 (IN THOUSANDS)
<S>                                                               <C>        <C>              <C>
ASSETS
 
Current assets:
  Cash and cash equivalents.....................................  $      47    $  11,703         $   11,750
  Accounts receivable...........................................      4,062      --                   4,062
  Inventories...................................................     49,705      --                  49,705
  Prepaid expenses and other current assets.....................      1,455      --                   1,455
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
    Total current assets........................................  $  55,269    $  11,703         $   66,972
Property and equipment, net.....................................     14,966      --                  14,966
Other assets....................................................      4,614       (1,123)(1)          3,491
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
      Total assets..............................................  $  74,849    $  10,580         $   85,429
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
 
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY (DEFICIT)
 
Current liabilities:
  Accounts payable..............................................  $  14,005    $ --              $   14,005
  Accrued expenses and other current liabilities................     10,292      --                  10,292
  Revolving line of credit......................................      3,536       (3,536)(2)       --
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
    Total current liabilities...................................  $  27,833    $  (3,536)        $   24,297
Long term debt..................................................    100,000      (33,333)(1)         66,667
Long term liabilities...........................................        645      --                     645
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
    Total liabilities...........................................  $ 128,478    $ (36,869)        $   91,609
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
Senior preferred stock..........................................     15,186      (15,186)(4)       --
Stockholders' equity (deficit):
  Junior preferred stock........................................    138,610     (138,610)(7)       --
  Warrants......................................................      6,500      --                   6,500
  Common stock..................................................         36          147(5)             183
  Additional paid in capital....................................     (6,966)     213,362(6)         206,396
  Retained deficit..............................................   (206,995)     (12,264)(8)       (219,259)
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
    Total stockholders' equity (deficit)........................  $ (68,815)   $  62,635         $   (6,180)
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
      Total liabilities and stockholders' equity (deficit)......  $  74,849    $  10,580         $   85,429
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
                                                                  ---------  --------------   ----------------
</TABLE>
 
  See accompanying notes to unaudited pro forma condensed balance sheet data.
 
                                       22
<PAGE>
           NOTES TO UNAUDITED PRO FORMA CONDENSED BALANCE SHEET DATA
 
(1) Assumes  a 10% premium to  be paid to redeem a  portion of the Senior Notes.
    Following the consummation of this  Offering, the Company intends to  redeem
    (or   repurchase  through  open   market  purchases  or   otherwise)  up  to
    approximately $33.3 million  of Senior  Notes. The  Company will  pay a  10%
    premium  on any redemptions of  Senior Notes and will  pay a premium, not to
    exceed 10%, on any repurchases (through open market purchases or  otherwise)
    of  Senior  Notes.  Such  redemption, or  repurchases,  will  result  in the
    proportionate reduction  of  long-term  debt  and  the  related  unamortized
    financing costs and accrued interest.
 
(2) Represents the application of a portion of the net proceeds of this Offering
    to repay the line of credit under the 1996 Credit Facility.
 
(3) Represents  payroll  taxes to  be  paid by  the  Company upon  conversion of
    management's Junior Preferred Stock to Common Stock.
 
(4) Represents the application of a portion of the net proceeds of this Offering
    to redeem the Senior Preferred Stock.
 
(5) Represents the adjustments to Common Stock as follows:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Net proceeds from this Offering..................................  $      68
<S>                                                                <C>
Conversion of Junior Preferred Stock.............................         92(7)
Redemption of Common Stock.......................................        (13)(12)
                                                                   ---------
                                                                   $     147
                                                                   ---------
                                                                   ---------
</TABLE>
 
(6) Represents adjustments to Additional Paid in Capital as follows:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Net proceeds from the Offering...................................  $  93,248
<S>                                                                <C>
Conversion of Junior Preferred Stock.............................    138,529(7)
Redemption of Common Stock.......................................    (18,415)(12)
                                                                   ---------
                                                                   $ 213,362
                                                                   ---------
                                                                   ---------
</TABLE>
 
(7) Represents the conversion of the Junior  Preferred Stock to Common Stock  in
    conjunction with this Offering.
 
(8) Represents the adjustments to retained earnings as follows:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Premium on redemption of Senior Preferred Stock..................  $    (648)(11)
<S>                                                                <C>
Assumed premium on redemption of 33.3% of the Senior Notes.......     (3,333)(9)
Write-off of a portion of deferred financing costs on Senior
 Notes...........................................................     (1,123)(1)
Dividend on Senior Preferred Stock...............................     (6,416)(10)
Payroll taxes....................................................       (744)(3)
                                                                   ---------
                                                                   $ (12,264)
                                                                   ---------
                                                                   ---------
</TABLE>
 
(9) Represents  an assumed  10% premium to  be paid  to redeem a  portion of the
    Senior Notes.  Following  the consummation  of  this Offering,  the  Company
    intends to redeem (or repurchase through open market purchases or otherwise)
    up  to approximately $33.3 million  of Senior Notes. The  Company will pay a
    10% premium on any redemptions of Senior  Notes and will pay a premium,  not
    to  exceed  10%,  on  any  repurchases  (through  open  market  purchases or
    otherwise) of Senior Notes.
 
(10)Represents the difference between the  amount of the Senior Preferred  Stock
    as  reported on the Financial Statements  to be redeemed and its liquidation
    value.
 
(11)Represents the 3% premium to be paid to redeem the Senior Preferred Stock.
 
(12)Represents the  redemption  of  shares  of  Common  Stock  pursuant  to  the
    Management Tax Redemption.
 
                                       23
<PAGE>
                    MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF
                 FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
 
GENERAL
 
    Guitar  Center  is the  nation's  leading retailer  of  guitars, amplifiers,
percussion instruments, keyboards and pro audio and recording equipment with  28
stores operating in 14 major markets as of December 31, 1996. From 1992 to 1996,
Guitar  Center's  net sales  and operating  income before  deferred compensation
expense grew at compound annual growth  rates of 25.6% and 43.0%,  respectively,
principally  due to comparable  store sales growth averaging  14.8% per year and
the opening of  new stores. Guitar  Center achieved comparable  store net  sales
growth  of 17.3%, 23.4% and 10.2% for  the fiscal years ended December 31, 1994,
1995 and  1996, respectively.  These increases  were primarily  attributable  to
increases  in unit sales rather  than increases in prices  or changes in product
mix. Management believes such volume increases  are the result of the  continued
success  of  the Company's  implementation of  its business  strategy, continued
strong growth in the music  products industry and increasing consumer  awareness
of the Guitar Center name. The Company does not expect comparable store sales to
continue to increase at historical rates.
 
    The Company opened seven stores in fiscal 1996 and presently expects to open
approximately  eight stores in each of fiscal  1997 and 1998. In preparation for
these additional  stores,  management  has dedicated  a  substantial  amount  of
resources  over the past several years  to building the infrastructure necessary
to support a large, national chain. For example, the Company spent $2.9  million
from  January 1,  1993 to December  31, 1995  on system upgrades  to support the
storewide integration of a  state-of-the-art management information system.  The
Company  has also established  centralized operating and  financial controls and
has implemented an extensive training program to ensure a high level of customer
service in its stores. Management believes  that the infrastructure is in  place
to  support  its needs  for the  immediately  foreseeable future,  including its
present expansion plans as described herein.
 
    Guitar Center's  expansion strategy  includes opening  additional stores  in
certain  of its existing markets and entering  new markets. As part of its store
expansion strategy, the Company opened five stores during a 14-month period from
October 1993 through November 1994.  Additionally, the Company opened one  store
in  December 1995 and seven stores in  1996. The Company will continue to pursue
its strategy  of  clustering  stores  in major  markets  to  take  advantage  of
operating  and advertising  efficiencies and  to build  awareness of  the Guitar
Center name in new markets.  In some markets where  the Company has pursued  its
clustering strategy, there has been some transfer of sales from certain existing
stores to new locations. Generally, however, mature stores have demonstrated net
sales  growth rates consistent  with the Company average.  As the Company enters
new  markets,  management   expects  that   it  will   initially  incur   higher
administrative  and advertising costs per store than it currently experiences in
established markets.
 
    The following table sets forth certain historical income statement data as a
percentage of net sales:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                            FISCAL YEAR ENDED
                                                                                               DECEMBER 31,
                                                                                    ----------------------------------
                                                                                       1994        1995        1996
                                                                                    ----------  ----------  ----------
<S>                                                                                 <C>         <C>         <C>
Net sales.........................................................................      100.0%      100.0%      100.0%
Gross profit......................................................................       28.5        27.7        28.2
Selling, general and administrative expenses......................................       20.3        19.2        19.4
                                                                                    ----------  ----------  ----------
Operating income before deferred compensation expense.............................        8.2         8.5         8.8
Deferred compensation expense.....................................................        0.9         1.8        33.7
                                                                                    ----------  ----------  ----------
Operating income (loss)...........................................................        7.3         6.7       (24.9)
Interest expense, net.............................................................        0.2         0.1         5.7
Transaction expenses and other....................................................      --          --            3.3
                                                                                    ----------  ----------  ----------
Income (loss) before income taxes.................................................        7.1         6.6       (33.9)
Income taxes......................................................................        0.3         0.2       --
                                                                                    ----------  ----------  ----------
Net income (loss).................................................................        6.8%        6.4%      (33.9)%
                                                                                    ----------  ----------  ----------
                                                                                    ----------  ----------  ----------
</TABLE>
 
                                       24
<PAGE>
    FISCAL 1996 COMPARED TO FISCAL 1995
 
    Net sales for  the year ended  December 31, 1996  increased 25.0% to  $213.3
million  from $170.7 million in fiscal 1995.  This growth was attributable to an
increase of $25.6 million in new store  net sales, accounting for 60.1% of  such
increase.  In addition,  comparable store  net sales  increased 10.2%,  or $17.0
million, accounting for 39.9% of such  increase. The increase in comparable  net
store  sales was primarily  attributable to increases in  unit sales rather than
increases in  prices  or  changes  in  the mix  of  sales  between  the  product
categories.  Such volume  increases were primarily  the result  of the continued
success of  the Company's  implementation of  its business  strategy,  continued
strong  growth in the music products  industry and increasing consumer awareness
of Guitar Center stores.
 
    Gross profit for  fiscal 1996  compared to  fiscal 1995  increased 27.1%  to
$60.1 million from $47.3 million in fiscal 1995. Gross profit as a percentage of
net  sales ("gross  margin") for  fiscal 1996 increased  to 28.2%  from 27.7% in
fiscal 1995.  This increase  in gross  margin was  primarily the  result of  the
introduction  and sales of higher margin high-technology pro audio and recording
equipment.
 
    Selling, general and administrative expenses for fiscal 1996 increased 26.6%
to $41.3 million  from $32.7  million in  fiscal 1995.  As a  percentage of  net
sales, selling, general and administrative expenses for fiscal 1996 increased to
19.4%  from 19.2% in fiscal 1995. This change reflects an increase in the number
of store employees in anticipation  of continued comparable store sales  growth,
as  well as the incremental cost of  staffing newly opened stores prior to sales
reaching mature levels. During fiscal 1996, seven new stores commenced operation
and were open an average  of four and a half  months. In addition, the  increase
reflects  increases in  corporate personnel  and management  information systems
expenses associated with the Company's continuing expansion.
 
    Deferred compensation expense  for fiscal  1996 increased  to $71.8  million
from  $3.1 million  in fiscal 1995.  The deferred  compensation expense resulted
from a $69.9 million charge related  to the purchase and exchange of  management
stock  options and the cancellation of  the Company's prior stock option program
and a  $1.9 million  non-cash charge  related to  stock options  granted by  the
Investors  to certain members  of management. These  expenses are non-recurring.
The Company has not, and will not, incur any obligation in connection with  such
grant  of  options  by  the Investors.  See  "The  Recapitalization  and Related
Transactions" and "Certain Transactions --  Options Granted by the Investors  to
Certain Members of Management."
 
    The  operating loss for fiscal 1996  was $53.0 million compared to operating
income of  $11.5  million  in  fiscal 1995.  Operating  income  before  deferred
compensation  expense increased 28.1%  to $18.7 million  from $14.6 million over
the comparable period.  As a percentage  of net sales,  operating income  before
deferred compensation expense for fiscal 1996 increased to 8.8% from 8.5% in the
prior year.
 
    Interest  expense, net for fiscal 1996  increased to $12.2 million from $0.4
million in  fiscal 1995.  This increase  was attributable  to the  write-off  of
financing  fees  of $4.7  million and  interest of  $7.5 million  on outstanding
borrowings during the seven months following the Recapitalization.
 
    Nonrecurring  transaction   expenses  of   $6.9  million   related  to   the
Recapitalization were expensed in fiscal 1996.
 
    Net  income (loss) for  fiscal 1996 decreased to  ($72.4) million from $10.9
million in fiscal 1995.
 
    FISCAL 1995 COMPARED TO FISCAL 1994
 
    Net sales for  the year ended  December 31, 1995  increased 32.3% to  $170.7
million  from $129.0 million in fiscal 1994.  This growth was attributable to an
increase of 23.4% in comparable store net sales which contributed $28.4 million,
or 68.1% of the  increase. In addition, $13.3  million was contributed from  new
store  sales  which  accounted  for  31.9%  of  the  increase.  The  increase in
comparable store net sales was primarily attributable to increases in unit sales
rather than increases in  prices or changes  in the mix  of products sold.  Such
volume  increases were primarily  the result of  the continued implementation of
the Company's business strategy, continued  strong growth in the music  products
industry and increasing consumer awareness of Guitar Center stores.
 
                                       25
<PAGE>
    Gross  profit for  fiscal 1995 increased  28.5% to $47.3  million from $36.8
million in fiscal  1994. Gross margin  for fiscal 1995  decreased to 27.7%  from
28.5%  in fiscal 1994. This decrease in gross margin was primarily the result of
(i) an  increase in  the proportion  of total  net sales  attributable to  lower
margin  pro-audio and recording  equipment and (ii) the  continuation of a sales
program which emphasized  volume increases,  customer service  and market  share
over gross margin.
 
    Selling, general and administrative expenses for fiscal 1995 increased 24.9%
to  $32.7 million  from $26.1  million in  fiscal 1994.  As a  percentage of net
sales, selling, general and administrative expenses for fiscal 1995 decreased to
19.2% from 20.3% in fiscal 1994 reflecting the leveraging of fixed expenses over
greater store net sales.
 
    Deferred compensation  expense  for fiscal  1995  increased 145.2%  to  $3.1
million  from  $1.3 million  in fiscal  1994.  Deferred compensation  relates to
non-cash expenses associated with the Company's prior stock option program.
 
    Operating income after deferred compensation for fiscal 1995 increased 22.9%
to $11.5 million  from $9.4  million for  fiscal 1994.  Operating income  before
deferred  compensation increased 37.4% to $14.6  million from $10.6 million over
the comparable period.  As a percentage  of net sales,  operating income  before
deferred  compensation for  fiscal 1995 increased  to 8.5% from  8.2% for fiscal
1994. This  increase was  primarily  attributable to  the decrease  in  selling,
general  and administrative expenses as a percentage of net sales, offset by the
decrease in gross margin.
 
    Interest expense, net for fiscal 1995  increased 46.0% to $0.4 million  from
$0.3  million  for  fiscal 1994.  This  increase was  attributable  to increased
borrowings to fund distributions to the Company's former sole stockholder.
 
    Net income  for fiscal  1995  increased 23.0%  to  $10.9 million  from  $8.8
million for fiscal 1994.
 
    FISCAL 1994 COMPARED TO FISCAL 1993
 
    Net  sales  for fiscal  1994 increased  32.6% to  $129.0 million  from $97.3
million in fiscal 1993. This growth was attributable to an increase of 17.3%  in
comparable  store sales which contributed $15.9 million, or 50% of the increase.
In addition, $15.8 million was contributed from new store sales which  accounted
for  50% of the increase.  The increase in comparable  store sales was primarily
attributable to increases in unit sales  rather than increases in prices or  the
mix  of products sold.  Such volume increases  were primarily the  result of the
implementation of the  Company's business strategy,  continued strong growth  in
the  music products industry and increasing  consumer awareness of Guitar Center
stores.
 
    Gross profit for  fiscal 1994 increased  27.7% to $36.8  million from  $28.8
million  in fiscal 1993.  Gross margin for  fiscal 1994 decreased  to 28.5% from
29.6% in fiscal 1993. This decrease in gross margin was primarily the result  of
(i)  an increase  in the  percentage of  total net  sales attributable  to lower
margin pro-audio and recording equipment and (ii) the implementation of a  sales
program  which emphasized  volume increases,  customer service  and market share
over gross margin.
 
    Selling, general and administrative expenses for fiscal 1994 increased 19.4%
to $26.1 million  from $21.9  million in  fiscal 1993.  As a  percentage of  net
sales, selling, general and administrative expenses for fiscal 1994 decreased to
20.3%  from 22.5%  in fiscal 1993,  reflecting the leveraging  of fixed expenses
over greater store net sales.
 
    Deferred compensation expense for fiscal 1994 decreased 9.4% to $1.3 million
from $1.4  million in  fiscal 1993.  Deferred compensation  relates to  non-cash
expenses associated with the Company's prior stock option program.
 
    Operating income after deferred compensation for fiscal 1994 increased 70.2%
to  $9.4  million from  $5.5 million  for fiscal  1993. Operating  income before
deferred compensation increased 54.2%  to $10.6 million  from $6.9 million  over
the  comparable period.  As a percentage  of net sales,  operating income before
deferred compensation for  fiscal 1994 increased  to 8.2% from  7.1% for  fiscal
1993.  This  increase was  primarily attributable  to  the decrease  in selling,
general and administrative expenses as a percentage of net sales, offset by  the
decrease in gross profit as a percentage of net sales.
 
                                       26
<PAGE>
    Interest  expense, net  for fiscal 1994  remained unchanged  at $0.3 million
from fiscal 1993.
 
    Net income for fiscal 1994 increased 72.9% to $8.8 million from $5.1 million
for fiscal 1993.
 
LIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES
 
    Guitar Center's  need  for  liquidity will  arise  primarily  from  interest
payable on the indebtedness incurred in connection with the Recapitalization and
the   funding  of  the   Company's  capital  expenditure   and  working  capital
requirements. The Company has no mandatory  payments of principal on the  Senior
Notes  prior to their  final maturity in  2006 and has  no mandatory payments of
principal scheduled under the 1996 Credit Facility until the presently-scheduled
expiration of such facility in 2001.  The Company has historically financed  its
operations  through internally generated  funds and borrowings  under its credit
facilities.
 
    As of  February 14,  1997,  the Company  had  $5.9 million  outstanding  and
approximately  $18.8 million available  for additional borrowing  under the 1996
Credit Facility. The interest rate as of such date was 9.75% on prime rate based
borrowings  and  8.40%  on  Eurodollar  rate  based  borrowings.  The  agreement
underlying  the 1996 Credit  Facility expires June 1,  2001 and includes certain
restrictive covenants which, among other things, require the Company to maintain
certain financial ratios. The Company was in compliance with respect to all such
requirements as of December 31, 1996.
 
    For fiscal 1996, cash used in operating activities was $44.9 million. During
fiscal 1995,  cash provided  by  operating activities  was $16.4  million.  Cash
provided  by  financing  activities was  $49.3  million for  fiscal  1996, which
includes the effects of the Recapitalization. Cash used in financing  activities
during  fiscal 1995 was $15.3 million which consisted primarily of distributions
to the Company's former sole stockholder of $14.5 million.
 
    Capital expenditures totaled  $6.1 million  for fiscal  1996. The  Company's
capital   expenditures  related  to  the   opening  of  new  stores,  management
information systems and store remodels.
 
    The Company  intends to  pursue  an aggressive  growth strategy  by  opening
additional stores in new and existing markets. The Company operated 28 stores as
of  December  31, 1996,  seven  of which  were  opened during  fiscal  1996, and
presently expects to open approximately eight stores in each of fiscal 1997  and
1998. Each new store typically has required approximately $1.5 million for gross
inventory.  Historically,  the Company's  cost  of capital  improvements  for an
average new  store  has been  approximately  $450,000, consisting  of  leasehold
improvements,  fixtures  and equipment.  Pre-opening costs  for new  stores have
averaged approximately  $110,000  per  new  store, the  majority  of  which  are
expensed and the remaining portion of which are capitalized and amortized over a
twelve-month  period. Nominal pre-opening costs are incurred for the stores that
are relocated.
 
   
    The Company believes that there may be attractive opportunities to expand by
selectively acquiring existing  music product retailers.  The Company  regularly
considers  and evaluates  potential acquisition  candidates in  new and existing
market areas,  is currently  evaluating  several such  opportunities and  is  in
negotiations  regarding  one  possible acquisition.  Any  such  transactions may
involve the  payment by  the Company  of cash  or securities  (including  equity
securities),  or  a  combination  of  the foregoing.  As  of  the  date  of this
Prospectus, the Company has no existing agreements or commitments to effect  any
such  acquisition. There can  be no assurance  that the Company  will be able to
identify suitable acquisition candidates available for sale at reasonable prices
or consummate any acquisition or that any current negotiations will result in an
acquisition.
    
 
    Management believes that, following the  consummation of this Offering,  the
Company will have adequate capital resources and liquidity to meet its borrowing
obligations,  fund  all required  capital expenditures  and pursue  its business
strategy for at least  the next twelve months,  including its present plans  for
expansion  as described  elsewhere herein.  The Company's  capital resources and
liquidity are expected to be provided by the Company's cash flow from operations
and borrowings under the 1996  Credit Facility. Depending on market  conditions,
the  Company may also incur additional  indebtedness or issue equity securities.
There can be no  assurance that such additional  capital, if and when  required,
will be available on terms acceptable to the Company, if at all.
 
                                       27
<PAGE>
    In  December 1996, Chase  Ventures, Wells Fargo  and Weston Presidio granted
Investor Options to purchase an aggregate of 277,194 shares of Common Stock at a
purchase price of $4.33 per  share to certain officers  and key managers of  the
Company.  Under generally accepted accounting principles, the Company recorded a
non-cash, non-recurring compensation charge of approximately $1.9 million in the
fourth quarter of 1996 with an offsetting increase to stockholders' equity.  The
Company  is not a party to  this agreement and has not,  and will not, incur any
obligation in connection with such options. See "Certain Transactions -- Options
Granted by the Investors to Certain Members of Management."
 
INCOME TAXES
 
    The Company operated as an "S" corporation for all reported periods prior to
the Recapitalization. Accordingly,  federal taxes were  paid at the  stockholder
level  and the Company paid minimal state income taxes. Upon consummation of the
Recapitalization,  the  Company  eliminated  its  "S"  corporation  status  and,
accordingly,  became  subject  to federal,  state  and local  income  taxes. The
Company anticipates that the  impact of the termination  of the "S"  corporation
and  the election of the "C" corporation status on its future operations will be
that additional federal  and state  income taxes will  have to  be provided  and
charged  to the statement of operations. The Company believes, however, that the
cash impact to the Company  will be reduced as the  Company will no longer  make
distributions to its former sole stockholder. See "Unaudited Pro Forma Condensed
Statements of Operations."
 
    As  a result of the $72.4 million  loss incurred in fiscal 1996, the Company
has a  tax net  operating  loss carryforward  for  federal income  tax  purposes
aggregating  $64.2 million, which will expire if  unused in 2011. As of December
31, 1996, the Company had fully reserved the related deferred tax asset of $22.5
million.
 
SEASONALITY
 
    The Company's  results  are not  highly  seasonal, although,  as  with  most
retailers,  sales  in the  fourth  quarter are  typically  higher than  in other
quarters.
 
INFLATION
 
    The Company  believes  that  the  relatively  moderate  rates  of  inflation
experienced  in recent years have not had a significant impact on its nets sales
or profitability.
 
FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS
 
    This Prospectus  contains certain  forward-looking statements  relating  to,
among  other things,  future results of  operations, growth  plans, sales, gross
margin and  expense  trends,  capital  requirements  and  general  industry  and
business  conditions applicable to the Company. These forward-looking statements
are based largely  on the Company's  current expectations and  are subject to  a
number  of risks and uncertainties. Actual  results could differ materially from
these forward-looking statements.  Important factors to  consider in  evaluating
such  forward-looking statements include changes  in external competitive market
factors, change in the  Company's business strategy or  an inability to  execute
its  strategy due to unanticipated changes in the music products industry or the
economy in general, the emergence of new or growing specialty retailers of music
products and  various competitive  factors  that may  prevent the  Company  from
competing  successfully in existing  or future markets. In  light of these risks
and uncertainties,  many of  which  are described  in  greater detail  in  "Risk
Factors,"  there  can  be  no  assurance  that  the  forward-looking  statements
contained in this Prospectus will in fact be realized. See "Risk Factors."
 
                                       28
<PAGE>
                                    BUSINESS
 
COMPANY HISTORY
 
    Guitar Center was  founded in 1964  in Hollywood, California.  In 1972,  the
Company  opened its second store in San  Francisco to capitalize on the emerging
San Francisco rock 'n  roll scene. By this  time, Guitar Center's inventory  had
been  expanded  to  include  drums, keyboards,  accessories  and  pro  audio and
recording equipment. Throughout  the 1980s,  Guitar Center  expanded by  opening
nine  stores in  five major markets  including Chicago,  Dallas and Minneapolis.
Since 1990, the Company has continued its new store expansion and has focused on
building the  infrastructure necessary  to  manage the  Company's  strategically
planned  growth. Current executive officers and  key managers have been with the
Company for an  average of  11 years  and two  of such  executive officers  (the
Company's President and Chief Executive Officer and the Company's Executive Vice
President  and  Chief  Operating  Officer)  effectively  assumed  full operating
control in 1992. Since then, management has focused on developing and  realizing
its  long-term  goal of  expanding its  position as  the leading  music products
retailer throughout the United States.
 
    Guitar Center's flagship Hollywood  store currently is  one of the  nation's
largest  and  best-known retail  stores of  its  kind with  approximately 30,600
square feet of  retail space. The  Hollywood store features  one of the  largest
used  and vintage guitar collections in the United States, attracting buyers and
collectors from around the world.  In front of the  Hollywood store is the  Rock
Walk  which memorializes over  70 famous musicians and  music pioneers. The Rock
Walk attracts several tour  buses daily and has  helped to create  international
recognition of the Guitar Center name.
 
BUSINESS
 
    Guitar  Center  is the  nation's  leading retailer  of  guitars, amplifiers,
percussion instruments, keyboards and pro audio and recording equipment with  28
stores  operating in 14 major  U.S. markets as of  December 31, 1996, including,
among others,  areas in  or near  Los Angeles,  San Francisco,  Chicago,  Miami,
Houston,  Dallas,  Detroit, Boston  and  Minneapolis. From  fiscal  1992 through
fiscal 1996,  the  Company's net  sales  and operating  income  before  deferred
compensation  expense grew at  compound annual growth rates  of 25.6% and 43.0%,
respectively. This growth was  principally the result  of strong and  consistent
comparable  store sales  growth, averaging  14.8% per  year over  such five-year
period, and the opening of 13 new stores. Comparable store sales (stores  opened
for  at least 14 months)  for fiscal 1992, 1993, 1994,  1995 and 1996 were $85.6
million, $95.4  million,  $113.2 million,  $157.5  million and  $187.7  million,
respectively.
 
    Guitar Center offers a unique retail concept in the music products industry,
combining  an interactive,  hands-on shopping experience  with superior customer
service and a broad selection of brand name, high-quality products at guaranteed
low prices. The Company creates an  entertaining and exciting atmosphere in  its
stores  with bold and dramatic merchandise presentations, highlighted by bright,
multi-colored lighting,  high ceilings,  music and  videos. Management  believes
approximately  80%  of  the Company's  sales  are to  professional  and aspiring
musicians who  generally  view  the  purchase of  music  products  as  a  career
necessity.  These sophisticated customers rely  upon the Company's knowledgeable
and highly trained salespeople  to answer technical questions  and to assist  in
product demonstrations.
 
    The  Guitar Center prototype  store generally ranges in  size from 12,000 to
15,000 square feet (as compared to  a typical music products retail store  which
averages approximately 3,200 square feet) and is designed to encourage customers
to  hold and play instruments. Each store carries an average of 7,000 core SKUs,
which management believes is significantly greater than a typical music products
retail store,  and is  organized  into five  departments,  each focused  on  one
product category. These departments cater to a musician's specific product needs
and  are  staffed  by  specialized  salespeople,  many  of  whom  are practicing
musicians. Management believes  this retail concept  differentiates the  Company
from its competitors and encourages repeat business.
 
    Guitar Center stores historically have generated strong and stable operating
results.  All of  the Company's  stores, after  being open  for at  least twelve
months, have had positive store-level operating income in each of the past  five
fiscal years.
 
                                       29
<PAGE>
    The following summarizes certain key operating statistics of a Guitar Center
store  and is based upon the 21 stores operated by the Company for the full year
ended December 31, 1996:
 
<TABLE>
<S>                                                              <C>
Average 1996 net sales per square foot.........................  $      707
Average 1996 net sales per store...............................   9,148,000
Average 1996 store-level operating income (1)..................   1,402,000
Average 1996 store-level operating income margin (1)...........       15.3%
</TABLE>
 
- ------------------------
   
(1) Store-level operating income includes individual store revenue and  expenses
    plus  allocated rebates,  cash discounts and  purchasing department salaries
    (based upon individual store sales).
    
 
   
    Guitar Center stores have typically generated positive store-level operating
income within the first  three months of opening.  In addition, based on  stores
which  have opened since fiscal 1993 and operated for at least 14 months, Guitar
Center  stores  have   demonstrated  high  store-level   operating  income   and
store-level  operating income  margins averaging approximately  $0.6 million and
11.5%, respectively, and sales per square foot averaging $498, during the  first
full twelve months of operations.
    
 
    Management  is  highly  committed  to the  success  of  Guitar  Center. Upon
consummation  of  this  Offering  and  the  transactions  contemplated  thereby,
executive officers and key managers will beneficially own approximately 18.8% of
the  Company's outstanding  Common Stock.  The Company's  growth strategy  is to
continue to increase its presence in its existing markets and to open new stores
in strategically  selected markets.  The  Company will  continue to  pursue  its
strategy  of clustering stores  in major markets to  take advantage of operating
and advertising efficiencies and to build awareness of the Guitar Center name in
new markets. The  Company opened a  total of  seven stores in  fiscal 1996,  and
presently  expects to open approximately eight stores in each of fiscal 1997 and
fiscal 1998.  The Company  has  committed substantial  resources to  building  a
corporate infrastructure and management information systems that it believes can
support  the Company's needs, including its expansion plans, for the foreseeable
future.
 
    For fiscal years ended December 31,  1993, 1994, 1995 and 1996, the  Company
had  net income (loss) of $5.1 million,  $8.8 million, $10.9 million and ($72.4)
million, respectively. The  results for  fiscal 1996 reflect  $11.6 million  for
transaction   costs  and  financing   fees  incurred  in   connection  with  the
Recapitalization  and  non-recurring  deferred  compensation  expense  of  $71.8
million, substantially all of which related to the Recapitalization.
 
INDUSTRY OVERVIEW
 
    The  United States retail market for music products in 1995 was estimated in
a study by MUSIC TRADES magazine to be approximately $5.5 billion in net  sales,
representing  a  five year  compound  annual growth  rate  of 7.9%.  The broadly
defined music products market,  according to the  National Association of  Music
Merchants  ("NAMM"), includes  retail sales  of string  and fretted instruments,
sound reinforcement  and recording  equipment,  drums, keyboards,  print  music,
pianos,  organs and school  band and orchestral  instruments. Products currently
offered by  Guitar  Center include  categories  of products  which  account  for
approximately  $4.0 billion  of this  market, representing  a five-year compound
annual growth rate of  8.6%. The music products  market as currently defined  by
NAMM,  however,  does  not  include the  significant  used  and  vintage product
markets, or  the  computer software  or  apparel  market in  which  the  Company
actively  participates. According to findings by a Gallup Survey, as reported by
NAMM, there were 62 million amateur musicians in the United States in 1994, with
62% of households characterized as  "player households," in which someone  plays
or has played a musical instrument.
 
    The  industry  is highly  fragmented with  the  nation's leading  five music
products retailers,  as  measured by  the  number  of stores  operated  by  such
retailers  (I.E, the Company,  Sam Ash Music  Corp, Brook Mays/C&S/H&H, Fletcher
Music Center and Musicians Friend,  Inc.), accounting for approximately 8.4%  of
the  industry's estimated $5.5 billion in net sales in 1995. Furthermore, ninety
percent of the  industry's estimated  8,200 retailers  operate only  one or  two
stores.  A typical music products store averages approximately 3,200 square feet
and  generates  an  average  of   approximately  $0.6  million  in  annual   net
 
                                       30
<PAGE>
sales.  In contrast, a Guitar Center store generally averages between 12,000 and
15,000 square  feet and  in  1996 generated  an  average of  approximately  $8.3
million  in  annual net  sales  for stores  open  the full  year  (excluding the
Company's Hollywood store).
 
    Over the  past  ten  years,  technological advances  in  the  industry  have
resulted   in  dramatic  changes  to   the  nature  of  music-related  products.
Manufacturers have  combined  computers and  micro-processor  technologies  with
musical  equipment to create a new generation  of products capable of high grade
sound processing  and  reproduction.  Products  featuring  this  technology  are
available  in a variety of forms and  have broad applications across most of the
Company's  music  product  categories.  Most  importantly,  rapid  technological
advances  have resulted in the continued introduction of higher quality products
offered at lower  prices. For  example, today  an individual  consumer can  more
affordably  create  a  home  recording  studio  which  interacts  with  personal
computers and is  capable of  producing high-quality  digital recordings.  Until
recently,  this type of  powerful sound processing  capability was prohibitively
expensive and  was  typically purchased  only  by professional  sound  recording
studios.
 
    Management  believes that  an opportunity  exists to  capitalize on  a large
untapped market for musical  instruments that is  continuously expanding due  in
part  to various technological advances. Management believes it has demonstrated
an ability  to  tap  into  this  market by  offering  a  depth  and  breadth  of
merchandise  previously  unavailable  from  more  traditional  retailers  and by
increasing consumer  awareness  with aggressive  radio  and mail  campaigns  and
guaranteed low prices.
 
BUSINESS STRATEGY
 
    Management's  goal is to continue to  expand Guitar Center's position as the
leading music  products retailer  throughout the  United States.  The  principal
elements of the Company's business strategy are as follows:
 
        EXPANSION  STRATEGY.  Guitar Center's  expansion strategy is to continue
    to  increase  its  market  share  in  existing  markets  and  to   penetrate
    strategically  selected markets. The Company opened  a total of seven stores
    in fiscal 1996, and currently anticipates opening approximately eight stores
    in each of fiscal 1997 and  fiscal 1998. In preparation for this  expansion,
    management has dedicated a substantial amount of its resources over the past
    several  years to building  the infrastructure necessary  to support a large
    national chain.  In  addition,  the  Company believes  it  has  developed  a
    methodology  for targeting prospective store  sites which includes analyzing
    demographic and psychographic characteristics of a potential store location.
    See "-- Site Selection."  Management also believes  there may be  attractive
    opportunities  to expand  by selectively  acquiring existing  music products
    retailers.
 
        EXTENSIVE SELECTION OF MERCHANDISE.   Guitar Center offers an  extensive
    selection of brand name music products complemented by lesser known, hard to
    find  items  and  unique, vintage  equipment.  The average  7,000  core SKUs
    offered through each  Guitar Center  store provide  a breadth  and depth  of
    in-stock  items which management believes  is not available from traditional
    music products retailers.
 
        HIGHLY INTERACTIVE, MUSICIAN-FRIENDLY  STORE CONCEPT.   The purchase  of
    musical  instruments is a highly personal decision for musicians. Management
    therefore  believes  that  a  large   part  of  the  Company's  success   is
    attributable   to  its  creative   instrument  presentations  and  colorful,
    interactive  displays  which  encourage  the  customer  to  hold  and   play
    instruments  as well as to participate in product demonstrations. Each store
    also  provides  private  sound-controlled  rooms  to  enhance  a  customer's
    listening experience while testing various instruments.
 
        EXCEPTIONAL   CUSTOMER  SERVICE.     Exceptional   customer  service  is
    fundamental to the  Company's operating strategy.  Accordingly, the  Company
    conducts  extensive training programs for its salespeople, who specialize in
    one of  the  Company's  five  product  categories.  Many  of  the  Company's
    salespeople  are  also  musicians.  With  the  advances  in  technology  and
    continuous  new  product  introductions  in  the  music  products  industry,
    customers increasingly rely on qualified
 
                                       31
<PAGE>
    salespeople  to offer  expert advice  and assist  in product demonstrations.
    Management believes  that  its emphasis  on  training and  customer  service
    distinguishes  the Company  within the  industry and  is a  critical part of
    Guitar Center's success.
 
        INNOVATIVE PROMOTIONAL AND MARKETING  PROGRAMS.  Guitar Center  sponsors
    innovative   promotional  and   marketing  events   which  include  in-store
    demonstrations, famous artist  appearances and weekend  themed sales  events
    designed  to create significant store traffic and exposure. In addition, the
    Company's special grand opening  activities in new  markets are designed  to
    generate  consumer awareness for  each new store.  Management believes these
    events help the  Company to  build a loyal  customer base  and to  encourage
    repeat  business. Since  its inception, the  Company has  compiled a unique,
    proprietary  database  containing  information  on  more  than  one  million
    customers. This database enables Guitar Center to advertise to select target
    customers  based  on historical  buying patterns.  The Company  believes the
    typical music  products retailer  does  not have  the resources  to  support
    large-scale promotional events or an extensive advertising program.
 
        GUARANTEED  LOW PRICES.   Guitar  Center endeavors  to be  the low price
    leader in  each of  its markets,  as  underscored by  its 30-day  low  price
    guarantee.  The  Company's  size  permits it  to  take  advantage  of volume
    discounts for large  orders and  other vendor  supported programs.  Although
    prices  are  usually  determined on  a  regional basis,  store  managers are
    trained and  authorized  to  adjust  prices  in  response  to  local  market
    conditions.
 
        EXPERIENCED  AND MOTIVATED MANAGEMENT TEAM.   The executive officers and
    key managers have an average of 11 years with the Company. In addition, upon
    consummation of  this  Offering and  the  application of  the  net  proceeds
    therefrom,  executive  officers  and  key  managers  will  beneficially  own
    approximately  18.8%  of  the   Company's  outstanding  Common  Stock.   See
    "Management" and "Principal Stockholders."
 
MERCHANDISING
 
    Guitar  Center's merchandising concept differentiates  the Company from most
of its competitors. The Company creates an entertaining and exciting  atmosphere
in  its stores with bold and  dramatic merchandise presentations, highlighted by
bright, multi-colored lighting,  high ceilings,  music and  videos. The  Company
offers  its  merchandise  at  guaranteed  low  prices  and  utilizes  aggressive
marketing and  advertising  to  attract  new  customers  and  maintain  existing
customer   loyalty.  The  principal  elements  of  the  Company's  merchandising
philosophy are as follows:
 
    EXTENSIVE SELECTION OF MERCHANDISE.  The  Company seeks to maintain a  broad
customer appeal by offering high-quality merchandise at multiple price points to
serve  musicians ranging  from the casual  hobbyist to  the serious professional
performer. Guitar  Center  offers  five  primary  product  categories:  guitars,
amplifiers,  percussion  instruments,  keyboards  and  pro  audio  and recording
equipment.
 
          GUITARS.  The Company believes that Guitar Center's electric, acoustic
    and bass  guitar  selections are  among  the  deepest and  broadest  in  the
    industry.  Each store features  for sale 300  to 500 guitars  on the "guitar
    wall" and  also displays  many autographed  instruments from  world-renowned
    musicians.  Major manufacturers,  including Fender,  Gibson, Taylor, Martin,
    Ovation and Ibanez, are well represented  in popular models and colors.  The
    Company   believes  it  has  one  of   the  largest  selections  of  custom,
    one-of-a-kind and used/vintage  guitars of any  retailer. Prices range  from
    $175 for entry-level guitars to over $50,000 for special vintage guitars. In
    addition,  the Company has recently expanded  its line of string instruments
    to include  banjos, mandolins  and dobros,  among others.  The Company  also
    offers  an extensive selection of guitar sound processing units and products
    which  allow  the  guitar  to  interface  with  a  personal  computer.   The
    introduction  of such equipment  has enabled the  Company to serve crossover
    demand from  the  traditional  guitarist  into  new  computer-related  sound
    products.
 
          AMPLIFIERS.  The Company offers an extensive selection of electric and
    bass guitar amplifiers and in addition carries a broad selection of boutique
    and vintage amplifiers with prices ranging from $50 to $3,000. Guitar Center
    represents  most manufacturers, including Marshall, Fender, Crate, Ampeg and
    Roland.
 
                                       32
<PAGE>
          PERCUSSION INSTRUMENTS.   The Company believes  that Guitar Center  is
    one  of the largest  retailers of percussion products  in the United States.
    The Company's offerings range from basic drum kits to free standing  African
    congos and bongos and other rhythmic and electronic percussion products with
    prices  ranging from $10 to $10,000. The  Company also has a large selection
    of vintage  and  used  percussion  instruments.  Name  brands  include  Drum
    Workshop,  Remo,  Sabian, Pearl,  Yamaha,  Premier, Tama  and  Zildjian. The
    Company carries an extensive  selection of digital drum  kits and hand  held
    digital  drum units.  The digital  units produce  a variety  of high quality
    life-like drum sounds and have broad appeal to musicians.
 
          KEYBOARDS.   Guitar  Center  carries  a  wide  selection  of  keyboard
    products  and computer peripheral and  software packages with prices ranging
    from $150 to $5,000. The Company  offers an extensive selection of  software
    for  the  professional, hobbyist,  studio engineer  and the  post production
    market enthusiast. The product  line covers a  broad range of  manufacturers
    including  Roland, Korg, Emu and Ensoniq. The Company also maintains a broad
    selection of  computer related  accessories,  including sound  cards,  sound
    libraries and composition, sequence and recording software.
 
          PRO  AUDIO AND  RECORDING EQUIPMENT.   Guitar  Center's pro  audio and
    recording equipment division offers products  ranging in price from $100  to
    $25,000  for  musicians at  every  level, from  the  casual hobbyist  to the
    professional  recording  engineer.  Guitar  Center's  products  range   from
    recording  tape to state-of-the-art digital  recorders. The Company believes
    it also carries  one of  the largest  pro audio  assortment of  professional
    stage  audio equipment  for small traveling  bands, private  clubs and large
    touring professional  bands. The  Company's major  brand name  manufacturers
    include JBL, Panasonic, Sony, Mackie, Tascam and Alesis.
 
    BROAD  USED  MERCHANDISE  SELECTION.    Guitar  Center  offers  an extensive
selection of used merchandise,  the majority of  which derives from  instruments
traded  in or sold to Guitar Center  by customers. The Company believes that its
trade-in  policy  assists  in  attracting   sales  by  providing  musicians   an
alternative form of payment and the convenience of selling an old instrument and
purchasing  a new one at a single  location. Used products are bought and priced
to sell by store  managers who are  well trained and  knowledgeable in the  used
musical instrument market.
 
    GUARANTEED  LOW PRICES.  Guitar  Center endeavors to be  the price leader in
each of the markets it  serves. The Company is one  of the leading retailers  in
each  of its  product categories and  its size  permits it to  take advantage of
volume discounts  for  large orders  and  other vendor  supported  programs.  To
maintain  this strategy of guaranteed low prices, the Company routinely monitors
prices in each  of its  markets to assure  that its  prices remain  competitive.
Although prices are typically determined on a regional basis, store managers are
trained  and authorized to adjust prices in response to local market conditions.
The Company underscores its  low price guarantee by  providing a cash refund  of
the  price difference if  an identical item  is advertised by  a competitor at a
lower price within thirty days of the customer's purchase.
 
    DIRECT MARKETING, ADVERTISING AND PROMOTION.  The Company's advertising  and
promotion  strategy is designed  to enhance the Guitar  Center name and increase
consumer awareness and  loyalty. The advertising  and promotional campaigns  are
developed  around  "events" designed  to attract  significant store  traffic and
exposure. Guitar Center regularly plans  large promotional events including  the
Green  Tag Sale  in March,  the Anniversary  Sale in  August, the  Blues Fest in
October and the Guitar-a-thon in December. The Company believes that its special
events have a broad reach as many of them have occurred annually during the past
twenty years. These  events are often  coordinated with product  demonstrations,
interactive displays, clinics and in-store artist appearances.
 
    As  Guitar Center enters  new markets, it  initiates an advertising program,
including mail and radio promotions  and other special grand opening  activities
designed  to accelerate sales volume for each new store. Radio advertising plays
a  significant  part  in  the  Company's  store-opening  campaign  to   generate
excitement and create customer awareness.
 
                                       33
<PAGE>
    Guitar  Center  maintains  a  unique  and  proprietary  database  containing
information on  over  one million  customers.  The Company  believes  that  this
database  assists in generating repeat business  by targeting customers based on
their purchasing  history  and by  permitting  Guitar Center  to  establish  and
maintain personal relationships with its customers.
 
CUSTOMER SERVICE
 
    Exceptional  customer  service  is fundamental  to  the  Company's operating
strategy. With  the  rapid changes  in  technology and  continuous  new  product
introductions,  customers depend  on salespeople to  offer expert  advice and to
assist with product demonstrations. Guitar Center believes that its well trained
and highly knowledgeable salesforce differentiates  it from its competitors  and
is  critical  to  maintaining  customer confidence  and  loyalty.  The Company's
employees are typically musicians who are selected and trained to understand the
needs of their customers.  Salespeople specialize in one  of the Company's  five
product  categories and begin  training on their first  day of employment. Sales
and management training programs are implemented on an ongoing basis to maintain
and continually improve the level of  customer service and sales support in  the
stores.  Based  on examination  results,  an employee  is  given a  rating which
determines his or her salary and level of responsibility. Guitar Center believes
that its employee  testing program  impresses upon  its salespeople  a sense  of
professionalism  and reduces employee turnover by providing salespeople with the
opportunity to  increase their  salary by  advancing through  the  certification
program.  The Company believes that due to  its emphasis on training, it is able
to attract and retain well-qualified, highly motivated salespeople committed  to
providing  superior  customer  service.  In addition,  each  salesperson  in the
keyboards and pro audio  and recording departments is  certified by a  technical
advisory board after satisfactory completion of an extensive training program.
 
    The  Company's customer  base consists of  (i) the  professional or aspiring
musician who makes or hopes to make a living through music and (ii) the  amateur
musician  or hobbyist who  views music as  recreation. Management estimates that
professional and aspiring musicians, who  view the purchase of musical  products
as  a career  necessity, represent approximately  65% of  the Company's customer
base, and account for approximately 80% of the Company's sales. These  customers
make  frequent visits to a store  and develop relationships with the salesforce.
Guitar Center  generates repeat  business  and is  successful in  utilizing  its
unique  and proprietary database to market  selectively to these customers based
on  past  buying   patterns.  In  addition,   Guitar  Center  services   touring
professionals, providing customized products for musical artists.
 
STORE OPERATIONS
 
    To  facilitate  its strategy  of accelerated  but controlled  growth, Guitar
Center has  centralized  many  key  aspects of  its  operations,  including  the
development  of policies and procedures,  accounting systems, training programs,
store layouts,  purchasing  and  replenishment, advertising  and  pricing.  Such
centralization   effectively  utilizes  the  experience  and  resources  of  the
Company's headquarters staff to establish a high level of consistency throughout
all of the Guitar Center stores.
 
    The Company's store operations  are led by its  Chief Operating Officer  and
five  regional  store  managers  with  each  regional  manager  responsible  for
approximately four to  eight stores. Store  management is comprised  of a  store
manager,  a sales manager,  an operations manager,  two assistant store managers
and five department  managers. Each  store also has  a warehouse  manager and  a
sales staff that ranges from 20 to 40 employees.
 
    The  Company ensures  that store  managers are  well-trained and experienced
individuals who will maintain  the Guitar Center  store concept and  philosophy.
Each  manager completes an extensive training  program which instills the values
of operating  as a  business owner,  and only  experienced store  employees  are
promoted  to the position  of store manager.  As a result  of this strategy, the
average tenure of the store managers  is approximately seven years. The  Company
seeks  to  encourage  responsiveness  and  entrepreneurship  at  each  store  by
providing store managers with a relatively  high degree of autonomy relating  to
operations,  personnel and merchandising. Managers play  an integral role in the
selection and  presentation of  merchandise, as  well as  the promotion  of  the
Guitar Center reputation.
 
                                       34
<PAGE>
    The  Company views its  employees as long-term members  of the Guitar Center
team. The Company  encourages employee development  by providing the  salesforce
with  extensive training and  the opportunity to  increase both compensation and
responsibility level through  increased product knowledge  and performance.  The
Company's  aggressive growth strategy provides employees with the opportunity to
move into operations,  sales and  store management  positions, which  management
believes  is not available at  most other music retailers.  As the Company opens
new stores,  key  in-store management  positions  are primarily  filled  by  the
qualified  and  experienced  employees  from  existing  stores.  By  adopting  a
"promotion from within" strategy, Guitar Center maintains a well trained, loyal,
and  enthusiastic  salesforce  that  is   motivated  by  the  Company's   strong
opportunities  for  advancement.  Both  Larry Thomas  and  Marty  Albertson, the
Company's Chief  Executive Officer  and Chief  Operating Officer,  respectively,
began their careers as salespersons at Guitar Center.
 
PURCHASING, DISTRIBUTION AND INVENTORY CONTROL
 
    PURCHASING.   Guitar Center believes it has excellent relationships with its
vendors and, as  one of  the industry's largest  volume purchasers,  is able  to
receive  priority  shipping  and  access to  its  vendors'  premium  products on
favorable terms. The Company maintains  a centralized buying group comprised  of
merchandise  managers, buyers and planners.  Merchandise managers and buyers are
responsible for the  selection and  development of product  assortments and  the
negotiation  of prices  and terms.  The Company  uses a  proprietary merchandise
replenishment system which automatically analyzes and forecasts sales trends for
each SKU using various statistical  models, supporting the buyers by  predicting
each  store's merchandise  requirements. This  has resulted  in limited  "out of
stock" positions.
 
    The  Company's  business  and  its  expansion  plans  are  dependent  to   a
significant  degree  upon  its  vendors.  As it  believes  is  customary  in the
industry, the Company  does not  have any  long-term supply  contracts with  its
vendors. See "Risk Factors -- Dependence on Suppliers."
 
    DISTRIBUTION.   Guitar Center products are typically shipped direct from the
manufacturer to  individual  stores,  minimizing  handling  costs  and  reducing
freight  expense.  Management continues  to evaluate  the cost  effectiveness of
operating a  distribution center  in comparison  to a  direct ship  program  and
believes  it can  implement its growth  strategy without  a central distribution
center.
 
    INVENTORY CONTROL.  Management has  invested significant time and  resources
in  its  inventory  control  systems  and  believes  it  has  one  of  the  most
sophisticated systems in the music products retail industry. Management believes
the vast majority of music product retailers do not use a computerized inventory
management system. Guitar Center performs cycle inventory counts daily, both  to
measure  shrinkage and  to update  the perpetual  inventory on  a store-by-store
basis. The  Company's  shrinkage level  has  historically been  very  low  which
management  attributes to  its highly  sophisticated system  controls and strong
corporate culture.
 
SITE SELECTION
 
    The Company believes it  has developed a unique  and, what historically  has
been, a highly effective selection criteria to identify prospective store sites.
In evaluating the suitability of a particular location, the Company concentrates
on  the demographics  of its  target customer  as well  as traffic  patterns and
specific site characteristics such as visibility, accessibility, traffic volume,
shopping patterns and  availability of  adequate parking.  Stores are  typically
located  in  free-standing  locations  to maximize  their  outside  exposure and
signage. Due  to the  fact  that the  Company's  vendors drop  ship  merchandise
directly  to the stores, the Company's expansion plans are dependent more on the
characteristics of the  individual store  site than  any logistical  constraints
that  would  be  imposed  by  a central  distribution  facility.  See  "-- Store
Locations."
 
MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS
 
    Guitar Center has invested  significant resources in management  information
systems that provide real-time information both by store and by SKU. The systems
have  been designed  to integrate  all major  aspects of  the Company's business
including   sales,   gross   margins,    inventory   levels,   purchase    order
 
                                       35
<PAGE>
management,  automated replenishment  and merchandise  planning. Guitar Center's
highly sophisticated management information systems provide the Company with the
ability to monitor all critical aspects of store activity on a real-time  basis.
Guitar  Center's  system capabilities  include inter-store  transactions, vendor
analysis, serial  number  tracking,  inventory  analysis  and  commission  sales
reporting.  Guitar Center believes that the systems it has developed will enable
the Company to continue to  improve customer service and operational  efficiency
and support the Company's needs for the immediately foreseeable future.
 
COMPETITION
 
    The  retail market  for musical  instruments is  highly fragmented  with the
nation's leading five music products retailers accounting for approximately 8.4%
of the industry's net sales in 1995. The Company's largest competitor, Sam  Ash,
operates  ten stores  in the  New York  City area  and two  stores in  the South
Florida area. The Company currently has no stores in the New York City area. The
Company competes with many different types of retail stores, primarily specialty
retailers and music product catalogue retailers.
 
    Guitar Center  believes that  the  ability to  compete successfully  in  its
markets  is  determined by  several factors,  including  breadth and  quality of
product  selection,  pricing,   effective  merchandise  presentation,   customer
service,  store location  and proprietary database  marketing programs. Customer
satisfaction is paramount to Guitar Center's operating strategy and the  Company
believes  that providing knowledgeable and friendly  customer service gives it a
competitive advantage. The store environment  is designed to be an  entertaining
and  exciting environment  in which  to shop.  In an  effort to  exceed customer
expectations, Guitar Center stores  provide a number  of services not  generally
offered  by most competitors, including the ability to hold and use merchandise,
product demonstrations and extensive  product selection. Salespeople are  highly
trained  and specialize in one of  the Company's five product areas. Salespeople
are certified  by  an  outside  technical advisory  board,  based  on  extensive
training   and  product  knowledge  testing.  The  Company  believes  that  this
certification process has increased the  professionalism of its employees  while
reducing  turnover. Customers are encouraged to help themselves to the displayed
instruments or to seek the assistance of the professional salespeople.
 
    Certain  factors,  however,  could  materially  and  adversely  affect   the
Company's  ability  to compete  successfully  in its  markets,  including, among
others, the expansion by the Company  into new markets in which its  competitors
are  already  established,  competitors'  expansion into  markets  in  which the
Company is currently operating, the adoption by competitors of innovative  store
formats  and retail  sales methods  or the  entry into  the Company's  market by
competitors with substantial financial or other resources. See "Risk Factors  --
Aggressive Growth Strategy; -- Competition."
 
EMPLOYEES
 
    As  of December 31, 1996, Guitar Center employed approximately 1,010 people,
of whom  approximately 480  were  hourly employees  and approximately  530  were
salaried.  To date, the Company has been  able to recruit qualified personnel to
manage or staff its  stores. None of  the Company's employees  are covered by  a
collective  bargaining agreement.  Management believes  that the  Company enjoys
good employee relations.
 
PROPERTIES
 
    Guitar Center leases  all but five  of its stores  and presently intends  to
lease  all new  locations. The terms  of the  store leases are  generally for 10
years and typically  allow the  Company to  renew for  two additional  five-year
terms.  Most of the leases  require the Company to  pay property tax, utilities,
normal repairs, common  area maintenance and  insurance expenses. Guitar  Center
leases  its corporate  offices of  approximately 20,000  square feet,  which are
located at  5155 Clareton  Drive, Agoura  Hills, California  91301. Due  to  the
Company's  expansion  which  has  included  the  hiring  of  new  corporate  and
administrative personnel, the Company is  currently evaluating whether to  lease
additional  space in  a nearby  location. The  Company believes  that sufficient
additional space is available on reasonable terms.
 
                                       36
<PAGE>
STORE LOCATIONS
 
    The  table  below sets  forth certain  information concerning  Guitar Center
stores:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                 APPROXIMATE
                                                                       YEAR      GROSS SQUARE
STORE                                                                 OPENED         FEET        LEASE/OWN
- -------------------------------------------------------------------  ---------  --------------  -----------
<S>                                                                  <C>        <C>             <C>
ARIZONA
  Phoenix..........................................................     (1)         13,900      Lease
  Tempe............................................................     (1)         12,500      Lease
SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA
  Hollywood........................................................    1964         30,600      Own
  San Diego........................................................    1973         13,500      Own
  Fountain Valley..................................................    1980         13,700      Lease
  Sherman Oaks.....................................................    1982         10,900      Own (2)
  Covina...........................................................    1985         15,400      Lease
  Lawndale.........................................................    1985         15,700      Lease
  San Bernardino...................................................    1993          9,500      Lease
  Brea.............................................................    1995         14,900      Lease
  San Marcos.......................................................    1996         14,900      Lease
NORTHERN CALIFORNIA
  San Francisco....................................................    1972         11,900      Lease
  San Jose.........................................................    1978         14,200      Own
  El Cerrito.......................................................    1983         21,300(3)   Lease
  Pleasant Hill....................................................    1996         11,300      Lease
FLORIDA
  North Miami area.................................................    1996         22,300      Lease
  South Miami area.................................................    1996         14,700      Lease
ILLINOIS
  South Chicago....................................................    1979         11,300      Lease
  North Chicago....................................................    1981         10,400      Lease
  Central Chicago..................................................    1988          8,700      Own
  Villa Park.......................................................    1996         15,000      Lease
MASSACHUSETTS
  Boston...........................................................    1994         12,600      Lease
  Danvers..........................................................    1996         14,600      Lease
  Natick...........................................................     (1)         15,500      Lease
MICHIGAN
  Detroit..........................................................    1994         10,100      Lease
  Southfield.......................................................    1996         13,600      Lease
MINNESOTA
  Twin Cities......................................................    1988          9,500      Lease
OHIO
  Cleveland........................................................    1997         15,800      Lease
TEXAS
  Dallas...........................................................    1989         12,700      Lease
  Arlington........................................................    1991          9,700      Lease
  South Houston....................................................    1993         14,700      Lease
  North Houston....................................................    1994         10,300      Lease
WASHINGTON
  Seattle..........................................................     (1)         20,800      Lease
</TABLE>
 
- ------------------------------
(1)  Presently expected to open in the first half of 1997.
(2)  The Company presently expects to relocate the store it operates in  Sherman
     Oaks from a location it owns to a new leased location.
(3)  Of  the 21,300 square  feet, approximately 10,000 square  feet consist of a
     basement and warehouse space.
 
SERVICE MARKS
 
    The Company has  registered the GUITAR  CENTER and ROCK  WALK service  marks
with  the United States  Patent and Trademark Office.  The Company believes that
these service marks have  become important components  in its merchandising  and
marketing  strategy. The  loss of  the GUITAR CENTER  service mark  could have a
material adverse effect on the Company's business.
 
LEGAL PROCEEDINGS
 
    Guitar Center is  not a party  to any legal  proceedings other than  various
claims  and lawsuits arising in the normal  course of its business which, in the
opinion of  the  Company's  management, are  not  individually  or  collectively
material to its business.
 
                                       37
<PAGE>
                                   MANAGEMENT
 
    The  executive officers,  directors and key  managers of the  Company are as
follows:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                        YEARS OF SERVICE
NAME                        AGE                          POSITION                       WITH THE COMPANY
- ----------------------      ---      ------------------------------------------------  -------------------
<S>                     <C>          <C>                                               <C>
EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND
DIRECTORS
Larry Thomas..........          47   President, Chief Executive Officer and Director               19
Marty Albertson.......          43   Executive Vice President, Chief Operating                     17
                                      Officer and Director
Bruce Ross............          48   Vice President, Chief Financial Officer and                    3
                                      Secretary
Barry Soosman.........          37   Vice President of Corporate Development and                    1
                                      General Counsel
Raymond Scherr........          48   Director                                                      --
David Ferguson(1).....          41   Director                                                      --
Jeffrey Walker(2).....          41   Director                                                      --
Michael Lazarus(1)....          41   Director                                                      --
Steven Burge(2).......          40   Director                                                      --
 
KEY MANAGERS
Dave DiMartino........          42   Vice President -- Store Development                           24
Richard Pidanick......          44   Vice President -- Southern California Regional                13
                                      Manager
Rodney Barger.........          46   Vice President -- Merchandising                               16
David Angress.........          47   Vice President -- Merchandising                                1
Greg Bennett..........          45   Vice President -- Merchandising                               --
Andrew Heyneman.......          35   Vice President -- Marketing                                   13
William McGarry.......          43   Vice President -- Store Administration                        16
Mark Laughlin.........          37   Vice President -- Information Services                         6
</TABLE>
 
- ------------------------
(1) Member of Compensation Committee.
 
(2) Member of Audit Committee.
 
    The Bylaws provide for  a Board of Directors  (the "Board") consisting of  9
persons.  Presently,  the Board  consists  of 7  persons  with 2  vacancies. The
present members of the Board were  elected pursuant to a Stockholders  Agreement
(as  defined herein) among all of the  stockholders of the Company. All material
terms of  the  Stockholders  Agreement, including  provisions  relating  to  the
designation of directors, will terminate upon consummation of this Offering. See
"Certain Transactions -- Terms of the Stockholders Agreement."
 
    The  principal occupations  and positions  for the  past five  years, and in
certain cases  prior  years,  of  the  executive  officers,  directors  and  key
personnel named above are as follows:
 
    LARRY  THOMAS has  been with Guitar  Center since  1977. He has  served as a
director since 1984  and has been  the Company's President  and Chief  Executive
Officer  since  1992. After  working  for a  year as  a  salesperson in  the San
Francisco, California store, Mr. Thomas became the store's manager. In 1980, Mr.
Thomas became  the San  Francisco  area regional  manager.  After serving  as  a
regional manager in
 
                                       38
<PAGE>
California and Illinois for four years, Mr. Thomas assumed the role of Corporate
General Manager and Chief Operating Officer. Mr. Thomas is currently a member of
the  Los Angeles Chapter of  the Young Presidents' Organization  and is a former
board member of NAMM.
 
    MARTY ALBERTSON has served as  Executive Vice President and Chief  Operating
Officer since 1990. Mr. Albertson was elected as a director upon consummation of
the  Recapitalization. Mr. Albertson joined the Company as a salesperson in 1979
and has held  various positions  of increasing responsibility  with the  Company
since  such time. In 1980,  he served as the  Company's Advertising Director. In
1984, he became the Company's National  Sales Manager. Thereafter, in 1985,  Mr.
Albertson  became Vice President  of Corporate Development,  and then became the
Vice President of Sales and Marketing in 1987.
 
    BRUCE ROSS joined the Company in July 1994 as Chief Financial Officer. Prior
to joining the  Company, Mr.  Ross was Chief  Financial Officer  of Fred  Hayman
Beverly  Hills, Inc., a retailer of high  end fashion clothing on Rodeo Drive in
California and a wholesaler of men's and women's fragrances. From 1982 to  1990,
Mr.  Ross was employed by Hanimex  Vivitar Corporation, a worldwide manufacturer
and distributor of photographic products. Mr. Ross served in various  capacities
with  Hanimex Vivitar in Australia, the  United States and Europe. While working
for Hanimex Vivitar in the United States, Mr. Ross was promoted to the  position
of Chief Financial Officer in 1986 and Chief Executive Officer for North America
in  1988. Mr. Ross graduated from the  University of New South Wales (Australia)
with a degree  in Commerce and  is an  associate of the  Institute of  Chartered
Accountants.
 
    BARRY SOOSMAN joined the Company in July 1996 as Vice President of Corporate
Development  and General Counsel. Mr. Soosman has been a practicing attorney for
twelve years specializing in  real estate, commercial  and corporate law.  Since
1992  and prior to joining the Company, Mr. Soosman had been the outside general
counsel to  the Company.  Mr. Soosman  earned a  Bachelor of  Science degree  in
Business  Administration  (corporate  finance and  real  estate  valuation) with
honors and a Juris Doctorate degree at the University of Southern California. In
June 1996 Mr. Soosman  became of counsel  to the law  firm of Buchalter,  Nemer,
Fields  & Younger, a  Professional Corporation. Mr. Soosman  is a former Adjunct
Professor at Southwestern School of Law.
 
    RAYMOND SCHERR became a director in 1978  and served as the Chairman of  the
Board  from 1990 until  consummation of the  Recapitalization. Mr. Scherr joined
the Company in 1975 as a salesperson in the Company's San Francisco,  California
store.  From 1981 through 1990  Mr. Scherr was also  the Company's President and
Chief Executive Officer.
 
    DAVID FERGUSON is  a general  partner of  Chase Capital  Partners, the  sole
general  partner  of Chase  Ventures and  an affiliate  of Chase  Securities. He
became a  director of  the Company  upon consummation  of the  Recapitalization.
Prior  to joining Chase  Capital, Mr. Ferguson  was a member  of the mergers and
acquisitions groups  of  Bankers  Trust  New  York  Corporation  and  Prudential
Securities, Inc. Mr. Ferguson currently serves as a director of Thompson PBE and
Wild  Oats  Markets, Inc.  and various  privately  held companies.  Mr. Ferguson
received a Bachelor of  Arts degree from Loyola  College in Baltimore,  Maryland
and  an M.B.A. degree from The Wharton School of the University of Pennsylvania.
Mr. Ferguson is a certified public accountant.
 
    JEFFREY WALKER is the  managing general partner  of Chase Capital  Partners,
and  a senior managing  director and member  of the Policy  Council of The Chase
Manhattan Corporation. He  became a director  of the Company  in 1996. Prior  to
co-founding  Chase Capital Partners in 1984, Mr. Walker worked in the Investment
Banking and Finance  Divisions of  Chemical Bank  and the  Audit and  Consulting
Divisions  of Arthur Young & Co. Mr. Walker is a Certified Public Accountant and
a Certified Management  Accountant. Mr.  Walker received a  Bachelor of  Science
degree  from the University  of Virginia and  an M.B.A. degree  from the Harvard
Business School. Mr. Walker currently serves as a director of various  privately
held  companies  and was  Vice  Chairman of  the  National Association  of Small
Business Investment Companies.
 
   
    MICHAEL LAZARUS is a general  partner of Weston Presidio Capital  Management
II,  L.P.,  a  venture capital  firm  and  the sole  general  partner  of Weston
Presidio. From 1986 to 1991, he served as Managing
    
 
                                       39
<PAGE>
Director  and  Director  of  the  Private  Placement  Department  of  Montgomery
Securities.  He  became  a director  of  the  Company upon  consummation  of the
Recapitalization. Mr. Lazarus is currently on the Board of Directors of Just For
Feet, Inc. and various privately held companies.
 
    STEVEN BURGE is a Managing Director of Wells Fargo. He became a director  of
the  Company upon consummation of the  Recapitalization. From 1987 through 1995,
Mr. Burge was a Managing General Partner of Wedbush Capital Partners, a  private
investment  fund, and  was an executive  in the Corporate  Finance Department of
Wedbush Morgan Securities, a regional investment banking firm. Prior to  joining
Wedbush  Morgan Securities,  Mr. Burge held  various positions  with Wells Fargo
Bank.
 
    DAVE DIMARTINO joined the Company in 1972. In 1983, Mr. DiMartino became the
manager of Guitar Center's  flagship Hollywood, California  store. In 1988,  Mr.
DiMartino  became Vice President  -- Store Development. In  1992, he became West
Coast Regional Manager responsible for all  of the Company's West Coast  stores.
In 1995, he reassumed the position of Vice President -- Store Development.
 
    RICHARD  PIDANICK joined the Company in  1983 as a salesperson. Mr. Pidanick
was promoted to store manager in 1984, after working in a variety of  capacities
and  locations for Guitar Center. Mr. Pidanick  was promoted in 1990 to District
Manager of the  Mid-West and  was appointed as  the Vice  President --  Southern
California Regional Manager in 1996.
 
    RODNEY  BARGER joined the Company  in 1980 as a  salesperson. Mr. Barger was
promoted to a store manager in 1981. In 1989, Mr. Barger was promoted to Western
Regional Sales  Manager and  then to  the corporate  office in  the position  of
Purchasing  Director.  In 1996,  Mr. Barger  was promoted  to Vice  President --
Merchandising, Vintage and Used Products.
 
    DAVID ANGRESS  joined the  Company  in January  1996  as Vice  President  --
Merchandising.  Prior to joining the Company,  Mr. Angress was Vice President of
Harman Pro., North America where he was responsible for North American marketing
and sales  for such  brands  as JBL,  Soundcraft,  AKG and  worldwide  marketing
manager  of dbx and Orban. Prior thereto, Mr. Angress was the Vice President and
General Manager of Sound  Genesis, a retailer  of professional audio  equipment.
Mr. Angress has over 20 years of music retailing experience.
 
    GREG  BENNETT  joined the  Company in  September 1996  as Vice  President --
Merchandising. Prior  to  joining  the  Company, Mr.  Bennett  was  Director  of
Marketing  at Washburn International, where he was responsible for the marketing
services for Washburn Guitars, Sound Tech and Oscar Schmidt. Prior thereto,  Mr.
Bennett  was Marketing Director of Gibson Guitars. Mr. Bennett has over 20 years
of experience in the music industry.
 
    ANDREW HEYNEMAN joined the Company  in 1983. He has  served in a variety  of
positions  with Guitar Center ranging from salesperson to department manager. In
July 1985, Mr. Heyneman  was appointed store manager  and later promoted to  the
corporate  office as an advertising director in  1989. In 1996, Mr. Heyneman was
promoted to Vice President -- Marketing.
 
    WILLIAM MCGARRY joined the Company in 1980 as a salesperson. In 1981 he  was
promoted  to  a store  manager.  In 1985  Mr.  McGarry was  promoted  to Midwest
District Manager.  Mr. McGarry  became  the Company's  first Director  of  Store
Administration   in  1986   and  was  promoted   to  Vice   President  --  Store
Administration in 1996.
 
    MARK LAUGHLIN  joined  the  Company  in  1991  as  Director  of  Information
Services.  In 1997, he  was promoted to Vice  President -- Information Services.
Prior to joining Guitar Center, Mr. Laughlin was an Information Services manager
for Clothestime,  and  originally  began  his career  in  accounting  at  Arthur
Andersen & Co. Mr. Laughlin has an M.B.A.
 
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
 
    The  Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws provide that directors shall be
elected by a plurality vote, with  no cumulative voting, at each annual  meeting
of  stockholders. Each elected director shall  hold office until his resignation
or removal and until his successor  shall have been duly elected and  qualified.
Presently,  the Board consists of seven  persons with two vacancies. The current
members of the  Board were elected  pursuant to the  Stockholders Agreement  (as
defined herein). All material terms of the
 
                                       40
<PAGE>
Stockholders  Agreement,  including provisions  relating  to the  designation of
directors, will  terminate  upon consummation  of  this Offering.  See  "Certain
Transactions  -- Terms  of the Stockholders  Agreement." In  connection with the
Recapitalization, the Company agreed that,  following this Offering and so  long
as Mr. Scherr and certain related entities own 5% or more of the Common Stock on
a fully diluted basis, the Company would nominate or cause the nomination of Mr.
Scherr  to the Board (and include Mr.  Scherr in any proxy statement and related
materials used in connection  with an election of  directors) and otherwise  use
its best efforts to cause his election at each annual meeting or special meeting
relating  to the  election of  directors of  the Company.  See "--  Scherr Board
Representation Letter."
 
COMMITTEES OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS
 
    The  Board  has  two  standing  committees,  the  Audit  Committee  and  the
Compensation Committee. The Audit Committee has responsibility for reviewing and
making   recommendations  regarding  the  Company's  employment  of  independent
accountants, the annual  audit of  the Company's financial  statements, and  the
Company's  internal controls, accounting practices  and policies. The members of
the Audit  Committee  are Jeffrey  Walker  and Steven  Burge.  The  Compensation
Committee   has  responsibility  for  determining   the  nature  and  amount  of
compensation of  the  management  of  the  Company  and  for  administering  the
Company's  employee benefit plans  (including the 1996 Plan  and the 1997 Plan).
Upon consummation of this  Offering, the members  of the Compensation  Committee
will be David Ferguson and Michael Lazarus.
 
DIRECTOR COMPENSATION
 
    The  members of  the Board do  not presently receive  compensation for their
services as  members of  the  Board, but  are  reimbursed for  their  reasonable
out-of-pocket  expenses  arising from  attendence at  meetings  of the  Board of
Directors or committees thereof or in respect of related Company business. After
the consummation  of this  Offering,  each member  of the  Board  who is  not  a
full-time  employee will be  paid $3,000 for  attendance at each  meeting of the
Board and $1,000 for attendance at each meeting of a committee of the Board, and
all directors will be reimbursed  for reasonable out-of-pocket expenses  arising
from  attendance  at any  Board or  committee meetings  or otherwise  related to
Company business. The 1997 Plan  will also provide for  the grant of options  to
certain   non-employee  directors.  Specifically,   each  non-employee  director
initially elected to the Board after this Offering automatically will be granted
an option to purchase 15,000 shares of Common Stock on the date of such  initial
election, and each non-employee director automatically will be granted an option
to  purchase 5,000 shares of Common Stock on  the date of each annual meeting of
stockholders at which such  director is re-elected to  the Board, provided  such
annual  meetings is  not less  than 120  days after  initial appointment  to the
Board. All  options granted  to non-employee  directors will  have a  per  share
exercise price equal to fair market value of a share of Common Stock on the date
of grant. See "-- 1997 Equity Participation Plan."
 
                                       41
<PAGE>
EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION
 
    The  following table sets forth the compensation  paid by the Company to its
Chief Executive  Officer and  each  of the  four  other highest  paid  executive
officers  of the Company  (collectively, including the  Chief Executive Officer,
the "Named Officers"):
 
                           SUMMARY COMPENSATION TABLE
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                      LONG TERM
                                                                                    COMPENSATION
                                               ANNUAL COMPENSATION ($)            -----------------
                                     -------------------------------------------     SECURITIES
NAME AND PRINCIPAL                                              OTHER ANNUAL         UNDERLYING            ALL OTHER
POSITION                    YEAR       SALARY      BONUS    COMPENSATION ($)(1)    OPTIONS/SAR#(2)    COMPENSATION ($)(3)
- ------------------------  ---------  ----------  ---------  --------------------  -----------------  ---------------------
<S>                       <C>        <C>         <C>        <C>                   <C>                <C>
Larry Thomas............    1996     $  500,000     --          $ 10,660,728(4)         397,985            $  11,250
 President and Chief        1995        500,000  $ 285,715           --                  --                   25,645
 Executive Officer
Marty Albertson.........    1996     $  375,000     --          $  7,107,146(4)         397,985            $  11,250
 Executive Vice             1995        375,000  $ 214,285           --                  --                   25,645
 President and Chief
 Operating Officer
Bruce Ross..............    1996     $  195,000  $  58,500           --                  79,599            $  11,250
 Vice President and         1995        180,000     48,060           --                  --                   --
 Chief Financial Officer
Barry Soosman...........    1996     $  112,500  $  10,000           --                  79,599               --
 Vice President of          1995         --         --               --                  --                   --
 Corporate Development
 and General Counsel
Raymond Scherr (5)......    1996     $  529,885     --               --                  --                $  11,250
 Chairman and Operator      1995      1,000,000     --               --                  --                   25,645
 of Rock Walk, a
 division of the Company
</TABLE>
 
- ------------------------------
(1)  Excludes perquisites and  other personal benefits,  securities or  property
     aggregating  less than $50,000 or 10% of  the total annual salary and bonus
     reported for each Named Officer.
 
(2)  The securities underlying  the options are  shares of Common  Stock. For  a
     description  of  terms pertaining  to  such options  and  other information
     relating thereto, see "-- Employment Agreements; -- Management Stock Option
     Agreements; -- 1996 Performance Stock Option Plan."
 
(3)  All other compensation consists of contributions made by the Company to its
     profit sharing plan on behalf of each Named Officer.
 
(4)  Other annual compensation  consists of cash  compensation received by  such
     Named   Officer  in  connection  with   the  Recapitalization  and  related
     transactions. Excludes restricted shares of Junior Preferred Stock received
     by such Named Officer  upon the cancellation of  employee stock options  in
     connection  with the  Recapitalization that  will be  converted into Common
     Stock in  connection  with this  Offering.  See "The  Recapitalization  and
     Related  Transactions" and "Description of Capital Stock -- Preferred Stock
     -- Junior Preferred Stock."
 
(5)  Resigned as the Chairman of the Board effective with the completion of  the
     Recapitalization.
 
    During  the periods indicated above, none of the Named Officers received any
awards under  any long-term  incentive plan,  and the  Company does  not have  a
pension plan.
 
EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENTS
 
    Upon  consummation  of  the  Recapitalization, the  Company  entered  into a
five-year employment agreement with each of Larry Thomas and Marty Albertson,  a
three-year  employment agreement with  Bruce Ross and a  three and one-half year
employment agreement with Barry Soosman  (collectively, as amended to date,  the
"Employment  Agreements").  The  Employment Agreements  provide  Messrs. Thomas,
Albertson, Ross  and Soosman  (each  a "Senior  Officer" and  collectively,  the
"Senior  Officers")  with  base  salaries of  $500,000,  $375,000,  $195,000 and
$225,000, respectively. Each Senior  Officer is entitled  to participate in  all
insurance   and  benefit  plans   generally  available  to   executives  of  the
 
                                       42
<PAGE>
Company. In addition to their base salary, Messrs. Thomas and Albertson will  be
paid  an annual bonus equal to 57.14%  and 42.86%, respectively, of a bonus pool
determined at the end of  each year, not to exceed  $900,000. The amount of  the
bonus pool with respect to any fiscal year will be a percentage ranging from 10%
to  30% of the excess of the  Company's actual earnings before interest expense,
tax expense, depreciation expense and  amortization expense ("EBITDA") over  the
Company's  target EBITDA (as determined by  the Board). Messrs. Ross and Soosman
will receive annual bonuses  at the discretion of  the Board. Pursuant to  their
employment  agreements,  each  of Messrs.  Ross  and Soosman  have  been granted
options under the Company's 1996 Plan to purchase 79,599 shares of Common  Stock
at  an exercise price of $10.89 per share. Of such options, one-half vest at the
end of  five  years subject  to  acceleration  upon the  attainment  of  certain
performance events and one-half vest ratably over a three-year period.
 
    Under  the  terms  of each  Employment  Agreement,  if a  Senior  Officer is
terminated without cause or resigns  with reasonable justification, such  Senior
Officer will be entitled to receive his base salary, annual cash bonus (equal to
the  last annual bonus he received prior to termination) and continuation of his
benefits through the term of the agreement. With certain exceptions, if a Senior
Officer is  terminated without  cause, all  stock options  held by  such  Senior
Officer  will immediately vest.  If a Senior  Officer's employment is terminated
for any  other reason,  he will  be entitled  only to  his accrued  base  salary
through the date of termination.
 
    Upon  consummation  of  the  Recapitalization, the  Company  entered  into a
three-year employment agreement  with Mr.  Scherr pursuant to  which Mr.  Scherr
will serve as the chairman and operator of Rock Walk, a division of the Company.
Mr.  Scherr's duties will be of a part-time nature, and he will devote only such
time to his duties as he determines in good faith are required. Mr. Scherr  will
receive  $100,000 per year, which will be allocated among his salary and expense
allowance, as Mr. Scherr determines. Mr. Scherr will be entitled to  participate
in all employee medical benefit programs available generally to employees of the
Company.  If Mr. Scherr's employment is terminated by the Company without cause,
he will  be  entitled  to  receive  as severance  the  cash  equivalent  of  his
compensation  package ($100,000) for the remainder of the term of the agreement,
not to  exceed $300,000,  and continuation  of his  medical benefits  until  age
63  1/2. After his employment agreement expires,  Mr. Scherr will continue to be
entitled to medical  benefits until age  63 1/2. If  Mr. Scherr's employment  is
terminated by the Company for cause or upon Mr. Scherr's death, he or his estate
will  be entitled  to receive  his compensation  to the  extent such  amount has
accrued through the date of termination.
 
MANAGEMENT STOCK OPTION AGREEMENTS
 
    In connection with the Recapitalization, the Company granted options  (each,
a  "Management  Option") to  each of  Messrs. Thomas  and Albertson  to purchase
397,985 shares of Common Stock at an exercise price of $10.89 per share pursuant
to stock option  agreements (the "Management  Stock Option Agreements").  Unless
terminated  or  accelerated, each  Management Option  will  vest in  three equal
installments in 2003, 2004 and 2005 and  will terminate upon the first to  occur
of: (i) June 5, 2005; (ii) the consummation of a Company Sale (as defined in the
Management   Stock  Option   Agreements);  or  (iii)   the  termination,  either
voluntarily or for cause, of the  employment of such executive officer with  the
Company. The vesting of each Management Option will be accelerated: (a) if there
is  a "Significant  Public Float" of  the Common  Stock (as defined)  and if the
Company's "Calculated Corporate  Value" (which,  in general,  equals the  market
value  of the fully  diluted shares of  Common Stock based  on the closing sales
price of the Common Stock on a national exchange or the Nasdaq National  Market)
exceeds  approximately $280  million, subject to  adjustment; (b) if  there is a
Company Sale and the consideration paid  for the Company exceeds certain  target
values  set  forth in  the Management  Stock  Option Agreements;  or (c)  if the
executive officer's employment is terminated by the Company without cause or  by
such executive officer with reasonable justification. Following the consummation
of  this Offering, the Company intends to  file a registration statement on Form
S-8 under the  Securities Act to  register the shares  of Common Stock  issuable
upon exercise of such options.
 
                                       43
<PAGE>
OTHER OPTION ARRANGEMENTS
 
    Chase  Ventures,  Wells  Fargo  and  Weston  Presidio  granted  options (the
"Investor Options") to purchase an aggregate  of 277,194 shares of Common  Stock
at  a purchase price of $4.33 per share  to certain officers and key managers of
the Company. Each grant of an Investor Option is, to the extent possible, deemed
to be granted by each Investor to each member of management in the same ratio as
granted by each Investor (I.E., 75.00% by Chase Ventures, 14.29% by Wells  Fargo
and  10.71% by Weston Presidio). Included in the Investor Options are options to
purchase 109,722 shares  of Common Stock  that were granted  to each of  Messrs.
Thomas  and Albertson and 3,850 shares of Common Stock that were granted to each
of Messrs. Ross and Soosman. The Investor Options were granted in December 1996,
are presently exercisable and will expire  on December 30, 2001. The Company  is
not a party to this agreement and has not, and will not, incur any obligation in
connection  with  such options.  See  "Management's Discussion  and  Analysis of
Financial  Condition  and  Results  of  Operations  --  Liquidity  and   Capital
Resources"  and "Certain  Transactions --  Options Granted  by the  Investors to
Certain Members of Management."
 
1996 PERFORMANCE STOCK OPTION PLAN
 
    The Company's 1996 Performance Stock Option Plan was adopted by the Board of
Directors and  approved by  its sole  stockholder  on June  3, 1996  and  became
effective  on that date. The Board of Directors and the stockholders approved an
Amended and Restated  1996 Performance  Stock Option  Plan in  October 1996  (as
amended  to date, the "1996 Plan"). The  principal purposes of the 1996 Plan are
to provide incentives for officers, employees and consultants of the Company and
its subsidiaries through granting of options, thereby stimulating their personal
and active  interest in  the Company's  development and  financial success,  and
inducing  them to remain in the Company's employ. Following consummation of this
Offering, no further grants of options will be made under the 1996 Plan.
 
    The principal  features of  the  1996 Plan  are  summarized below,  but  the
summary  is qualified in  its entirety by  reference to the  1996 Plan, which is
filed as an exhibit to the Registration Statement of which this Prospectus is  a
part.
 
    GENERAL  NATURE OF  THE PLAN.   Options  issued under  the 1996  Plan may be
either incentive stock options ("Incentive Options") intended to qualify as such
under Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the "Code"),
or non-qualified stock options ("Non-qualified options").
 
    The 1996 Plan provides for the  issuance of options to purchase units  (each
Unit  consisting of  2.582 shares of  Common Stock  and 99/100ths of  a share of
Junior Preferred Stock) (the  "Units"). As of the  date of this Prospectus,  the
Company  has issued options  to purchase 77,737  Units, at an  exercise price of
$100 per Unit, under the 1996 Plan. After giving effect to the Junior  Preferred
Stock  Conversion,  an  option  to  purchase  one  Unit  will,  pursuant  to the
anti-dilution provisions thereof, become an  option to purchase 9.182 shares  of
Common  Stock. Giving effect to the Junior Preferred Stock Conversion, as of the
date of this Prospectus, the Company  will have outstanding under the 1996  Plan
options  to purchase  713,782 shares  of Common Stock,  at an  exercise price of
$10.89 per  share (no  shares of  which  are currently  exercisable or  will  be
exercisable  within 60 days  of March 1,  1997). The Company  will not issue any
additional options under the 1996 Plan after the consummation of this  Offering.
The 1996 Plan is administered by the Compensation Committee, which has the power
and authority to grant options under the 1996 Plan, subject to the Board's prior
approval.
 
    ELIGIBILITY.  Options may be granted under the 1996 Plan to employees of and
consultants to the Company, or any of its subsidiaries (other than Larry Thomas,
Marty  Albertson, or any other person serving on the Compensation Committee). No
options may be granted to  any one person in any  one taxable year in excess  of
25% of the options issued or issuable under the 1996 Plan. Incentive Options may
not  be granted to an employee who  owns (as described in Sections 422(b)(6) and
425(d) of the Code) stock possessing more than 10% of the aggregate voting power
of the Company unless the option price is  fixed at least than 110% of the  fair
market  value (as  determined according to  the 1996  Plan) of the  stock on the
grant date and the options are  not exercisable later than five years  following
the grant date.
 
                                       44
<PAGE>
    GRANT  OF OPTIONS.  Options may be granted  under the 1996 Plan at any time,
from time to time, prior to the termination of the 1996 Plan. Each option  grant
will  be set forth in  a separate agreement with  the person receiving the grant
and will indicate the type, terms and conditions of the option grant.
 
    VESTING.  Options are deemed granted on the date the Compensation  Committee
approves  the grants. However, in the case  of Incentive Options, the grant date
may not be earlier than the date the optionee becomes an employee of the Company
or one of its subsidiaries.  The Compensation Committee shall determine  whether
and  to what extent  any options are also  subject to time  vesting based on the
optionee's continued service. The 1996 Plan generally provides for  acceleration
of  time vesting  upon a sale  of the  Company or termination  of the optionee's
relationship with the Company without cause (as defined in the 1996 Plan), or by
the optionee with  reasonable justification  (as defined  in the  1996 Plan)  or
death.
 
    OPTION  PRICE AND EXERCISE.   An option is exercisable  at such times as are
determined on the grant date by  the Compensation Committee. The purchase  price
for  shares to be issued to an optionee  upon exercise of an option shall be the
fair market value of a share of Common  Stock on the grant date (or such  lesser
amount  approved by the Board, but not less than 85% of the fair market value of
a share of Common Stock).
 
    EXPIRATION,   TERMINATION,    REVOCATION,    TRANSFER   OF    OPTIONS    AND
AMENDMENTS.   Options granted under  the 1996 Plan are  not assignable except by
will or by  the laws of  descent and distribution.  The Compensation  Committee,
with  the Board's approval,  may amend or  modify the 1996  Plan in any respect,
PROVIDED HOWEVER, that  approval of the  holders of a  majority of Common  Stock
must  be obtained if required  by law or for  compliance with federal securities
laws or the Code.
 
    REGISTRATION STATEMENT  ON  FORM  S-8.    The  Company  intends  to  file  a
registration  statement on  Form S-8  under the  Securities Act  to register the
shares of Common Stock issuable under the  1996 Plan, as of the consummation  of
this Offering.
 
OPTION GRANTS IN 1996; AGGREGATE OPTION EXERCISES IN 1996; 1996 YEAR-END OPTION
VALUES
 
    In 1996, the Company granted to certain directors, officers and employees of
the  Company (including  Messrs. Ross and  Soosman) options  to purchase 554,584
shares of Common Stock at  a purchase price of $10.89  per share under the  1996
Plan  and, pursuant to separate arrangements,  granted to each of Messrs. Thomas
and Albertson options to purchase 397,985  shares of Common Stock at a  purchase
price  of $10.89  per share.  Pursuant to  the requirements  of their respective
employment agreements, the Company has also granted to each of Messrs. Ross  and
Soosman  options to purchase  an additional 79,599  shares of Common  Stock at a
purchase price  of  $10.89 per  share  under the  1996  Plan. See  "--  Director
Compensation,"   "--  Employment   Agreements,"  "--   Management  Stock  Option
Agreements," "--  1996  Performance  Stock  Option Plan"  and  "--  1997  Equity
Participation Plan."
 
                                       45
<PAGE>
    Set  forth below is a table describing the options granted by the Company to
each of the Named Officers during the year ended December 31, 1996:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                       INDIVIDUAL OPTION GRANTS IN 1996
                           -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                         POTENTIAL REALIZABLE VALUE
                                                                                             AT ASSUMED ANNUAL
                             NUMBER OF       PERCENT OF                                        RATES OF STOCK
                             SECURITIES    TOTAL OPTIONS/                                    PRICE APPRECIATION
                             UNDERLYING    SARS GRANTED TO  EXERCISE OR                     FOR OPTION TERM (2)
                            OPTIONS/SARS    EMPLOYEES IN    BASE PRICE    EXPIRATION    ----------------------------
NAME                       GRANTED (#)(1)    FISCAL YEAR    ($/ SHARE)       DATE          5% ($)         10% ($)
- -------------------------  --------------  ---------------  -----------  -------------  -------------  -------------
<S>                        <C>             <C>              <C>          <C>            <C>            <C>
Larry Thomas.............         397,985          29.5%     $   10.89          2006    $   2,725,880  $   6,907,917
Marty Albertson..........         397,985          29.5          10.89          2006        2,725,880      6,907,917
Bruce Ross...............          79,599           5.9          10.89          2006          545,189      1,381,615
Barry Soosman............          79,599           5.9          10.89          2006          545,189      1,381,615
Raymond Scherr...........        --              --             --            --             --             --
</TABLE>
 
- ------------------------
 
(1) The securities underlying the  options are shares of  Common Stock. No  SARs
    were  granted in fiscal 1996. For a  description of terms pertaining to such
    options  and  other  information   relating  thereto,  see  "--   Employment
    Agreements; -- Management Stock Option Agreements; -- 1996 Performance Stock
    Option Plan."
 
(2) The potential realizable value assumes a rate of annual compound stock price
    appreciation  of 5% and  10% from the  date the option  was granted over the
    full option  term.  These  assumed  annual compound  rates  of  stock  price
    appreciation  are  mandated  by the  rules  of the  Securities  and Exchange
    Commission and  do not  represent the  Company's estimate  or projection  of
    future Common Stock prices.
 
    The  following  table  sets  forth,  on  an  aggregated  basis,  information
regarding securities  underlying  unexercised  options  during  the  year  ended
December 31, 1996 by the Named Officers:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                 OPTION VALUES AT DECEMBER 31, 1996
                                                   --------------------------------------------------------------
                                                             NUMBER OF                       VALUE OF
                                                       SECURITIES UNDERLYING                UNEXERCISED
                                                            UNEXERCISED                    IN-THE-MONEY
                                                            OPTIONS AT                      OPTIONS AT
                                                      FISCAL YEAR-END (1)(#)            FISCAL YEAR-END ($)
                                                   -----------------------------  -------------------------------
NAME                                                EXERCISABLE   UNEXERCISABLE    EXERCISABLE    UNEXERCISABLE
- -------------------------------------------------  -------------  --------------  -------------  ----------------
<S>                                                <C>            <C>             <C>            <C>
Larry Thomas.....................................       --            397,985(2)       --        $   1,635,718(2)
Marty Albertson..................................       --            397,985(2)       --            1,635,718(2)
Bruce Ross.......................................       --             79,599          --              327,152
Barry Soosman....................................       --             79,599          --              327,152
Raymond Scherr...................................       --              --             --               --
</TABLE>
 
- ------------------------
(1) The  securities underlying  the options  are shares  of Common  Stock. For a
    description of  terms  pertaining  to such  options  and  other  information
    relating  thereto, see "-- Employment Agreements; -- Management Stock Option
    Agreements; -- 1996 Performance Stock Option Plan."
 
(2) The options granted to  Messrs. Thomas and Albertson  are subject to  future
    vesting  which  may be  accelerated upon  the attainment  by the  Company of
    certain  performance  hurdles  based  on  market  capitalization  and  other
    factors. See " -- Management Stock Option Agreements."
 
1997 EQUITY PARTICIPATION PLAN
 
    The  Company's 1997 Equity Participation Plan  (the "1997 Plan") was adopted
by the Board of Directors and approved by the stockholders in January 1997.  The
principal purposes of the 1997 Plan
 
                                       46
<PAGE>
are to provide incentives for officers, employees and consultants of the Company
and  its  subsidiaries  through  granting of  options,  restricted  stock, stock
appreciation rights, dividend equivalent  performance awards and deferred  stock
awards  (collectively, "Awards"), thereby stimulating  their personal and active
interest in the Company's development  and financial success, and inducing  them
to  remain in  the Company's  employ. In  addition to  Awards made  to officers,
employees or  consultants,  the  1997  Plan  permits  the  granting  of  options
("Director Options") to the Company's non-employee directors.
 
    The  Company will  not grant any  options under  the 1997 Plan  prior to the
consummation of this Offering.
 
    Under the 1997 Plan, not  more than 875,000 shares  of Common Stock (or  the
equivalent in other equity securities) are authorized for issuance upon exercise
of options, stock appreciation rights ("SARs") and other Awards, or upon vesting
of  restricted  or deferred  stock awards.  Furthermore,  the maximum  number of
shares which may  be subject  to options  or stock  appreciation rights  granted
under  the  1997 Plan  to  any individual  in  any calendar  year  cannot exceed
150,000.
 
    The principal  features of  the 1997  Plan are  summarized below,  but  this
summary  is qualified in  its entirety by  reference to the  1997 Plan, which is
filed as an exhibit to the registration statement of which this Prospectus is  a
part.
 
    ADMINISTRATION.   The Compensation  Committee will administer  the 1997 Plan
with respect to grants to employees or  consultants of the Company and the  full
Board  will  administer the  1997  Plan with  respect  to Director  Options. The
Compensation Committee will consist of at  least two members of the Board,  each
of  whom is a "non-employee director" for  purposes of Rule 16b-3 ("Rule 16b-3")
under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the "Exchange Act"), and,
with  respect  to   options  and   SAR's  which  are   intended  to   constitute
performance-based  compensation  under  Section  162(m)  of  the  Code ("Section
162(m)"), an "outside director" for the  purposes of Section 162(m). Subject  to
the  terms and conditions of the 1997  Plan, the Board or Compensation Committee
has the  authority to  select the  persons to  whom Awards  are to  be made,  to
determine  the  number  of  shares  to be  subject  thereto  and  the  terms and
conditions thereof, and to make all  other determinations and to take all  other
actions  necessary  or  advisable  for  the  administration  of  the  1997 Plan.
Similarly, the Board  has discretion to  determine the terms  and conditions  of
Director  Options and to interpret and administer  the 1997 Plan with respect to
Director Options. The Compensation Committee (and the Board) are also authorized
to adopt, amend  and rescind rules  relating to the  administration of the  1997
Plan.
 
    ELIGIBILITY.   Options,  SARs, restricted stock  and other  Awards under the
1997 Plan may be granted to individuals who are then officers or other employees
of the Company  or any  of its  present or  future subsidiaries  based upon  the
determination  of the Compensation Committee. Such Awards also may be granted to
consultants of the Company selected by  the Board or Compensation Committee  for
participation  in the  1997 Plan. Non-employee  directors of the  Company may be
granted NQSOs (as defined herein) by the Board.
 
    GRANT OF AWARDS.  The 1997 Plan provides that the Compensation Committee may
grant or issue stock options,  SARs, restricted stock, deferred stock,  dividend
equivalents,   performance  awards,  stock  payments  and  other  stock  related
benefits, or any combination thereof. Each Award will be set forth in a separate
agreement with the person receiving the Award and will indicate the type,  terms
and conditions of the Award as determined by the Compensation Committee.
 
        NONQUALIFIED  STOCK  OPTIONS ("NQSOS")  will  provide for  the  right to
purchase Common Stock at a price not less than the fair market value on the date
of grant, and usually will become exercisable (in the discretion of the Board or
Compensation Committee)  in  one or  more  installments after  the  grant  date,
subject  to the participant's agreement to continue in the employ of the Company
for at least one year (or shorter period as fixed in a written agreement) and/or
subject to  the  satisfaction  of  individual  or  Company  performance  targets
established  by the Board or Compensation Committee. NQSOs may be granted for up
to a ten-year  term specified  by the Board  or Compensation  Committee and  the
exercise  price  thereof must  be not  less than  the fair  market value  of the
underlying Common Stock on the date of
 
                                       47
<PAGE>
grant. The Compensation Committee may extend the term of any outstanding  option
in  connection with any termination of employment or consultancy of the optionee
or amend any  condition or  term of such  option relating  to such  termination.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, options may not be repriced after issuance.
 
        INCENTIVE  STOCK OPTIONS ("ISOS"),  will be designed  to comply with the
provisions of the Code and will be subject to certain restrictions contained  in
the  Code. Among such  restrictions, ISOs must  have an exercise  price not less
than the fair market value of a share of Common Stock on the date of grant,  may
only  be granted  to employees,  must expire within  a specified  period of time
following the Optionee's termination of employment, and must be exercised within
the ten years  after the  date of  grant; but  may be  subsequently modified  to
disqualify  them from  treatment as ISOs.  In the case  of an ISO  granted to an
individual who owns (or  is deemed to  own) at least 10%  of the total  combined
voting power of all classes of stock of the Company, the 1997 Plan provides that
the  exercise price must be at least 110% of the fair market value of a share of
Common Stock on  the date of  grant and the  ISO must expire  no later than  the
fifth  anniversary of the date of its  grant. Any option granted may be modified
by the Compensation Committee to disqualify such option from ISO treatment.
 
        RESTRICTED STOCK may be  sold to participants and  made subject to  such
restrictions  as  may  be determined  by  the Board  or  Compensation Committee.
Restricted stock, typically, may be repurchased  by the Company at the  original
purchase price if the conditions or restrictions are not met. In addition, under
certain  circumstances,  the Company  may repurchase  the restricted  stock upon
termination of  employment at  a  cash price  equal to  the  price paid  by  the
grantee.  In general, restricted stock may not be sold, or otherwise transferred
or hypothecated,  until  restrictions  are  removed  or  expire.  Purchasers  of
restricted stock, unlike recipients of options, will have voting rights and will
receive dividends prior to the time when the restrictions lapse.
 
        DEFERRED STOCK may be awarded to participants, typically without payment
of   consideration,  but  subject  to  vesting  conditions  based  on  continued
employment or on performance criteria  established by the Board or  Compensation
Committee.  Like restricted stock, deferred stock  may not be sold, or otherwise
transferred or hypothecated,  until vesting  conditions are  removed or  expire.
Unlike  restricted stock, deferred  stock will not be  issued until the deferred
stock award has vested, and recipients of deferred stock generally will have  no
voting  or  dividend  rights  prior  to the  time  when  vesting  conditions are
satisfied.
 
        STOCK APPRECIATION  RIGHTS  may  be granted  in  connection  with  stock
options   or  other  Awards,  or  separately.  SARs  granted  by  the  Board  or
Compensation  Committee  in  connection  with  stock  options  or  other  awards
typically  will provide for payments  to the holder based  upon increases in the
price of Common Stock  over the exercise  price of the  related option or  other
Awards,  but alternatively may be based upon criteria such as book value. Except
as required by  Section 162(m) with  respect to  an SAR intended  to qualify  as
performance-based  compensation  as described  in Section  162(m), there  are no
restrictions specified in the 1997 Plan on the exercise of SARs or the amount of
gain realizable therefrom, although restrictions may be imposed by the Board  or
Compensation  Committee  in  the  SAR  agreements.  The  Board  or  Compensation
Committee may elect to pay SARs in cash  or in Common Stock or in a  combination
of both.
 
        DIVIDEND  EQUIVALENTS represent the value of the dividends per share, if
any, paid by  the Company,  calculated with reference  to the  number of  shares
covered  by the  stock options,  SARs or other  Awards held  by the participant.
Dividend equivalents will be converted into cash or additional shares of  Common
Stock as determined by the Compensation Committee.
 
        PERFORMANCE AWARDS may be granted by the Board or Compensation Committee
on  an individual  or group  basis. Generally, these  Awards will  be based upon
specific performance targets and may be paid in cash or in Common Stock or in  a
combination  of both. Performance Awards may include "phantom" stock Awards that
provide for payments based upon increases  in the price of the Company's  Common
Stock over a predetermined period.
 
                                       48
<PAGE>
        STOCK  PAYMENTS may be authorized by the Board or Compensation Committee
in the form of shares  of Common Stock or an  option or other right to  purchase
Common  Stock as part of  a deferred compensation arrangement  in lieu of all or
any part of compensation, including bonuses, that would otherwise be payable  in
cash  to the key employee or consultant. Such payments will be determined by the
Compensation Committee based on specific performance criteria.
 
        Generally,  in  addition  to  the  payment  of  any  purchase  price  as
consideration  for the issuance of an Award, the grantee must agree to remain in
the employ of or to  consult for, the Company for  at least one year after  such
Award  is  issued. In  addition, under  the terms  of the  1997 Plan  Awards are
exercisable or payable only  while the grantee is  an employee or consultant  of
the Company. However, under certain conditions, the Committee may determine that
any  such  award  may  be  exercisable  or  paid  subsequent  to  termination of
employment.
 
        DIRECTOR OPTIONS will be granted to the Company's non-employee directors
under the 1997 Plan at a per share price not less than the fair market value  of
a share of Common Stock on the date of grant. Following the consummation of this
Offering and after giving effect to the Junior Preferred Stock Conversion, (i) a
person  who is initially elected to the Board and who is a non-employee director
at the time of  such initial election automatically  will be granted a  Director
Option  to purchase 15,000  shares of Common  Stock on the  date of such initial
election, and  (ii) a  person  who is  re-elected  to the  Board  and who  is  a
non-employee  director at  the time of  such re-election  automatically shall be
granted a Director Option to purchase 5,000  shares of Common Stock on the  date
of  each annual meeting of stockholders at  which such director is re-elected to
the Board.  Notwithstanding the  foregoing, (A)  no  grant shall  be made  to  a
non-employee  director pursuant to the foregoing clause (i) if: (x) an affiliate
of such non-employee director served on the Board within the twelve-month period
prior to  the  initial  election  of such  non-employee  director  or  (y)  such
non-employee  director is  an employee of  the Company  who subsequently retires
from the Company and remains on the Board,  and (B) no grant shall be made to  a
non-employee director pursuant to the foregoing clause (ii) if such non-employee
director  was initially  elected to  the Board  within 120  days of  such annual
meeting of stockholders. Director Options granted to non-employee directors will
vest over a three-year period. Although the Board presently has an intention  to
grant only Director Options to non-employee directors, the Board may grant other
stock  options  or  Awards  to non-employee  directors  in  accordance  with the
provisions of the 1997 Plan.
 
    The 1997 Plan may  be amended, suspended  or terminated at  any time by  the
Board  or the Compensation Committee. However, the maximum number of shares that
may be sold or issued under the 1997 Plan may not be increased without  approval
of the Company's stockholders.
 
    SECURITIES LAWS AND FEDERAL INCOME TAXES
 
        SECURITIES  LAWS.  The  1997 Plan is  intended to conform  to the extent
necessary with all provisions of the Securities Act and the Exchange Act and any
and all  regulations  and  rules  promulgated by  the  Securities  and  Exchange
Commission  thereunder, including without  limitation Rule 16b-3.  The 1997 Plan
will be administered, and options will be granted and may be exercised, only  in
such  a manner as to conform to such  laws, rules and regulations. To the extent
permitted by applicable law, the 1997 Plan and options granted thereunder  shall
be  deemed amended to  the extent necessary  to conform to  such laws, rules and
regulations.
 
        GENERAL FEDERAL  TAX  CONSEQUENCES.   Under  current  federal  laws,  in
general,  recipients of awards  and grants of  nonqualified stock options, stock
appreciation rights,  restricted stock,  deferred stock,  dividend  equivalents,
performance  awards and  stock payments  under the  1997 Plan  are taxable under
Section 83 of the Code upon their  receipt of Common Stock or cash with  respect
to  such awards or  grants and, subject  to Section 162(m),  the Company will be
entitled to an income tax deduction with respect to the amounts taxable to  such
recipients.  Under Sections  421 and  422 of  the Code,  recipients of  ISOs are
generally not taxable on their receipt  of Common Stock upon their exercises  of
ISOs  if the ISOs and option stock  are held for certain minimum holding periods
and, in such event, the Company is not
 
                                       49
<PAGE>
entitled to income tax deductions  with respect to such exercises.  Participants
in  the 1997 Plan will be provided with additional information regarding the tax
consequences relating to the various types of awards and grants under the plan.
 
        SECTION 162(m) LIMITATION.  In general, under Section 162(m), income tax
deductions of  publicly-held corporations  may be  limited to  the extent  total
compensation  (including base salary,  annual bonus, stock  option exercises and
non-qualified benefits paid) for certain  executive officers exceeds $1  million
(less  the amount of any "excess parachute  payments" as defined in Section 280G
of the Code) in any one year. However, under Section 162(m), the deduction limit
does not apply  to certain  "performance-based compensation"  established by  an
independent  compensation  committee  which  is  adequately  disclosed  to,  and
approved by, stockholders. In  particular, stock options  and SARs will  satisfy
the  "performance-based  compensation" exception  if the  awards  are made  by a
qualifying compensation committee, the  plan sets the  maximum number of  shares
that can be granted to any person within a specified period and the compensation
is  based solely on an  increase in the stock price  after the grant date (I.E.,
the option exercise price is equal to  or greater than the fair market value  of
the  stock  subject to  the award  on the  grant date).  Under a  Section 162(m)
transition rule for compensation plans of corporations which are privately  held
and which become publicly held in an initial public offering, the 1997 Plan will
not  be  subject  to  Section  162(m)  until  the  earlier  of  (i)  a  material
modification of the 1997 Plan; (ii) the issuance of all employer stock and other
compensation that has  been allocated under  the 1997 Plan;  or (iii) the  first
meeting  of stockholders at which directors are  to be elected that occurs after
December 31, 1999 (the "Transition Date"). After the Transition Date, rights  or
awards  granted  under the  1997 Plan,  other  than options  and SARs,  will not
qualify as  "performance-based  compensation"  for purposes  of  Section  162(m)
unless  such rights or awards are  granted or vest upon preestablished objective
performance goals, the material terms of which are disclosed to and approved  by
the  stockholders  of the  Company. Thus,  the Company  expects that  such other
rights or  awards under  the 1997  Plan will  not constitute  "performance-based
compensation" for purposes of Section 162(m).
 
    The  Company has attempted to structure the 1997 Plan in such a manner that,
after the Transition  Date, subject  to obtaining stockholder  approval for  the
1997,  the remuneration  attributable to stock  options and SARs  which meet the
other requirements  of Section  162(m) will  not be  subject to  the  $1,000,000
limitation.  The Company has not, however, requested a ruling from the IRS or an
opinion of counsel regarding this issue.
 
    REGISTRATION STATEMENT  ON  FORM  S-8.    The  Company  intends  to  file  a
registration  statement on  Form S-8  under the  Securities Act  to register the
shares of Common Stock reserved for issuance under the 1997 Plan.
 
COMPENSATION COMMITTEE INTERLOCKS AND INSIDER PARTICIPATION
 
    Prior to  the Recapitalization,  the  Company did  not have  a  compensation
committee.  In fiscal  1995, compensation  decisions for  executive officers and
senior management  were  made  by  Messrs.  Scherr  and  Thomas.  Following  the
Recapitalization,  Messrs. Thomas, Albertson, Ferguson and Lazarus served on the
Compensation Committee. Upon consummation of  this Offering, Messrs. Thomas  and
Albertson  will  resign  from the  Compensation  Committee. In  April  1996, the
Company made a  personal loan to  Larry Thomas, the  Company's President, of  $1
million  at an annual interest rate of 8.0% to assist Mr. Thomas's purchase of a
personal residence. The loan, excluding  accrued interest of $10,000 (which  was
forgiven), was repaid concurrently with the Recapitalization.
 
                                       50
<PAGE>
                             PRINCIPAL STOCKHOLDERS
 
    The  information  in the  following table  sets forth  the ownership  of the
Common Stock, as  of the date  of this Prospectus,  of the Company  by (i)  each
person  who, to the knowledge of the  Company, beneficially owns more than 5% of
the outstanding shares  of Common  Stock; (ii)  each Named  Officer; (iii)  each
director  of the Company; and  (iv) all directors and  executive officers of the
Company, as  a  group. As  of  the date  of  this Prospectus,  the  Company  had
12,883,274  shares  of Common  Stock outstanding  and, to  the knowledge  of the
Company, there were 45 holders of Common Stock.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                               BENEFICIAL OWNERSHIP (1)
                                                                   ------------------------------------------------
                                                                   PRIOR TO THE OFFERING    AFTER THE OFFERING (3)
                                                                   ----------------------  ------------------------
                                                                    NUMBER OF               NUMBER OF
NAME AND ADDRESS (2)                                                 SHARES      PERCENT     SHARES       PERCENT
- -----------------------------------------------------------------  -----------  ---------  -----------  -----------
<S>                                                                <C>          <C>        <C>          <C>
Chase Venture Capital Associates, L.P. (4).......................    4,381,265     34.1%     4,381,265       23.9%
 380 Madison Avenue, 12th Floor
 New York, NY 10017
Wells Fargo Small Business Investment Company (4)................      878,589      6.8        878,589        4.8
 333 South Grand Avenue
 Los Angeles, CA 90071
Weston Presidio Capital II, L.P. (4).............................      658,966      5.1        658,966        3.6
 400 Sansome Street
 San Francisco, CA 94111
Raymond Scherr (5)...............................................    1,710,148     13.3      1,710,148        9.3
David Ferguson (6)...............................................      --          --          --           --
Jeffrey Walker (6)...............................................      --          --          --           --
Michael Lazarus (7)..............................................      --          --          --           --
Steven Burge (8).................................................      --          --          --           --
Larry Thomas (9).................................................    1,864,254     14.5      1,384,816        7.6
Marty Albertson (10).............................................    1,247,262      9.7        927,637        5.1
Bruce Ross (11)..................................................        3,850      *            3,850        *
Barry Soosman (12)...............................................       49,760      *           49,760        *
Dave DiMartino (13)..............................................      881,117      6.8        641,397        3.5
All Executive Officers and Directors as a group (9 persons)
 (5)-(12)........................................................    4,875,274     37.8      4,076,211       22.3
</TABLE>
 
- ------------------------
 *  Represents less than 1% of the issued and outstanding shares.
 
(1) Beneficial ownership  is determined  in  accordance with  the rules  of  the
    Securities   and  Exchange  Commission  and  generally  includes  voting  or
    investment power with respect to securities. Shares of Common Stock  subject
    to  options and  warrants which  are currently  exercisable, or  will become
    exercisable within 60  days of  March 1,  1997, are  deemed outstanding  for
    computing the percentage of the person or entity holding such securities but
    are  not outstanding  for computing  the percentage  of any  other person or
    entity. Except  as  indicated by  footnote,  and subject  to  the  community
    property  laws where applicable,  the persons named in  the table above have
    sole voting and investment power with respect to all shares of Common  Stock
    shown  as beneficially owned by them. The information set forth in the table
    assumes that the  Underwriters' over-allotment option  is not exercised  and
    has  been  adjusted  to  reflect  the  effects  of  the  conversion  of  all
    outstanding shares  of Junior  Preferred Stock  into Common  Stock upon  the
    consummation  of  this  Offering.  See  "Description  of  Capital  Stock  --
    Preferred Stock -- Junior Preferred Stock."
 
(2) Unless otherwise indicated,  the address  for each person  is the  Company's
    address at 5155 Clareton Drive, Agoura Hills, CA 91362.
 
(3) Gives  effect to  the Management Tax  Redemption. See "Use  of Proceeds" and
    "Certain Transaction -- Management Tax Redemption."
 
   
(4) Excludes Investor Options granted by Chase Ventures, Wells Fargo and  Weston
    Presidio  to  certain members  of management  for  the purchase  of 207,899,
    39,611 and  29,684  shares  of  Common  Stock,  respectively.  See  "Certain
    Transactions  --  Options Granted  by the  Investors  to Certain  Members of
    Management."
    
 
                                       51
<PAGE>
(5) Represents: (i) 1,150,046 of shares of Common Stock held by the Scherr Trust
    for which Mr. Scherr  and his spouse serve  as co-trustees and share  voting
    and investment control over such shares of Common Stock; (ii) 275,460 shares
    of  Common Stock held in trust for the benefit of Mr. Scherr and his son for
    which Mr.  Scherr's  brother serves  as  trustee and  exercises  voting  and
    investment  control; (iii) 275,460 shares of  Common Stock held in trust for
    the benefit  of Mr.  Scherr's spouse  and daughter  for which  Mr.  Scherr's
    brother  serves as trustee and exercises  voting and investment control; and
    (iv) 9,182 shares of Common Stock held by Mr. Scherr's brother. The  address
    of each such person is 1096 Lakeview Canyon, Westlake Village, CA 91362. Mr.
    Ray  Scherr disclaims beneficial  ownership of the shares  held in trust for
    the benefit of his wife and daughter and held by David Scherr.
 
   
(6) Neither Mr. Walker nor Mr. Ferguson own any Common Stock. Messrs. Walker and
    Ferguson  are  the   Managing  General  Partner   and  a  General   Partner,
    respectively, of Chase Capital Partners, a New York general partnership, and
    the  sole  general  partner of  Chase  Ventures  and an  affiliate  of Chase
    Securities.  Each  of  Messrs.  Walker  and  Ferguson  disclaims  beneficial
    ownership  of the shares owned by Chase Ventures except to the extent of his
    pecuniary interest therein.
    
 
   
(7) Mr. Lazarus does not  directly own any Common  Stock. However, as a  general
    partner  of Weston Presidio Management II, L.P., the sole general partner of
    Weston Presidio, he  may be deemed  to share voting  and investment  control
    over  the  shares  of Common  Stock  held  by Weston  Presidio.  Mr. Lazarus
    disclaims beneficial ownership of the shares held by Weston Presidio, except
    to the extent of his pecuniary interest therein.
    
 
   
(8) Mr. Burge does not own any Common Stock. However, as a managing director  of
    Wells Fargo, he may be deemed to share voting or investment control over the
    shares  of Common Stock owned by Wells Fargo. Mr. Burge disclaims beneficial
    ownership of the shares  held by Wells  Fargo, except to  the extent of  his
    pecuniary interest therein.
    
 
   
(9) Includes  109,722 shares  of Common Stock  issuable upon the  exercise of an
    Investor Option  granted  to  Mr.  Thomas by  the  Investors.  See  "Certain
    Transactions  --  Options Granted  by the  Investors  to Certain  Members of
    Management."
    
 
   
(10)Includes: (i) 53,099 shares of Common Stock held in trust for the benefit of
    Mr. Albertson and  one of  his children for  which Mr.  Albertson serves  as
    trustee; (ii) 53,099 shares of Common Stock held in trust for the benefit of
    Mr.  Albertson's  spouse and  one of  his children  for which  Mr. Albertson
    serves as trustee; and  (iii) 109,722 shares of  Common Stock issuable  upon
    the  exercise  of  an  Investor  Option  granted  to  Mr.  Albertson  by the
    Investors. See "Certain Transactions -- Options Granted by the Investors  to
    Certain Members of Management."
    
 
   
(11)Represents  3,850 shares  of Common Stock  issuable upon the  exercise of an
    Investor  Option  granted  to  Mr.  Ross  by  the  Investors.  See  "Certain
    Transactions  --  Options Granted  by the  Investors  to Certain  Members of
    Management."
    
 
   
(12)Represents: (i) 45,910  shares of Common  Stock held by  the Soosman  Family
    Trust  with respect to which Mr. Soosman and his spouse serve as co-trustees
    and share voting  and investment control;  and (ii) 3,850  shares of  Common
    Stock  issuable  upon the  exercise  of an  Investor  Option granted  to Mr.
    Soosman by the Investors.  See "Certain Transactions  -- Options Granted  by
    the Investors to Certain Members of Management."
    
 
   
(13)Represents:  (i) 877,267 shares of Common Stock (prior to this Offering) and
    637,547 shares of Common  Stock (after this Offering)  that are held by  the
    DiMartino Family Trust with respect to which Mr. DiMartino serves as trustee
    and exercises voting and investment control; and (ii) 3,850 shares of Common
    Stock  issuable  upon the  exercise  of an  Investor  Option granted  to Mr.
    DiMartino by the Investors. See "Certain Transactions -- Options Granted  by
    the  Investors to Certain Members of Management." The address of such person
    is 430 Laloma Road, Pasadena, CA 91105.
    
 
                                       52
<PAGE>
                              CERTAIN TRANSACTIONS
 
MANAGEMENT TRANSACTIONS
 
    In April  1996,  the Company  made  a personal  loan  to Larry  Thomas,  the
Company's  President, of  $1.0 million  at an  annual interest  rate of  8.0% to
assist Mr.  Thomas's  purchase of  a  personal residence.  The  loan,  excluding
accrued  interest of $10,000 (which was  forgiven), was repaid concurrently with
the Recapitalization.
 
    On February 15, 1996, the  Company entered into sale-leaseback  transactions
with  Raymond Scherr relating to the  Company's Arlington, Texas store and North
Chicago, Illinois store. The Arlington, Texas  store was sold by the Company  to
Mr.  Scherr for  $935,000. The  North Chicago,  Illinois store  was sold  by the
Company to Mr.  Scherr for  $820,000. The  Company leases  the Arlington,  Texas
store  and North Chicago, Illinois  store from Mr. Scherr  for $7,687 and $8,570
per month, respectively. In August 1995, Mr. Scherr purchased the South Chicago,
Illinois store from the Company's profit sharing plan for $500,000. The  Company
leases  this store from Mr. Scherr for  $8,250 per month. The Company leases its
Covina, California store from Mr. Scherr for $9,900 per month. All of the leases
are on a triple net  basis pursuant to which the  Company pays rent, as well  as
expenses  relating to taxes, insurance and maintenance. Management believes that
the terms  of these  leases are  on  the same  or similar  terms that  would  be
available from an unaffiliated third party in an arm's length negotiation.
 
    The  Company  paid the  law firm  of  Soosman &  Associates, of  which Barry
Soosman was a partner,  $70,000, $120,000 and $160,000  for legal fees in  1994,
1995 and 1996, respectively.
 
RECAPITALIZATION AND TRANSACTIONS WITH MANAGEMENT
 
    On  June 5, 1996, the Company consummated a series of transactions to effect
the Recapitalization pursuant to  which control of  the Company was  transferred
from its sole stockholder, the Scherr Trust, to members of management (including
Messrs.   Thomas  and   Albertson)  and   the  Investors.   The  terms   of  the
Recapitalization, including the basis of the purchase price for shares of Common
Stock and  the number  of shares  of Junior  Preferred Stock  issued to  Messrs.
Thomas  and  Albertson and  the  Scherr Trust,  was  determined as  a  result of
arms-length negotiations with the Investors.
 
    In connection with the Recapitalization, Larry Thomas (i) purchased  493,376
shares  of Common  Stock at a  purchase price of  $1.00 per share  in cash; (ii)
purchased  189,171.92  shares  of  Junior  Preferred  Stock  (with  an   initial
liquidation value of $100 per share) in exchange for the cancellation of options
to  acquire 48,844,190 shares of Common  Stock; and (iii) received $10.6 million
in cash upon the cancellation of  options for the purchase of 31,484,670  shares
of  Common Stock. The options exchanged had a weighted average exercise price of
$0.003 per share.
 
    In connection  with  the  Recapitalization, Marty  Albertson  (i)  purchased
328,916  shares of Common Stock at a purchase  price of $1.00 per share in cash;
(ii) purchased  126,114.41 shares  of Junior  Preferred Stock  (with an  initial
liquidation value of $100 per share) in exchange for the cancellation of options
to  acquire 32,562,741  shares of Common  Stock; (iii) received  $7.1 million in
cash upon the cancellation of options  for the purchase of 20,989,747 shares  of
Common  Stock. The  options exchanged had  a weighted average  exercise price of
$0.003 per share.
 
    In connection with the Recapitalization, the Company repurchased 309,840,000
shares of Common Stock from the Scherr Trust for approximately $113.1 million in
cash. The Scherr  Trust also  exchanged 51,123,600  shares of  Common Stock  for
198,000  shares of Junior Preferred Stock  (with an initial liquidation value of
$19.8 million) and retained 516,400 shares of Common Stock.
 
    In connection with the Recapitalization, the Company granted options to each
of Messrs. Thomas and Albertson to purchase 397,985 shares of Common Stock at an
exercise price  of $10.89  per share  pursuant to  the Management  Stock  Option
Agreements. All such options granted to Messrs. Thomas and Albertson are subject
to  future  vesting  which  may  be  accelerated  upon  the  attainment  by  the
 
                                       53
<PAGE>
Company of certain performance hurdles based on market capitalization and  other
factors.  See "Management -- Management  Stock Option Agreements." Following the
consummation of  this  Offering, the  Company  intends to  file  a  registration
statement  on Form  S-8 under  the Securities  Act to  register the  issuance of
Common Stock upon exercise of such options.
 
    The Company  granted  certain  registration rights  to  Messrs.  Thomas  and
Albertson and the Scherr Trust. See "-- Registration Rights."
 
TRANSACTIONS WITH THE INVESTORS
 
    In  connection  with  the  Recapitalization,  the  Investors  purchased  the
following equity securities of  the Company for an  aggregate purchase price  of
$70.0  million in cash: (i) Chase  Ventures and an affiliate purchased 1,355,550
shares of Common Stock and 519,750 shares of Junior Preferred Stock; (ii)  Wells
Fargo  purchased  258,200 shares  of Common  Stock and  99,000 shares  of Junior
Preferred Stock; and (iii)  Weston Presidio purchased  193,650 shares of  Common
Stock and 74,250 shares of Junior Preferred Stock.
 
   
    Chase  Ventures  is  an affiliate  of  Chase Securities.  Jeffrey  Walker, a
director of  the Company,  is  the managing  general  partner of  Chase  Capital
Partners,  the general partner of Chase  Ventures. David Ferguson, a director of
the Company, is a general partner of Chase Capital Partners. Messrs. Walker  and
Ferguson  have equity interests in Chase Capital Partners. Mr. Burge, a director
of the  Company, is  a  managing director  of Wells  Fargo.  Wells Fargo  is  an
indirect  wholly owned subsidiary  of Wells Fargo  & Co., the  parent company of
Wells Fargo. Mr. Burge does not have an equity interest in Wells Fargo or  Wells
Fargo  & Co. Michael Lazarus, a director of the Company, is a general partner of
Weston Presidio Capital Management II, L.P. and has an equity interest  therein.
Weston  Presidio  Capital Management  II, L.P.  is the  sole general  partner of
Weston Presidio.
    
 
    In connection with the Recapitalization,  the Scherr Trust and  stockholders
holding  management  positions (the  "Management  Stockholders") have  agreed to
indemnify the Investors and the DLJ Investors for losses incurred in  connection
with  any  misrepresentations or  breaches  of warranty  by  the Company  or its
affiliates. The Investors and the DLJ Investors (as defined herein) have  agreed
to  indemnify the Company in substantially the same manner, with the indemnified
amount limited to each Investor's ratable share of such losses.
 
TRANSACTIONS WITH AFFILIATES OF DLJ AND CHASE SECURITIES
 
    In connection with the Recapitalization,  the Company issued 800,000  shares
of  Senior Preferred  Stock and  Warrants to  purchase 190,252  shares of Common
Stock and  72,947 shares  of Junior  Preferred Stock  (for an  aggregate of  $20
million  in  cash) to  DLJ Merchant  Banking  Partners, L.P.,  DLJ International
Partners, C.V., DLJ Offshore  Partners, C.V. and  DLJ Merchant Banking  Funding,
Inc.  (collectively, the  "DLJ Investors"),  all of  which may  be deemed  to be
affiliates of DLJ. The  Company granted certain registration  rights to the  DLJ
Investors. See "-- Registration Rights."
 
    In  connection with the Recapitalization, the  Company entered into a Bridge
Facility with DLJ  Bridge, an affiliate  of DLJ, and  Chemical, an affiliate  of
Chase Securities, pursuant to which DLJ Bridge purchased $51.0 million aggregate
principal  amount of senior unsecured increasing rate notes for $51.0 million in
cash with  interest payable  at  12.75% per  annum,  and Chemical  loaned  $49.0
million  in cash to the  Company with interest payable  at 12.75% per annum. The
Company applied the net proceeds of the offering of the Senior Notes, for  which
DLJ  and Chase Securities acted as Initial  Purchasers, to the retirement of the
Bridge Facility. DLJ  and Chase Securities  are also acting  as underwriters  in
this  Offering. In connection with such  transactions, DLJ Bridge, Chemical, DLJ
and Chase Securities received customary fees.
 
1996 CREDIT FACILITY
 
    Effective with  the Recapitalization,  Wells Fargo,  an affiliate  of  Wells
Fargo  Bank, purchased approximately 7.14% of the then outstanding Common Stock.
See "Principal and Selling Stockholders." Wells  Fargo Bank is acting as  lender
under  the 1996 Credit  Facility and is  being paid customary  fees therefor. In
addition, the  Company has  agreed to  pay to  Wells Fargo  Bank, promptly  upon
demand, a fee of
 
                                       54
<PAGE>
$25,000  in consideration for Wells Fargo Bank  agreeing to allow the Company to
use the  proceeds of  Revolving Loans  to  make loans  to senior  management  in
respect  of certain personal income tax liabilities. See "Description of Certain
Indebtedness -- The 1996 Credit Facility."
 
STOCKHOLDERS AGREEMENT
 
    In  connection  with  the  Recapitalization,  the  Company  entered  into  a
Stockholders Agreement (the "Stockholders Agreement") with all of its holders of
Common  Stock and Junior Preferred Stock and any other securities exercisable or
exchangeable for, or convertible  into Common Stock  or Junior Preferred  Stock,
including  Messrs.  Thomas and  Albertson, the  Scherr  Trust and  the Investors
(collectively, the "Stockholders"). The  Stockholders have certain rights  under
the  Stockholders Agreement,  including rights to  designate the  members of the
Board of Directors  and subscribe  for a  proportional share  of certain  future
equity  issuances by the Company. The  Stockholders Agreement also prohibits the
Company from taking  certain actions without  the consent of  two-thirds of  the
members  of the Board of Directors,  and includes certain transfer restrictions.
In addition, in connection with certain events of termination of the  employment
of  a Management Stockholder, the Company  and the other Stockholders shall have
the right to  purchase the Common  Stock of such  Management Stockholder at  its
fair  market value.  Upon consummation  of this  Offering, all  of the foregoing
provisions of the Stockholders Agreement will terminate, and the only provisions
remaining in effect require  the Stockholders to comply  with the provisions  of
the Securities Act governing transfers of unregistered equity securities.
 
REGISTRATION RIGHTS
 
    The Company granted: (i) to the Investors and certain members of management,
including  Messrs. Thomas and Albertson and the Scherr Trust, the right to cause
the Company to register  such holders' shares of  equity securities at any  time
upon  the request of holders of at least  60.0% of the equity securities held by
such holders; and (ii)  to the DLJ  Investors and any  future holders of  Senior
Preferred  Stock and  Warrants the  right to cause  the Company  to register the
equity securities  held by  such holders  on one  occasion commencing  180  days
following  the date  of this  Prospectus, in  each case  in accordance  with the
requirements of the Securities Act and  subject to the Company's right to  delay
its  obligations upon  the occurrence of  specified events. In  addition, all of
such holders have the right to include their shares of equity securities in  any
registration  of  equity  securities  effected by  the  Company,  including this
Offering, subject to  certain limitations.  The Company  has agreed  to pay  all
costs associated with any such registrations, except for underwriters' discounts
and commissions.
 
RESTRICTED STOCK AGREEMENTS
 
    In  connection  with  the Recapitalization,  certain  members  of management
(including Messrs. Thomas and Albertson) agreed not to transfer their shares  of
Junior  Preferred Stock before the earlier of (i) the completion of a "Qualified
Public Offering" (as defined  therein); (ii) the sale  of the Company; or  (iii)
June  2001, subject to  certain exemptions. All  such transfer restrictions will
terminate upon consummation of this Offering.
 
TAX INDEMNIFICATION AGREEMENT
 
    In connection  with the  Recapitalization, the  Company entered  into a  tax
indemnification  agreement ("Tax Indemnification Agreement") with Raymond Scherr
pursuant to which  the Company has  agreed to indemnify  Raymond Scherr for  any
loss,  damage or  liability and  all expenses  incurred, suffered,  sustained or
required to be  paid by the  Scherr Trust  in the event  that certain  specified
aspects  of the Recapitalization are not treated  for tax purposes in the manner
contemplated by the  Recapitalization and related  transactions. The  Management
Stockholders  have individually  agreed to reimburse  the Company on  a pro rata
basis for any amounts paid to Mr. Scherr  by the Company as required by the  Tax
Indemnification   Agreement;  provided,  however,   that  the  aggregate  amount
reimbursed by the Management Stockholders may not exceed $5 million.
 
                                       55
<PAGE>
SUBCHAPTER S DISTRIBUTIONS
 
    The Company  elected  to be  taxed  as a  "S"  corporation from  1988  until
immediately prior to the consummation of the Recapitalization. The Scherr Trust,
as  the  sole  stockholder,  received  for 1994,  1995  and  1996  aggregate "S"
corporation distributions  of $3.9  million, $14.5  million and  $29.8  million,
respectively.
 
SCHERR BOARD REPRESENTATION LETTER
 
    On  June 5, 1996, the Company entered  into an agreement with Raymond Scherr
(the "Scherr  Board Representation  Letter") in  which the  Company agreed  that
subsequent  to  the termination  of the  Stockholders Agreement  by reason  of a
Qualified Public Offering so long as Mr. Scherr and certain related entities own
5% or  more of  the Common  Stock on  a fully  diluted basis,  the Company  will
nominate  or cause the nomination  of Mr. Scherr to  the Board of Directors (and
include Scherr in any proxy statement  and related materials used in  connection
with  an election of directors) and otherwise  use its best efforts to cause his
election at each annual meeting or  special meeting relating to the election  of
directors  of the Company.  The Company's obligations  under this agreement will
terminate if  Mr.  Scherr suffers  a  disability  or commits  certain  acts  (as
described  in  the  agreement).  This Offering  constitutes  a  Qualified Public
Offering for purposes of the Scherr Board Representation Letter.
 
MANAGEMENT TAX REDEMPTION
 
    In connection with the conversion of management's shares of Junior Preferred
Stock upon completion of this Offering, a significant amount of non-cash  income
will  be deemed to have been earned by  certain employees of the Company who are
also stockholders of the  Company (including Larry  Thomas and Marty  Albertson)
for  federal and state income  tax purposes (whether or  not such employees have
received any cash with respect to  the underlying stock). In February 1997,  the
Company  entered into agreements with Larry  Thomas, Marty Albertson and certain
other senior  employees pursuant  to  which the  Company  agreed to  effect  the
Management  Tax  Redemption  to provide  sufficient  cash to  such  employees to
finance a portion of such federal and state income tax obligations. Pursuant  to
the  terms of the Management Tax  Redemption, the Company will use approximately
$18.4 million of the proceeds from this Offering to redeem for cash that  number
of  shares of Common Stock calculated by dividing the amount of such proceeds by
the initial  public offering  price less  the net  underwriting discount  (I.E.,
approximately  1,317,000  shares of  Common  Stock, assuming  an  initial public
offering price of $15.00  per share). Pursuant to  the Common Stock  Redemption,
Larry  Thomas and  Marty Albertson will  receive approximately  $6.7 million and
$4.5 million, respectively. See "Use of Proceeds."
 
OPTIONS GRANTED BY THE INVESTORS TO CERTAIN MEMBERS OF MANAGEMENT
 
    Chase Ventures, Wells Fargo and Weston Presidio granted Investor Options  to
purchase  an aggregate of 277,194 shares of  Common Stock at a purchase price of
$4.33 per share to certain officers and key managers of the Company. Each  grant
of  an Investor Option is, to the extent  possible, deemed to be granted by each
Investor to each  member of  management in  the same  ratio as  granted by  each
Investor  (i.e., 75.00% by Chase  Ventures, 14.29% by Wells  Fargo and 10.71% by
Weston Presidio).  Included in  the  Investor Options  are options  to  purchase
109,722  shares of Common Stock that were  granted to each of Messrs. Thomas and
Albertson and 3,850 shares of Common Stock that were granted to each of  Messrs.
Ross  and  Soosman. The  Investor  Options were  granted  in December  1996, are
presently exercisable and will expire on December 30, 2001. This Company is  not
a  party to this  agreement and has not,  and will not,  incur any obligation in
connection with such Investor Options. See "Management's Discussion and Analysis
of Financial  Condition  and Results  of  Operations --  Liquidity  and  Captial
Resources."
 
                                       56
<PAGE>
                      DESCRIPTION OF CERTAIN INDEBTEDNESS
 
THE SENIOR NOTES
 
    The  Company  has  issued an  aggregate  of  $100 million  of  Senior Notes.
Interest on the Senior Notes is payable at  the rate of 11% per annum, in  cash,
semiannually, in arrears. The Senior Notes were issued pursuant to the Indenture
between  the  Company and  U.S.  Trust Company  of  California, as  trustee (the
"Indenture"). This description of the material provisions of the Senior Notes is
qualified in its entirety  by reference to  the Indenture which  is filed as  an
exhibit to the Registration Statement of which this Prospectus forms a part.
 
    The  Senior Notes are unsecured obligations  of the Company that will mature
on July 1, 2006. The Senior Notes are  not entitled to the benefit of a  sinking
fund.  The Senior Notes may be  redeemed, in whole or in  part, at the option of
the Company, at any time after July  1, 2001 at prices declining from 105.5%  to
100.0%  of the principal  amount redeemed, plus accrued  and unpaid interest. In
addition, the Company  may, at  its option  and subject  to certain  conditions,
redeem  (the "IPO Clawback") up  to 33 1/3% of  the original aggregate principal
amount of Senior Notes, at  a redemption price of  110% of the principal  amount
thereof, with the proceeds of an Initial Public Equity Offering (as such term is
defined  in the Indenture).  This Offering constitutes  an Initial Public Equity
Offering. The Company will  redeem pursuant to the  IPO Clawback (or  repurchase
through   open  market  purchases  or  otherwise)  approximately  $33.3  million
aggregate principal amount of the Senior Notes with approximately $37.9  million
of the net proceeds of this Offering. See "Use of Proceeds."
 
    The  holders of the Senior Notes have  the right to require that the Company
repurchase their Senior  Notes at  101% of  the principal  amount thereof,  plus
accrued and unpaid interest, upon the occurrence of a Change of Control (as such
term is defined in the Indenture).
 
    The  Indenture contains restrictions  on, among other  things, the Company's
and any of its  future subsidiaries' ability  to incur additional  indebtedness,
make  certain  restricted  payments  (including  the  payment  of  dividends  or
distributions  on  the  Common  Stock),   encumber  its  assets,  make   certain
investments,  sell assets and  the capital stock of  subsidiaries, if any, enter
into transactions with affiliates and expand the lines of business conducted. In
addition, the Indenture restricts the  Company's ability to enter into  mergers,
consolidations or similar fundamental corporate transactions.
 
    Events  of Default under  the Senior Notes  include: (i) the  failure to pay
principal or  interest when  due; (ii)  a  violation of  one or  more  covenants
contained in the Indenture; (iii) a default in certain other debt obligations of
the  Company; (iv) a failure  to make a timely  payment on any final unsatisfied
judgment; and (v) certain events of bankruptcy.
 
THE 1996 CREDIT FACILITY
 
    GENERAL.  The Company has entered  into the 1996 Credit Facility with  Wells
Fargo Bank. The 1996 Credit Facility provides for a $25 million revolving credit
facility,  including  a sub-limit  for  letters of  credit  of $10  million, and
expires on June 1, 2001. This summary  of the 1996 Credit Facility is  qualified
in  its entirety by reference  to the 1996 Credit Facility  which is filed as an
exhibit to  the Registration  Statement  of which  this  Prospectus is  a  part.
Capitalized  terms used in this description that are not defined herein have the
meaning given to such terms in the 1996 Credit Facility.
 
    AVAILABILITY.  Borrowings under  the 1996 Credit Facility  are subject to  a
borrowing  base limit equal to 80% of  Eligible Receivables plus 70% of Eligible
Inventory minus,  at  all  times  prior to  the  occurrence  of  the  Collateral
Perfection Date, Trade Payables.
 
    SECURITY.   Indebtedness  of the Company  under the 1996  Credit Facility is
currently unsecured.  Upon the  occurrence of  certain events  including (i)  an
Event  of Default or (ii) the failure by the Company to maintain certain ratios,
at the option of Wells Fargo Bank, the 1996 Credit Facility will be secured by a
security interest in  certain assets  and properties of  the Company,  including
accounts  receivable,  inventory,  trademarks, copyrights,  patents  and general
intangibles, and all products and proceeds of any of the foregoing.
 
    INTEREST.  Indebtedness under the 1996  Credit Facility bears interest at  a
rate  based (at the Company's option) upon (i)  in the case of Prime Rate Loans,
the Prime Rate plus a maximum margin of 1.50%
 
                                       57
<PAGE>
(subject to reduction depending on the ratio of Funded Debt to EBITDA); and (ii)
in the case of Eurodollar Rate Loans,  the Eurodollar Rate for one, two,  three,
six, nine or twelve months, plus a maximum margin of 3.00% (subject to reduction
depending on the ratio of Funded Debt to EBITDA).
 
    MATURITY.   The 1996 Credit Facility will mature on June 1, 2001. Loans made
pursuant to the 1996 Credit Facility may be borrowed, repaid and reborrowed from
time to time until  such maturity date, subject  to the satisfaction of  certain
conditions on the date of any such borrowing.
 
    REVOLVING  CREDIT FACILITY FEES.  The Company is required to pay Wells Fargo
Bank a facility  fee of  $250,000, of  which $100,000  was paid  and $50,000  is
payable  at  the end  of each  fiscal year  of the  Company, PROVIDED  that upon
termination or cancellation of the 1996 Credit Facility, the Company must pay in
full the outstanding  balance of  the $250,000  facility fee.  In addition,  the
Company  has agreed to  pay to Wells Fargo  Bank promptly upon  demand, a fee of
$25,000 in consideration for Wells Fargo  Bank agreeing to allow the Company  to
use  the  proceeds of  Revolving Loans  to  make loans  to senior  management in
respect of certain personal income tax liabilities. The Company is also required
to pay to Wells Fargo  Bank a commitment fee based  on the average daily  unused
portion  of the committed undrawn amount of  the 1996 Credit Facility during the
preceding quarter equal to a maximum  of 0.375% per annum (subject to  reduction
depending  on  the ratio  of Funded  Debt to  EBITDA), payable  in arrears  on a
quarterly basis. In addition to a normal issuance fee for each letter of  credit
issued,  the Company is required  to pay to Wells Fargo  Bank a letter of credit
fee based on the aggregate unpaid  face amount of outstanding letters of  credit
equal  to a  maximum of 3.00%  (subject to  reduction depending on  the ratio of
Funded Debt to EBITDA), payable in arrears on a quarterly basis.
 
    CONDITIONS TO EXTENSIONS OF CREDIT.   The obligation of Wells Fargo Bank  to
make loans or extend letters of credit is subject to the satisfaction of certain
conditions  including, but not limited to, the  absence of a default or event of
default under the 1996 Credit Facility, all representations and warranties under
the 1996 Credit Facility  being true and correct  in all material respects,  and
that  there has been no  material adverse change in  the Company's properties or
business.
 
    COVENANTS.  The 1996  Credit Facility requires the  Company to meet  certain
financial tests, including a maximum Funded Debt to EBITDA ratio, a minimum Debt
Service  Coverage Ratio, a minimum level of profit, a minimum quarterly increase
in Tangible  Net Worth  and a  minimum  EBITDA. The  1996 Credit  Facility  also
contains  covenants  which, among  other things,  limit:  (i) the  incurrence of
additional indebtedness; (ii) the nature of  the business of the Company;  (iii)
leases  of assets; (iv)  ownership of subsidiaries;  (v) dividends; (vi) capital
expenditures; (vii)  transactions  with  affiliates; (viii)  asset  sales;  (ix)
acquisitions,  mergers and consolidations; (x) loans and investments; (xi) liens
and encumbrances;  and  (xii)  other  matters  customarily  restricted  in  loan
agreements.  The 1996 Credit  Facility also contains  additional covenants which
require the Company  to maintain  its existence  and rights  and franchises,  to
maintain  its properties, to  maintain insurance on  such properties, to provide
certain information to Wells Fargo Bank, including financial statements, notices
and reports and to permit  inspections of the books  and records of the  Company
and  its subsidiaries, to  comply with applicable  laws, including environmental
laws and ERISA, to pay taxes and contractual obligations and to use the proceeds
of the Revolving Loans to finance in part the Recapitalization, and for  working
capital and other general corporate purpose.
 
    EVENTS OF DEFAULT.  Events of Default under the 1996 Credit Facility include
payment  defaults, breach of representations,  warranties and covenants (subject
to certain cure periods),  cross-default to other indebtedness  in excess of  $2
million,  dissolution of the Company, a material adverse change in the Company's
properties or business, certain events  of bankruptcy and insolvency, breach  of
ERISA covenants, judgment defaults in excess of $2 million and the occurrence of
a Change of Control.
 
    INDEMNIFICATION.   Under the 1996 Credit Facility, the Company has agreed to
indemnify Wells Fargo  Bank and  related persons from  and against  any and  all
Losses  (including, without limitation, the reasonable fees and disbursements of
counsel) that may be incurred by or asserted against any such indemnified  party
(a)  in any way relating to the Loan Documents, the Recapitalization, or the use
or intended use of the proceeds of  the 1996 Credit Facility; (b) in  connection
with   any  investigation,  litigation  or  other  proceeding  relating  to  the
foregoing; or (c) in  any way relating  to or arising  out of any  Environmental
Claims;  PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that the  Company is not liable  for any such Losses
resulting  from  such  indemnified  party's  own  gross  negligence  or  willful
misconduct.
 
                                       58
<PAGE>
                        SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE
 
    Upon  consummation of this Offering, the Company will have 18,316,579 shares
of  Common   Stock  outstanding   (19,329,079   shares  if   the   Underwriters'
over-allotment  option is  exercised in  full). Of  these shares,  the 6,750,000
shares sold by the Company (7,762,500 shares if the Underwriters' over-allotment
option is exercised  in full) in  the Offering will  be freely tradable  without
restriction  under  the  Securities  Act,  except  for  any  shares  held  by an
"affiliate" of  the Company  as  such term  is defined  in  Rule 144  under  the
Securities Act.
 
    The  11,566,579 shares of Common Stock  outstanding immediately prior to the
consummation of  the Offering  are  Restricted Securities  that were  issued  in
private  transactions  and may  be publicly  sold only  if registered  under the
Securities Act or sold in accordance  with an exemption from registration,  such
as  Rule 144. In general, under Rule  144, as recently amended by the Securities
and Exchange Commission, a  person who had beneficially  owned shares of  Common
Stock  for at least one year, including  an "affiliate," as that term is defined
in Rule 144, is  entitled to sell,  within any three-month  period, a number  of
"restricted"  shares of  Common stock  that does not  exceed the  greater of one
percent  of  the  then  outstanding  shares  of  Common  Stock  (183,166  shares
immediately  after the consummation of the Offering, without taking into account
any exercise of the Underwriters'  over-allotment option) or the average  weekly
trading  volume during the four calendar  weeks preceding such sale. Sales under
Rule 144 are subject  to certain manner of  sale limitations, notice  provisions
and  the  availability of  current public  information  about the  Company. Rule
144(k), as recently amended by the Securities and Exchange Commission,  provides
that  a person who is  not deemed to be an  "affiliate" and who has beneficially
owned shares of Common  Stock for at  least two years is  entitled to sell  such
shares  at any time under  Rule 144 without regard  to the limitations described
above. None of the Restricted Securities  are eligible for the present  two-year
holding  period provided for in Rule 144(k) except for up to 1,700,966 shares of
Common Stock owned by the Scherr Trust and two related family trusts.
 
    Any employee, officer, director or  consultant of the Company who  purchased
his  or  her shares  pursuant to  a  written compensatory  plan or  contract and
otherwise in compliance with Rule 701  under the Securities Act, is entitled  to
rely  on the resale provisions of Rule  701 which permits non-affiliates to sell
their Rule  701 shares  without having  to comply  with the  public-information,
holding-period,  volume-limitation or notice provisions  of Rule 144 and permits
affiliates to sell  their Rule  701 shares without  having to  comply with  Rule
144's  holding period  restrictions, in each  case commencing 90  days after the
date of this  Prospectus. Of the  Restricted Shares, 11,300,327  are subject  to
lock-up  agreements under which the holders have agreed not to sell or otherwise
dispose of any of their shares for a  period of 180 days after the date of  this
Prospectus without the prior written consent of Goldman, Sachs & Co.
 
    Following  this  Offering,  the  Company  intends  to  file  a  registration
statement on one  or more Forms  S-8 under  the Securities Act  to register  the
713,782  shares of  Common Stock issuable  upon the exercise  of options granted
under the  1996  Plan  (none of  which  are  currently exercisable  or  will  be
exercisable within 60 days of March 1, 1997), the 795,970 shares of Common Stock
issuable,  upon  the  exercise of  options  granted  to Larry  Thomas  and Marty
Albertson (none  of which  are currently  exercisable), and  the 875,000  shares
reserved  for issuance under the 1997 Plan (none of which will have been granted
as of the  consummation of this  Offering), thus permitting  the resale of  such
shares  by non-affiliates  in the  public market  without restriction  under the
Securities Act. Such registration  statements will become effective  immediately
upon  filing. See  "Management --  Management Stock  Option Agreements;  -- 1996
Performance Stock Option Plan; -- 1997 Equity Participation Plan."
 
    No predictions can be made as to the effect that sales of Common Stock under
Rule 144, pursuant to a registration statement or otherwise, or the availability
of shares of Common  Stock for sale,  will have on  the market price  prevailing
from time to time. Nevertheless, sales of substantial amounts of Common Stock in
the  public  market,  or  the  perception that  such  sales  could  occur, could
adversely affect prevailing market prices and could impair the Company's  future
ability to raise capital through an offering of its equity securities. See "Risk
Factors -- Possible Effect of Shares Eligible for Future Sale."
 
                                       59
<PAGE>
                          DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK
 
    Upon  consummation of  this Offering,  the authorized  capital stock  of the
Company will consist of 55,000,000 shares  of Common Stock and 5,000,000  shares
of  Preferred Stock. The  following summary description  relating to the capital
stock gives effect to the consummation of this Offering and does not purport  to
be  complete. Reference  is made  to the  Certificate of  Incorporation, and the
Bylaws, which are filed as exhibits to the Registration Statement of which  this
Prospectus  forms a part,  for a detailed description  of the provisions thereof
summarized below.
 
COMMON STOCK
 
    Holders of Common Stock are entitled  to receive such dividends, if any,  as
may  from time to time be declared by  the Board of Directors of the Company out
of  funds  legally   available  therefor.   Pursuant  to   the  Certificate   of
Incorporation, holders of Common Stock are entitled to one vote per share on all
matters  on which the  holders of Common Stock  are entitled to  vote and do not
have cumulative  voting rights.  Holders  of Common  Stock have  no  preemptive,
conversion,  redemption or sinking  fund rights. In the  event of a liquidation,
dissolution or winding-up of the Company,  holders of Common Stock are  entitled
to  share equally and  ratably in the  assets of the  Company, if any, remaining
after the  payment  of  all  debts  and  liabilities  of  the  Company  and  the
liquidation  preference  of  any outstanding  Preferred  Stock.  The outstanding
shares of  Common Stock  are, and  the shares  of Common  Stock offered  by  the
Company  hereby when issued  will be, fully paid  and nonassessable. The rights,
preferences and privileges of holders of Common Stock are subject to any  series
of Preferred Stock which the Company may issue in the future.
 
WARRANTS
 
    In  connection with the  Recapitalization, the Company  issued a warrant for
the purchase of shares of the Common Stock and the Junior Preferred Stock of the
Company (collectively,  the  "Warrants")  to  each of  the  DLJ  Investors.  The
Warrants  are exercisable into an aggregate of 676,566 shares of Common Stock at
an exercise price of $0.01 per share and expire on June 5, 2006.
 
    So long as any of the Warrants  are outstanding, the amount of Common  Stock
obtainable  pursuant to  the Warrants shall  be subject to  change or adjustment
according to the anti-dilution  provisions of the Warrants.  In the case of  any
capital  reorganization  or any  reclassification of  the  capital stock  of the
Company the Warrants shall thereafter be exercisable for the number of shares of
stock  or   other  securities   or  property   receivable  upon   such   capital
reorganization or reclassification equal to the number of shares of Common Stock
into  which the Warrants  would have been exercisable  immediately prior to such
reorganization or reclassification.
 
PREFERRED STOCK
 
    The Board  of  Directors  is  authorized to  provide  for  the  issuance  of
Preferred  Stock in one or more series and to fix the designations, preferences,
powers and relative, participating,  optional and other rights,  qualifications,
limitations  and restrictions  thereof, including the  dividend rate, conversion
rights, voting rights, redemption price  and liquidation preference, and to  fix
the  number of shares to be included in  any such series. Any Preferred Stock so
issued may  rank senior  to the  Common Stock  with respect  to the  payment  of
dividends  or amounts upon  liquidation, dissolution or winding  up, or both. In
addition, any such shares of the Preferred Stock may have class or series voting
rights. Upon  completion  of this  Offering  and the  transactions  contemplated
hereby,  the Company  will not have  any shares of  Preferred Stock outstanding.
Further  issuances  of  Preferred  Stock,  while  providing  the  Company   with
flexibility  in  connection with  general corporate  purposes, may,  among other
things, have an adverse  effect on the  rights of holders  of Common Stock.  See
"Risk Factors -- Ownership of the Company; Anti-takeover Provisions."
 
    SENIOR PREFERRED STOCK
 
    In  connection with the Recapitalization,  the Company issued 800,000 shares
of Senior Preferred Stock with an  initial aggregate liquidation value of  $20.0
million. Approximately $22.9 million of the net
 
                                       60
<PAGE>
proceeds  of this  Offering will  be used  to redeem  all outstanding  shares of
Senior Preferred Stock, at a premium, and to pay all accrued and unpaid dividend
with respect  thereto, whereupon  all  such shares  shall  be cancelled  by  the
Company. See "Use of Proceeds."
 
    JUNIOR PREFERRED STOCK
 
    In connection with the Recapitalization, the Company issued 1,386,000 shares
of  Junior Preferred Stock. All outstanding shares of Junior Preferred Stock are
fully paid and nonassessable. Each  outstanding share of Junior Preferred  Stock
has  a liquidation  preference of $100.00.  Upon consummation  of this Offering,
each outstanding share of  Junior Preferred Stock will  be converted into  6.667
shares  of Common Stock  pursuant to the  terms of an  amendment approved by the
Board of Directors and  requisite stockholders in January  1997. No accrued  and
unpaid dividends will be paid on any shares of Junior Preferred Stock.
 
CERTAIN ANTI-TAKEOVER EFFECTS
 
    The provisions of the Certificate of Incorporation and the Bylaws summarized
in the succeeding paragraphs may be deemed to have anti-takeover effects and may
delay,  defer or prevent a  tender offer or takeover  attempt that a stockholder
might consider  to  be in  such  stockholder's best  interest,  including  those
attempts  that might result  in a premium  over the market  price for the shares
held  by  stockholders.  See  "Risk   Factors  --  Ownership  of  the   Company;
Anti-takeover Provisions."
 
    The  Bylaws provide that special meetings of stockholders of the Company may
be called only by the Board of Directors,  or by a majority of the directors  or
by  a committee authorized by the Board  of Directors to do so. Special meetings
may not  be  called by  the  stockholders. The  Bylaws  and the  Certificate  of
Incorporation provide that any action required to be taken or which may be taken
by  holders of Common Stock must be effected  at a duly called annual or special
meeting of such  holders and may  not be taken  by any written  consent of  such
stockholders.
 
    The Bylaws provide that the stockholders seeking to bring business before an
annual meeting of stockholders, or to nominate directors at an annual or special
meeting  of stockholders, must  provide timely notice thereof  in writing. To be
timely, a stockholder's notice must be  delivered to, or mailed to and  received
at,  the principal executive offices of the Company on a date no later than than
the close  of  business on  the  120th calendar  day  in advance  of  the  first
anniversary  of the date the Company's  proxy statement was released to security
holders in  connection  with  the preceding  year's  annual  meeting;  PROVIDED,
HOWEVER,  that if no annual meeting was held in the previous year or the date of
the annual meeting has been changed by more than 30 calendar days from the  date
contemplated  at the  time of  the previous  year's proxy  statement, a proposal
shall be received  by the Company  no later than  the close of  business on  the
tenth  day following  the day  on which notice  of the  date of  the meeting was
mailed or  public disclosure  of the  date of  the meeting  was made,  whichever
occurs  first. The Bylaws also specify  certain requirements for a stockholder's
notice to be in proper written form.
 
    The Bylaws may  be amended  by a  majority of  the Board  of Directors.  The
Bylaws  may also be amended by the stockholders; PROVIDED, HOWEVER that any such
amendment must be approved by  at least 66 2/3 of  the combined voting power  of
the  outstanding capital  stock entitled  to vote  generally in  the election of
directors. Certain provisions of the Certificate of Incorporation may be amended
only by the affirmative vote of at least 66 2/3 of the combined voting power  of
the then outstanding capital stock entitled to vote generally in the election of
directors.
 
SECTION 203 OF THE DELAWARE GENERAL CORPORATION LAW
 
    Section  203  of  the  Delaware  General  Corporation  Law  ("Delaware Law")
prevents an "interested stockholder"  (defined in Section  203, generally, as  a
person  owning 15%  or more  of a  corporation's outstanding  voting stock) from
engaging in  a  "business  combination"  (as defined  in  Section  203)  with  a
publicly-held  Delaware  corporation for  three  years following  the  time such
person became an interested stockholder unless (i) before such person became  an
interested  stockholder,  the board  of  directors of  the  corporation approved
either the  transaction or  the  business combination  by which  the  interested
stockholder  became  an interested  stockholder; (ii)  upon consummation  of the
transaction that resulted
 
                                       61
<PAGE>
in  the  stockholder   becoming  an  interested   stockholder,  the   interested
stockholder  owned  at  least  85%  of  the  voting  stock  of  the  corporation
outstanding at  the time  the  transaction commenced  (excluding stock  held  by
directors  who are also officers  of the corporation or  by employee stock plans
that do not provide employees with the right to determine confidentially whether
shares held subject to the plan will be tendered in a tender or exchange offer);
or (iii)  after  such person  became  an interested  stockholder,  the  business
combination  is  approved  by the  board  of  directors of  the  corporation and
authorized at  a  meeting  of  the  stockholders  by  the  affirmative  vote  of
two-thirds  of the outstanding voting stock of  the corporation not owned by the
interested stockholder.
 
LIMITATION TO DIRECTOR LIABILITY
 
    The Certificate  of  Incorporation  provides that,  to  the  fullest  extent
permitted  by the Delaware Law, directors of  the Company shall not be liable to
the Company or  its stockholders for  monetary damages for  breach of  fiduciary
duty  as  a director.  Under the  Delaware  Law, a  director's liability  to the
Company or its stockholders may not be limited or eliminated (i) for any  breach
of  the director's duty of loyalty to  the Company or its stockholders, (ii) for
acts or omissions not in good faith or which involve intentional misconduct or a
knowing violation  of  law, (iii)  with  respect to  certain  unlawful  dividend
payments,  stock redemptions  or repurchases  or (iv)  for any  transaction from
which the  director derived  an improper  personal benefit.  This provision,  in
effect,  eliminates  the rights  of the  Company  and its  stockholders (through
stockholders' derivative suits  on behalf  of the Company)  to recover  monetary
damages  from a director  for breach of his  or her fiduciary duty  of care as a
director, except in the situations set forth in clauses (i) through (iv)  above.
In  addition, the Certificate  of Incorporation does not  alter the liability of
directors under federal  securities laws, and  does not limit  or eliminate  the
rights of the Company or any stockholder to seek non-monetary relief, such as an
injunction  or rescission, in the vent of a breach in a director's duty of care.
The Certificate of Incorporation requires the Company to indemnify all directors
and officers of the Company to the  fullest extent permitted by law. The  Bylaws
also  require the Company  to indemnify and  advance indemnification expenses to
the Company's officers and directors. The Company has entered into agreements to
provide indemnification for  the Company's directors  and executive officers  in
addition  to the indemnification permitted  by the Certificate of Incorporation.
These agreements, among other things, will indemnify the Company's directors and
executive officers for  certain expenses  (including attorney's  fees), and  all
losses, claims, liabilities, judgments, fines and settlement amounts incurred by
such  person arising  out of or  in connection  with such person's  service as a
director or officer of the Company to the fullest extent permitted by applicable
laws.
 
CERTAIN PROVISIONS OF CALIFORNIA LAW
 
    The Company  is a  corporation  organized under  the  laws of  Delaware  and
generally the laws of the state of incorporation govern the corporate operations
of  a corporation and the  right of its stockholders.  Certain provisions of the
California Corporations Code may become applicable to a corporation incorporated
outside of  California, however,  if (i)  the corporation  transacts  intrastate
business  in California and the average  of its California property, payroll and
sales factors (as  defined in  the California  Revenue and  Taxation Code)  with
respect  to it is  more than 50% during  its latest fiscal  year, (ii) more than
one-half of its  outstanding voting  securities are  held of  record by  persons
having  addresses  in  California and  (iii)  the corporation  is  not otherwise
exempt. An exemption is provided  if the corporation has outstanding  securities
qualified  for  trading as  a national  market security  on the  Nasdaq National
Market if such corporation has at least 800 holders of its equity securities  as
of  the record date of its most recent annual meeting of stockholders (a "Listed
Corporation").
 
    The Common Stock  has been  approved for  quotation on  the Nasdaq  National
Market  under the  symbol "GTRC."  However, since  a significant  portion of the
Company's activities  presently  occur  in  California,  certain  provisions  of
California corporate law may apply to the Company, as described above, unless as
a  result of  this Offering  (i) more  than one-half  of its  outstanding voting
securities are held of record by  persons not having addresses in California  or
(ii)  there  are  more than  800  holders of  its  equity securities  as  of the
applicable date.
 
                                       62
<PAGE>
    Except as  discussed herein,  provisions of  California law  which could  be
applicable  to the Company  if the Company  meets these tests  and is not exempt
include, without  limitation, those  provisions  relating to  the  stockholders'
right  to  cumulative  votes in  elections  of directors  (cumulative  voting is
mandatory under  California law),  and the  Company's ability  to indemnify  its
officers,  directors and employees (which is  more limited in California than in
Delaware). Notwithstanding  the  foregoing,  a corporation  may  provide  for  a
classified  board of directors, or eliminate cumulative voting, or both if it is
a Listed Corporation.
 
TRANSFER AGENT AND REGISTRAR
 
   
    The Transfer  Agent  and  Registrar  for the  Common  Stock  is  ChaseMellon
Shareholder Services, L.L.C.
    
 
                                       63
<PAGE>
              CERTAIN UNITED STATES FEDERAL TAX CONSIDERATIONS FOR
                           NON-UNITED STATES HOLDERS
 
GENERAL
 
    The  following  is a  general discussion  of  certain United  States federal
income and estate tax consequences of the acquisition, ownership and disposition
of Common Stock  by a  "Non-United States  Holder" and  does not  deal with  tax
consequences   arising  under  the   laws  of  any   foreign,  state,  or  local
jurisdiction. As used herein, a "Non-United States Holder" is a beneficial owner
of Common Stock that, for United States federal income tax purposes, is not  (i)
a  citizen or resident of the United  States, (ii) a corporation, partnership or
other entity created or  organized under the  laws of the  United States or  any
political  subdivision thereof, (iii) an estate,  the income of which is subject
to United States  federal income taxation  regardless of its  source, or (iv)  a
trust  whose administration  is subject to  the primary supervision  of a United
States court and which has  one or more United  States fiduciaries who have  the
authority to control all substantial decisions of such trust.
 
    This  discussion is based  on provisions of the  Code, existing and proposed
regulations   promulgated   thereunder    and   administrative   and    judicial
interpretations  thereof as  of the  date hereof,  all of  which are  subject to
change, possibly retroactively. This discussion does not address all aspects  of
United States federal income and estate taxation and does not deal with foreign,
state  and  local tax  consequences that  may be  relevant to  Non-United States
Holders in light of their personal circumstances. Prospective investors who  are
Non-United  States Holders are urged to consult their tax advisors regarding the
United States federal tax  consequences of acquiring,  holding and disposing  of
the  Common Stock, as well as any tax consequences that may arise under the laws
of any foreign, state, local or other taxing jurisdiction.
 
DIVIDENDS
 
    Generally, any dividend paid to a  Non-United States Holder will be  subject
to  withholding of United States federal income tax  at a 30% rate or such lower
rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty. If the dividend  is
effectively  connected with the conduct of a  United States trade or business of
the Non-United States  Holder, the dividend  would be subject  to United  States
federal income tax on a net income basis (and, with respect to corporate holders
and  under certain  circumstances, the branch  profits tax) and  would be exempt
from the 30% withholding tax described above.
 
    Under current  United  States Treasury  regulations,  dividends paid  to  an
address  outside the United States are presumed to be paid to a resident of such
country for purposes of the withholding discussed above, and, under the  current
interpretation   of  United   States  Treasury  regulations,   for  purposes  of
determining the applicability of a tax treaty rate. Under proposed United States
Treasury regulations,  not currently  in effect,  however, a  Non-United  States
Holder  who wishes to  claim the benefit  of an applicable  treaty rate would be
required to satisfy applicable certification and other requirements.
 
    A Non-United States  Holder that is  eligible for a  reduced rate of  United
States  withholding tax  pursuant to  a tax  treaty may  obtain a  refund of any
excess amounts currently withheld by filing an appropriate claim for refund with
the United States Internal Revenue Service.
 
DISPOSITION OF COMMON STOCK
 
    A Non-United States Holder  generally will not be  subject to United  States
federal  income tax on any gain recognized upon the sale or other disposition of
Common Stock unless (i) such gain is effectively connected with the conduct of a
United States trade or business of the  Non-United States Holder or (ii) in  the
case  of a Non-United States  Holder who is a  non-resident alien individual and
holds the Common Stock  as a capital  asset, such individual  is present in  the
United  States for 183 days or more  days during the taxable year of disposition
and certain other  requirements are  met. If  a Non-United  States Holder  falls
under  clause (i)  above, the  holder will  be subject  to tax  on the  net gain
derived from the sale on  the same basis that  applies to United States  persons
generally    (and,    with   respect    to    corporate   holders    and   under
 
                                       64
<PAGE>
certain circumstances,  the branch  profits tax).  If an  individual  Non-United
States  Holder  falls under  clause  (ii) above,  the  holder generally  will be
subject to a flat 30% tax  on the gain derived from  the sale which gain may  be
offset by United States source capital losses.
 
INFORMATION REPORTING AND BACKUP WITHHOLDING
 
    The  Company  must report  annually to  the  United States  Internal Revenue
Service and to  each Non-United States  Holder the amount  of dividends paid  to
such  holder and  the amount  of any  tax withheld.  These information reporting
requirements apply regardless of whether withholding is required. Copies of  the
information  returns reporting such  dividends and withholding  may also be made
available to the tax authorities in  the country in which the Non-United  States
Holder resides under the provisions of an applicable income tax treaty.
 
    United States backup withholding tax generally will not apply to the payment
of  (a) dividends on  Common Stock to  a Non-United States  Holder at an address
outside the United States or (b) the proceeds of the sale of Common Stock to  or
through  the foreign office of a broker. In  the case of the payment of proceeds
from such a sale  of Common Stock  through a foreign office  of a United  States
broker or a foreign broker that has certain types of relationships to the United
States,  however, information reporting, but not backup withholding, is required
with respect to the  payment unless the broker  has documentary evidence in  its
files   that  the  owner  is  a  Non-United  States  Holder  and  certain  other
requirements are  met or  the  holder otherwise  establishes an  exemption.  The
payment  of the  proceeds from the  sale of  Common Stock and  dividends paid on
Common Stock to  or through a  United States office  of a broker  is subject  to
information  reporting and possible backup withholding at the rate of 31% unless
the owner certifies its non-United States  status under penalties of perjury  or
otherwise establishes an exemption.
 
    Backup  withholding is not an additional tax. Any amounts withheld under the
backup withholding  rules may  be refunded  or credited  against the  Non-United
States  Holder's United States  federal income tax  liability, provided that the
required information is furnished to the United States Internal Revenue Service.
 
    These information reporting and backup withholding rules are under review by
the United States  Treasury and their  application to holding  and disposing  of
Common  Stock could  be changed  by future regulations.  On April  15, 1996, the
United States  Internal Revenue  Service  issued proposed  Treasury  Regulations
concerning  the withholding  of tax  and reporting  for certain  amounts paid to
non-resident individuals  and  foreign corporations.  The  proposed  regulations
would,  among other changes, eliminate the presumption under current regulations
with respect  to dividends  paid to  addresses outside  the United  States.  The
proposed  Treasury  Regulations,  if adopted  in  their present  form,  would be
effective for payments made after  December 31, 1997. Prospective purchasers  of
Common  Stock  should  consult  their  tax  advisors  concerning  the  potential
application and effect of such Treasury Regulations.
 
FEDERAL ESTATE TAXES
 
    Common Stock held by an individual  Non-United States Holder at the time  of
death  will be included in such holder's  gross estate for United States federal
estate tax purposes  and may  be subject to  United States  federal estate  tax,
unless an applicable estate tax treaty provides otherwise.
 
                                       65
<PAGE>
                                 LEGAL MATTERS
 
    The  validity of the  shares of Common  Stock offered hereby  will be passed
upon by Latham  & Watkins,  Los Angeles,  California. Certain  legal matters  in
connection  with  the  Offering will  be  passed  upon for  the  Underwriters by
Skadden, Arps, Slate,  Meagher &  Flom LLP,  Los Angeles,  California. Latham  &
Watkins  provides  legal  services  to certain  of  the  representatives  of the
Underwriters and certain stockholders of the Company on a regular basis.
 
                                    EXPERTS
 
    The financial statements and schedule of Guitar Center, Inc. as of  December
31,  1996 and  for the  year then ended,  have been  included herein  and in the
registration statement in  reliance upon the  report of KPMG  Peat Marwick  LLP,
independent  certified public accountants, appearing  elsewhere herein, and upon
the authority of said firm as experts in accounting and auditing.
 
    The financial statements of Guitar Center, Inc. at December 31, 1995 and for
the two  years  ended  December  31, 1995,  appearing  in  this  Prospectus  and
Registration  Statement  have been  audited by  Ernst  & Young  LLP, independent
auditors, as set forth in their  report thereon appearing elsewhere herein,  and
are  included in reliance upon such report given upon the authority of such firm
as experts in accounting and auditing.
 
    In connection with the Recapitalization, Ernst  & Young LLP was replaced  on
July  24, 1996 by KPMG  Peat Marwick LLP as  the Company's independent certified
public accountants.  The decision  to  change accountants  was approved  by  the
Company's  Board of Directors. The reports of Ernst & Young LLP on the Company's
financial statements for the  past two fiscal years  did not contain an  adverse
opinion  or a  disclaimer of opinion  and were  not qualified or  modified as to
uncertainty, audit scope or accounting principles. In connection with the audits
of the Company's  financial statements for  each of the  two fiscal years  ended
December  31, 1995, and the subsequent interim period ended June 30, 1996, there
were no  disagreements with  Ernst &  Young  LLP on  any matters  of  accounting
principles  or practices, financial  statement disclosure or  auditing scope and
procedures which, if  not resolved  to the satisfaction  of Ernst  & Young  LLP,
would  have caused Ernst  & Young LLP to  make reference to  the matter in their
report.
 
                             ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
 
    The Company  has  filed  with  the Securities  and  Exchange  Commission  in
Washington,  D.C. a Registration Statement on  Form S-1. File No. 333-20931 (the
"Registration Statement") under the Securities Act with respect to the shares of
Common Stock offered hereby. As  used herein, the term "Registration  Statement"
means  the initial  Registration Statement and  any and  all amendments thereto.
This Prospectus  does  not contain  all  of the  information  set forth  in  the
Registration  Statement  and the  exhibits  and schedules  thereto.  For further
information with respect  to the Company,  the Common Stock  and this  Offering,
reference  is hereby  made to such  Registration Statement and  the exhibits and
schedules thereto. Statements contained in this Prospectus as to the contents of
any contract  or  other  document  are not  necessarily  complete  and  in  each
instance,  reference is made to the copy  of such contract or documents filed as
an exhibit to the Registration Statement, each such statement being qualified in
all respects  by  such  reference. The  Registration  Statement,  including  the
exhibits  and  schedules thereto,  may  be inspected  and  copied at  the public
reference facilities maintained by the Securities and Exchange Commission at 450
Fifth Street, N.W., Room  1024, Washington, D.C. 20549  and at certain  regional
offices  of the Commission located  at 75 Park Place,  14th Floor, New York, New
York 10007 and Northwest Atrium Center, 500 Madison Street, Suite 1400, Chicago,
Illinois 60661.  Copies  of such  materials  can  be obtained  from  the  Public
Reference  Section  of the  Commission  at 450  Fifth  Street, N.W.,  Room 1025,
Washington, D.C.  20549,  at  prescribed  rates.  The  Securities  and  Exchange
Commission  maintains a World Wide Web  site at http://www.sec.gov that contains
reports, proxy  and  information  statements  and  other  information  regarding
registrants   that  filed  electronically  with   the  Securities  and  Exchange
Commission. The Company is currently  subject to the informational  requirements
of  the  Exchange Act  and, in  accordance therewith,  files reports,  proxy and
information statements with the Securities and Exchange Commission.
 
                                       66
<PAGE>
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                         INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
<TABLE>
<S>                                                                         <C>
Report of Independent Auditors (KPMG Peat Marwick LLP)....................   F-2
Report of Independent Auditors (Ernst & Young LLP)........................   F-3
Balance Sheets as of December 31, 1995 and 1996...........................   F-4
Statements of Operations for the years ended December 31, 1994, 1995 and
 1996.....................................................................   F-5
Statements of Stockholders' Equity (Deficit) for the years ended December
 31, 1994, 1995 and 1996..................................................   F-6
Statements of Cash Flows for the years ended December 31, 1994, 1995 and
 1996.....................................................................   F-7
Notes to Financial Statements.............................................   F-8
</TABLE>
 
                                      F-1
<PAGE>
                         REPORT OF INDEPENDENT AUDITORS
 
The Board of Directors and Stockholders
Guitar Center, Inc.:
 
    We have audited the accompanying balance sheet of Guitar Center, Inc. as of
December 31, 1996 and the related statements of operations, stockholders' equity
(deficit) and cash flows for the year then ended. These financial statements are
the responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express
an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audit.
 
    We conducted our audit in accordance with generally accepted auditing
standards. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain
reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material
misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting
the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes
assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by
management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation.
We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.
 
    In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly,
in all material respects, the financial position of Guitar Center, Inc. as of
December 31, 1996 and the results of its operations and its cash flows for the
year then ended in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles.
 
                                          KPMG PEAT MARWICK LLP
 
Los Angeles, California
February 10, 1997
 
                                      F-2
<PAGE>
                         REPORT OF INDEPENDENT AUDITORS
 
The Board of Directors and Stockholder
Guitar Center, Inc.
 
    We have audited the accompanying balance sheet of Guitar Center, Inc. as of
December 31, 1995, and the related statements of operations, stockholders'
equity, and cash flows for each of the two years in the period ended December
31, 1995. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's
management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial
statements based on our audits.
 
    We conducted our audits in accordance with generally accepted auditing
standards. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain
reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material
misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting
the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes
assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by
management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation.
We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
 
    In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly,
in all material respects, the financial position of Guitar Center, Inc. at
December 31, 1995, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each
of the two years in the period ended December 31, 1995 in conformity with
generally accepted accounting principles.
 
                                          ERNST & YOUNG LLP
 
Los Angeles, California
March 6, 1996.
 
                                      F-3
<PAGE>
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                                 BALANCE SHEETS
                 (DOLLARS IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA)
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                             DECEMBER 31,
                                                                                        -----------------------
                                                                                          1995         1996
                                                                                        ---------  ------------
<S>                                                                                     <C>        <C>
ASSETS
Current assets:
  Cash and cash equivalents...........................................................  $   1,338  $         47
  Accounts receivable, less allowance for doubtful accounts of $200 (1995) and $150
   (1996).............................................................................      2,203         4,062
  Inventories.........................................................................     31,281        49,705
  Prepaid expenses and other current assets...........................................        690         1,388
  Employee notes......................................................................         82            67
                                                                                        ---------  ------------
Total current assets..................................................................     35,594        55,269
Property and equipment, net...........................................................     13,276        14,966
Goodwill, net of accumulated amortization of $152 (1995) and $167 (1996)..............        447           432
Other assets..........................................................................        301         4,182
                                                                                        ---------  ------------
Total assets..........................................................................  $  49,618  $     74,849
                                                                                        ---------  ------------
                                                                                        ---------  ------------
 
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY (DEFICIT)
Current liabilities:
  Accounts payable....................................................................  $  12,613  $     14,005
  Accrued expenses....................................................................      7,061         7,891
  Deferred compensation...............................................................      7,908       --
  Merchandise advances................................................................      2,010         2,401
  Current portion of long-term debt...................................................     --             3,536
                                                                                        ---------  ------------
Total current liabilities.............................................................     29,592        27,833
Other long-term liabilities...........................................................        263           645
Long-term debt........................................................................     --           100,000
Senior preferred stock, aggregate liquidation preference of $21,602; authorized
 4,250,000 shares, issued and outstanding 800,000 shares..............................     --            15,186
Stockholders' equity (deficit):
  Junior preferred stock aggregate liquidation preference of $144,959.................     --           138,610
  Common stock, no par value; authorized 2,500,000 shares, issued and outstanding
   1,400,000 at December 31, 1995; $0.01 par value authorized 55,000,000 shares,
   issued and outstanding 3,622,804 at December 31, 1996..............................      4,987            36
  Warrants............................................................................     --             6,500
  Additional paid in capital..........................................................     --            (6,966)
  Retained earnings (deficit).........................................................     14,776      (206,995)
                                                                                        ---------  ------------
Total stockholders' equity (deficit)..................................................     19,763       (68,815)
                                                                                        ---------  ------------
Total liabilities and stockholders' equity (deficit)..................................  $  49,618  $     74,849
                                                                                        ---------  ------------
                                                                                        ---------  ------------
</TABLE>
 
                SEE ACCOMPANYING NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS.
 
                                      F-4
<PAGE>
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                            STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS
                     (IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA)
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                            YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,
                                                              ----------------------------------------------------
                                                                    1994              1995              1996
                                                              ----------------  ----------------  ----------------
<S>                                                           <C>               <C>               <C>
Net sales...................................................  $        129,039  $        170,671  $        213,294
Cost of goods sold, buying and occupancy....................            92,275           123,415           153,222
                                                              ----------------  ----------------  ----------------
Gross profit................................................            36,764            47,256            60,072
Selling, general and administrative expenses................            26,143            32,664            41,345
Deferred compensation expense...............................             1,259             3,087            71,760
                                                              ----------------  ----------------  ----------------
Operating income (loss).....................................             9,362            11,505           (53,033)
Interest income.............................................                14                14                 8
Interest expense............................................              (266)             (382)          (12,177)
Transaction expenses........................................         --                --                   (6,942)
Other income (expenses).....................................                45                65              (126)
                                                              ----------------  ----------------  ----------------
Income (loss) before income taxes...........................             9,155            11,202           (72,270)
Income taxes................................................               326               345               139
                                                              ----------------  ----------------  ----------------
Net income (loss)...........................................  $          8,829  $         10,857  $        (72,409)
                                                              ----------------  ----------------  ----------------
                                                              ----------------  ----------------  ----------------
Pro forma data (unaudited):
  Income (loss) before taxes................................  $          9,155  $         11,202  $        (72,270)
  Pro forma income taxes....................................             4,478             6,144         --
                                                              ----------------  ----------------  ----------------
  Pro forma net income (loss)...............................  $          4,677  $          5,058  $        (72,270)
                                                              ----------------  ----------------  ----------------
                                                              ----------------  ----------------  ----------------
  Senior and junior preferred stock dividends...............         --                --                    7,951
  Net loss available to common stockholder..................         --                --                  (80,221)
                                                                                                  ----------------
                                                                                                  ----------------
  Pro forma net income (loss) per share.....................  $           0.24  $           0.26  $          (4.13)
                                                              ----------------  ----------------  ----------------
                                                              ----------------  ----------------  ----------------
  Weighted average shares outstanding.......................            19,408            19,408            19,408
                                                              ----------------  ----------------  ----------------
                                                              ----------------  ----------------  ----------------
</TABLE>
 
                SEE ACCOMPANYING NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS.
 
                                      F-5
<PAGE>
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                  STATEMENT OF STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY (DEFICIT)
                                 (IN THOUSANDS)
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                            JUNIOR                               ADDITIONAL    RETAINED
                                           PREFERRED     COMMON                   PAID IN      EARNINGS
                                             STOCK        STOCK      WARRANTS     CAPITAL     (DEFICIT)       TOTAL
                                          -----------  -----------  -----------  ----------  ------------  ------------
<S>                                       <C>          <C>          <C>          <C>         <C>           <C>
                                                                  (IN THOUSANDS)
Balance at December 31, 1993............  $   --        $   4,987    $  --       $   --      $     13,477  $     18,464
  Net income............................      --           --           --           --             8,829         8,829
  Distributions to stockholder..........      --           --           --           --            (3,869)       (3,869)
                                          -----------  -----------  -----------  ----------  ------------  ------------
Balance at December 31, 1994............      --            4,987       --           --            18,437        23,424
  Net income............................      --           --           --           --            10,857        10,857
  Distributions to stockholder..........      --           --           --           --           (14,518)      (14,518)
                                          -----------  -----------  -----------  ----------  ------------  ------------
Balance at December 31, 1995............      --            4,987       --           --            14,776        19,763
  S Corporation cash distributions......      --           --           --           --           (28,057)      (28,057)
  S Corporation non-cash
   distributions........................      --           --           --           --            (1,753)       (1,753)
  Redemption of prior sole stockholder
   interest.............................       19,800      (4,787)      --           --          (128,115)     (113,102)
  Reclassification of prior S
   Corporation deficit..................      --           --           --          (10,249)       10,249       --
  Issuance of equity to management......       49,500         500       --           --           --             50,000
  Issuance of equity to new investors...       69,300         700       --           --           --             70,000
  Issuance of warrants..................      --           --            6,500       --           --              6,500
  Options granted to management by
   investor group.......................      --           --           --            1,918       --              1,918
  Reclassification of excess of par
   value................................      --           (1,364)      --            1,364       --            --
  Sale of equity to management..........           10      --           --                1       --                 11
  Net loss..............................      --           --           --           --           (72,409)      (72,409)
  Undeclared dividend on senior
   preferred stock......................      --           --           --           --            (1,602)       (1,602)
  Accretion of senior preferred stock...      --           --           --           --               (84)          (84)
                                          -----------  -----------  -----------  ----------  ------------  ------------
Balance at December 31, 1996............  $   138,610   $      36    $   6,500   $   (6,966) $   (206,995) $    (68,815)
                                          -----------  -----------  -----------  ----------  ------------  ------------
                                          -----------  -----------  -----------  ----------  ------------  ------------
</TABLE>
 
                SEE ACCOMPANYING NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS.
 
                                      F-6
<PAGE>
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                            STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
                                 (IN THOUSANDS)
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                            YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,
                                                                 ---------------------------------------------
                                                                     1994            1995            1996
                                                                 -------------  --------------  --------------
<S>                                                              <C>            <C>             <C>
OPERATING ACTIVITIES
Net income (loss)..............................................  $       8,829  $       10,857  $      (72,409)
Adjustments to reconcile net income (loss) to net cash provided
 by (used in) operating activities:
  Depreciation and amortization................................          1,488           1,802           2,161
  Deferred compensation--repurchase of options.................       --              --                49,510
  Investor options to management...............................       --              --                 1,918
  (Gain) loss on sale of fixed assets..........................             85              (4)            112
  Amortization of deferred financing fees......................       --              --                   215
  Changes in operating assets and liabilities:
    Accounts receivable........................................            714            (513)         (1,859)
    Inventories................................................         (4,785)         (2,487)        (18,424)
    Prepaid expenses...........................................             12            (317)           (698)
    Other assets...............................................             30            (154)           (511)
    Accounts payable...........................................          2,139           2,208           1,392
    Accrued liabilities........................................          2,871           1,452             830
    Deferred compensation......................................          1,259           3,087          (7,908)
    Merchandise advances.......................................            349             490             391
    Other long-term liabilities................................            296             (33)            382
                                                                 -------------  --------------  --------------
Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities............         13,287          16,388         (44,898)
INVESTING ACTIVITIES
Proceeds from sale of assets...................................            143              15             433
Purchases of property and equipment............................         (3,277)         (3,432)         (6,133)
Employee notes.................................................            (39)            (42)             15
                                                                 -------------  --------------  --------------
Net cash used in investing activities..........................         (3,173)         (3,459)         (5,685)
FINANCING ACTIVITIES
Principal repayments of long-term debt.........................         (2,575)           (825)       --
Proceeds from issuance of long term debt.......................       --              --               100,000
Net change in revolving debt facility..........................       --              --                 3,536
Distribution of prior shareholder interest.....................       --              --              (113,102)
Deferred financing fees paid...................................       --              --                (3,585)
Issuance of common stock.......................................       --              --                 1,200
Issuance of junior preferred stock.............................       --              --                69,300
Issuance of senior preferred stock.............................       --              --                13,500
Issuance of warrants...........................................       --              --                 6,500
Distributions to stockholder...................................         (3,869)        (14,518)        (28,057)
                                                                 -------------  --------------  --------------
Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities............         (6,444)        (15,343)         49,292
                                                                 -------------  --------------  --------------
Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents...........          3,670          (2,414)         (1,291)
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year.................             82           3,752           1,338
                                                                 -------------  --------------  --------------
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year.......................          3,752  $        1,338  $           47
                                                                 -------------  --------------  --------------
                                                                 -------------  --------------  --------------
SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURE OF CASH FLOW INFORMATION
  Cash paid during the year for:
    Interest...................................................  $         292  $          357  $       11,890
                                                                 -------------  --------------  --------------
                                                                 -------------  --------------  --------------
    Income taxes...............................................  $         111  $          346  $          139
                                                                 -------------  --------------  --------------
                                                                 -------------  --------------  --------------
</TABLE>
 
SUPPLEMENTAL SCHEDULE OF NONCASH ACTIVITIES
 
    In 1996, the Company entered into two sale leaseback transactions with its
former sole stockholder aggregating $1,753,000.
 
                SEE ACCOMPANYING NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS.
 
                                      F-7
<PAGE>
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                         NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
                               DECEMBER 31, 1996
 
1.  NATURE OF BUSINESS AND SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES
 
    NATURE OF BUSINESS
 
    Guitar Center, Inc. ("Guitar Center" or the "Company") operates a chain of
retail stores which sell high quality musical instruments primarily guitars,
keyboard, percussion and pro-audio equipment. At December 31, 1996, the Company
operated 28 stores in major cities throughout the United States with
approximately 50% of the stores located in California.
 
    The financial statements give effect to the reincorporation of the Company
from a California to a Delaware corporation on October 11, 1996 and a 2.582-to-1
stock split effectuated on January 15, 1997.
 
    RECAPITALIZATION
 
    On June 5, 1996, Guitar Center consummated a series of transactions to
effect the recapitalization of the Company (the "Recapitalization"). Members of
management purchased 1,291,000 shares of the Company's Common Stock for $0.5
million cash and received 495,000 shares of 8% Junior Preferred Stock in
exchange for the cancellation of outstanding options exercisable for Common
Stock. The Company's former sole stockholder received 198,000 shares of Junior
Preferred Stock in exchange for Common Stock. New investors purchased 1,807,400
shares of Common Stock and 693,000 shares of Junior Preferred Stock for $70.0
million cash, and 800,000 shares of 14% Senior Preferred Stock and Warrants for
an aggregate $20 million cash. The Warrants are exchangeable for 190,252 shares
of Common Stock and 72,947 shares of Junior Preferred Stock. The Company
repurchased shares of Common Stock from the former sole stockholder for $113.1
million cash, and canceled certain options for Common Stock held by management
in exchange for $27.9 million cash. For financial statement purposes, the
Company recorded a charge to operations in the amount of $69.9 million (net of
$7.9 million which the Company had previously accrued) related to the
cancellation and exchange of the management stock options.
 
    In part to fund the Recapitalization transaction and to repay the $35.9
million outstanding under its Old Credit Facility, the Company borrowed $100
million under an increasing rate Bridge Facility. The Bridge Facility was repaid
on July 2, 1996 with the proceeds of the 11% Senior Notes due 2006 and cash on
hand.
 
    In connection with the Recapitalization, the Company incurred transaction
costs and financing fees of approximately $11.6 million, which consists of $6.9
million of sellers transaction costs and $4.7 million in fees paid to finance
the Bridge Facility. These amounts have been charged to transaction expenses and
interest expense, net, respectively, in the 1996 statement of operations. In
addition, on July 2, 1996, in connection with the sale of the Notes,
approximately $3.6 million was paid and capitalized as an other asset and will
be amortized over the term of the related debt.
 
    OFFERING
 
    In January 1997, the Board of Directors authorized the filing of a
registration statement for an initial public offering (the "Offering") of the
Company's Common Stock $.01 par value ("Common Stock").
 
    Upon consummation of the Offering, the Company will convert 100% of the
outstanding shares of the Company's Junior Preferred Stock into shares of Common
Stock at a ratio of 6.667 shares of Common Stock for each share of Junior
Preferred Stock. No accrued and unpaid dividends will be paid on any shares of
Junior Preferred Stock. Upon successful consummation of the Offering, the
Company intends to use the proceeds to redeem (or repurchase through open market
purchases or otherwise) up to approximately 33.3% of the Company's 11% Senior
Notes due 2006 (the "Senior Notes") at a price not to exceed 110% of the
principal amount thereof, plus accrued and unpaid interest. Accordingly, the
Company anticipates that an extraordinary charge to operations will be incurred
equal to the premium paid plus the write-off of one-third of the unamortized
deferred financing fees. Additionally, the Company
 
                                      F-8
<PAGE>
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
 
1.  NATURE OF BUSINESS AND SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)
intends to redeem 100% of the outstanding shares of the Company's Senior
Preferred Stock, $.01 par value (the "Senior Preferred Stock"), at 103% of the
face amount thereof, plus accrued and unpaid dividends. If successful, a charge
to dividends will be incurred by the Company for the difference between the
financial statement value of the Senior Preferred Stock and the face amount
thereof, plus premium.
 
    INVENTORIES
 
    Inventories, including used merchandise and vintage guitars, are valued at
the lower of cost or market using the first-in, first-out (FIFO) method.
 
    PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT
 
    Property and equipment are recorded at cost. Depreciation is computed using
the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets;
generally five years for furniture and fixtures, computer equipment and
vehicles, 15 years for buildings and 15 years or the life of the lease,
whichever is less, for leasehold improvements. Maintenance and repair costs are
expensed as they are incurred, while renewals and betterments are capitalized.
 
    STORE PREOPENING COSTS
 
    Effective January 1, 1996, the Company elected to capitalize certain
preopening costs and amortize the balance over 12 months. Previously, preopening
costs were charged to expense as incurred. The change was not material to any
previous periods presented.
 
    ADVERTISING COSTS
 
    The Company expenses the costs of advertising as incurred. Advertising
expense included in the statements of operations for the years ended December
31, 1994, 1995 and 1996, is $4,236,000, $4,128,000 and $5,717,000, respectively.
 
    MERCHANDISE ADVANCES
 
    Merchandise advances represent primarily layaway deposits which are recorded
as a liability pending consummation of the sale when the full purchase price is
received from the customer and outstanding gift certificates which are recorded
as a liability until redemption by the customer.
 
    REVENUE RECOGNITION
 
    Revenue is recognized at the time of sale, net of a provision for estimated
returns.
 
    INCOME TAXES
 
    In connection with the Recapitalization, the Company terminated its S
Corporation election and converted to a C Corporation for income tax purposes.
The Company accounts for income taxes under Statement of Financial Accounting
Standards No. 109, "Accounting for Income Taxes" ("SFAS 109"). Under the asset
and liability method of SFAS 109, deferred income tax assets and liabilities are
recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to differences between
financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and
their respective tax bases. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured
using tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years in which those
temporary differences are expected to be recovered or settled. Under SFAS 109,
the effect on deferred tax assets and liabilities of a change in tax rates is
recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date.
 
    In assessing the realizability of deferred tax assets, management considers
whether it is more likely than not that some portion or all of the deferred tax
assets will not be realized. The ultimate realization of deferred tax assets is
dependent upon the generation of future taxable income during the periods in
which those temporary differences become deductible. Management considers the
scheduled reversals
 
                                      F-9
<PAGE>
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
 
1.  NATURE OF BUSINESS AND SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)
of deferred tax liabilities, projected future taxable income, and tax planning
strategies in making this assessment. Management determined that a substantial
valuation allowance was necessary as of December 31, 1996 due to the increased
leverage of the Company on that date and its effect on future taxable income.
 
    Prior to the Recapitalization, the Company had elected to be taxed as a
Subchapter S corporation. This election generally requires the individual
stockholder rather than the Company to pay federal income taxes on the Company's
earnings.
 
    California, and certain other states in which the Company does business,
impose a minimum tax on Subchapter S corporate income, which is reflected as
income taxes on the statements of operations.
 
    GOODWILL
 
    Goodwill represents the excess of the purchase price over the fair value of
the net assets acquired resulting from a business combination and is being
amortized on a straight-line basis over 40 years.
 
    RENT EXPENSE
 
    The Company leases certain store locations under operating leases that
provide for annual payments that increase over the life of the leases. The
aggregate of the minimum annual payments are expensed on a straight-line basis
over the term of the related lease without consideration of renewal option
periods. The amount by which straight-line rent expense exceeds actual lease
payment requirements in the early years of the leases is accrued as deferred
minimum rent and reduced in later years when the actual cash payment
requirements exceed the straight-line expense.
 
    CONCENTRATION OF CREDIT RISK
 
    The Company's deposits are with various high quality financial institutions.
Customer purchases are transacted using generally cash or credit cards. In
certain instances, the Company grants credit for larger purchases, generally to
professional musicians, under normal trade terms. Trade accounts receivable were
approximately $212,000 and $409,000 at December 31, 1995 and 1996, respectively.
Credit losses have historically been within management's expectations.
 
    USE OF ESTIMATES IN THE PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
    The preparation of financial statements in conformity with generally
accepted accounting principles requires management to make estimates and
assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and
disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial
statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the
reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.
 
    CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
 
    For the purposes of balance sheet classification and the statement of cash
flows, the Company considers all highly liquid investments that are both readily
convertible into cash and mature within 90 days of their date of purchase to be
cash equivalents.
 
    IMPAIRMENT OF LONG-LIVED ASSETS AND LONG-LIVED ASSETS TO BE DISPOSED OF
 
    The Company adopted the provisions of SFAS No. 121, ACCOUNTING FOR THE
IMPAIRMENT OF LONG-LIVED ASSETS AND FOR LONG-LIVED ASSETS TO BE DISPOSED OF, on
January 1, 1996. This Statement requires that long-lived assets and certain
identifiable intangibles be reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes
in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of an asset may not be
recoverable. Recoverability of assets to be held and used is measured by a
comparison of the carrying amount of an asset to future net cash flows expected
to be generated by the asset. If such assets are considered to be impaired, the
impairment to be recognized is measured by the amount by which the carrying
amount of
 
                                      F-10
<PAGE>
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
 
1.  NATURE OF BUSINESS AND SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)
the assets exceed the fair value of the assets. Assets to be disposed of are
reported at the lower of the carrying amount or fair value less costs to sell.
Adoption of this Statement did not have a material impact on the Company's
financial position, results of operations or liquidity.
 
    STOCK OPTION PLANS
 
    Prior to January 1, 1996, the Company accounted for its stock option plan in
accordance with the provisions of Accounting Principles Board ("APB") Opinion
No. 25, ACCOUNTING FOR STOCK ISSUED TO EMPLOYEES, and related interpretations.
As such, compensation expense would be recorded on the date of grant only if the
current market price of the underlying stock exceeded the exercise price. On
January 1, 1996, the Company adopted SFAS No. 123, ACCOUNTING FOR STOCK-BASED
COMPENSATION, which permits entities to recognize as expense over the vesting
period the fair value of all stock-based awards on the date of grant.
Alternatively, SFAS No. 123 also allows entities to continue to apply the
provisions of APB Opinion No. 25 and provide pro forma net income and pro forma
earnings per share disclosures for employee stock option grants made in 1995 and
future years as if the fair-value-based method defined in SFAS No. 123 had been
applied. The Company has elected to continue to apply the provisions of APB
Opinion No. 25 and provide the pro forma disclosure provisions of SFAS No. 123.
 
    FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
 
    The carrying amount of the Company's financial instruments, which
principally include cash, accounts receivable, accounts payable and accrued
expenses, approximates fair value due to the relatively short maturity of such
instruments.
 
    The fair value of the Company's short term instrument reflects the fair
value based upon current rates available to the Company for similar debt. The
fair value of the Company's long term debt instrument is $110 million, based on
quoted market prices.
 
2.  INVENTORIES
    The major classes of inventories are as follows:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                       DECEMBER 31,
                                                                                   --------------------
                                                                                     1995       1996
                                                                                   ---------  ---------
                                                                                      (IN THOUSANDS)
<S>                                                                                <C>        <C>
Major goods......................................................................  $  19,597  $  32,758
Associated accessories...........................................................      5,952      9,057
Vintage guitars..................................................................      2,072      2,569
Used merchandise.................................................................      1,940      2,439
General accessories..............................................................      1,720      2,882
                                                                                   ---------  ---------
                                                                                   $  31,281  $  49,705
                                                                                   ---------  ---------
                                                                                   ---------  ---------
</TABLE>
 
    Major goods includes the major product lines including stringed merchandise,
percussion, keyboards and pro-audio equipment. Associated accessories are
comprised of accessories to major goods. General accessories includes other
merchandise such as apparel, cables and books.
 
                                      F-11
<PAGE>
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
 
3.  PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT
    Property and equipment consists of the following:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                       DECEMBER 31,
                                                                                   --------------------
                                                                                     1995       1996
                                                                                   ---------  ---------
                                                                                      (IN THOUSANDS)
<S>                                                                                <C>        <C>
Land.............................................................................  $   2,881  $   2,283
Buildings........................................................................      9,075      7,693
Transportation equipment.........................................................        494        467
Furniture and fixtures...........................................................      5,838      8,161
Leasehold improvements...........................................................      2,416      6,440
Construction in progress.........................................................      1,201        185
                                                                                   ---------  ---------
                                                                                      21,905     25,229
Less accumulated depreciation....................................................      8,629     10,263
                                                                                   ---------  ---------
                                                                                   $  13,276  $  14,966
                                                                                   ---------  ---------
                                                                                   ---------  ---------
</TABLE>
 
4.  LONG-TERM DEBT
    In connection with the Recapitalization, the Company borrowed $100 million
under increasing rate notes (the "Bridge Facility"). Financing fees of $4.7
million were paid and charged to the statement of operations during June 1996.
On July 2, 1996, the Bridge Facility was repaid with the proceeds from the sale
of 11% Senior Notes due 2006 and cash on hand. The Senior Notes are unsecured
and pay interest on a semi-annual basis.
 
    The Senior Notes are not entitled to the benefit of a sinking fund. The
Senior Notes may be redeemed, in whole or in part, at the option of the Company,
at any time after July 1, 2001 at prices declining from 105.5% to 100.0% of the
principal amount redeemed, plus accrued and unpaid interest. In addition, the
Company, may, at its option and subject to certain conditions, redeem up to
33 1/3% of the original aggregate principal amount of Senior Notes, at a
redemption price of 110% of the principal amount thereof in connection with an
initial public offering of Common Stock. The holders of the Senior Notes have
the right to require the Company to repurchase their Senior Notes at 101% of the
principal amount thereof, plus accrued and unpaid interest, upon the occurrence
of a change of control, as defined.
 
    In June 1996, the Company entered into a $25 million unsecured revolving
line of credit. The line expires in June 2001. The revolving line of credit
bears interest at various rates based on the prime lending rate (8.25% at
December 31, 1996) plus 1.5% or the Eurodollar rate (5.5% at December 31, 1996)
plus 3.0%. A fee of 0.375% is assessed on the unused portion of the facility
with interest due monthly. At December 31, 1996, the Company had $3.5 million
outstanding under the revolving line of credit and $300,000 outstanding on
standby letters of credit. The Company had available borrowings under the line
of credit of $21.2 million at December 31, 1996.
 
    Under certain conditions, the line of credit will convert to a secured
credit facility. Under the terms of the term loan and revolving line of credit
agreements, the Company is subject to various financial and other covenants. The
Company was in compliance with or had appropriate waivers for such covenants at
December 31, 1996. In addition, the Senior Notes and line of credit restrict the
payment of cash dividends.
 
5.  LEASE COMMITMENTS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
    The Company leases its office and several retail store facilities under
various operating leases which expire at varying dates through June 2006.
Generally, the agreements contain provisions which require the Company to pay
for normal repairs and maintenance, property taxes and insurance.
 
                                      F-12
<PAGE>
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
 
5.  LEASE COMMITMENTS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS (CONTINUED)
    Through October 17, 1995, the Company leased from its Profit Sharing Plan
two properties at a total monthly rental of $19,988. On October 17, 1995, the
leases with the Company were cancelled for fees totaling $227,000. One of the
properties was then purchased by the Company for $500,000, a price determined by
an independent fiduciary. The other property was re-leased by the Company
through 2005 from a related party at a monthly rental of $8,250. The Company
leases three additional properties through 2006 from a related party at monthly
rentals aggregating $26,200. The total rent expense recorded for related party
leases totaled $238,000, $292,000 and $364,000 in 1994, 1995 and 1996,
respectively.
 
    The total minimum rental commitment at December 31, 1996, under operating
leases, is as follows:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31                                                    AMOUNT
- --------------------------------------------------------------------  --------------
<S>                                                                   <C>
                                                                      (IN THOUSANDS)
1997................................................................    $    3,281
1998................................................................         3,238
1999................................................................         3,161
2000................................................................         3,147
2001................................................................         3,110
Thereafter..........................................................        13,950
                                                                      --------------
                                                                        $   29,887
                                                                      --------------
                                                                      --------------
</TABLE>
 
    The total rental expense included in the statements of operations for the
years ended December 31, 1994, 1995 and 1996 is $1,804,000, $1,985,000 and
$2,856,000, respectively.
 
6.  PROFIT SHARING PLAN
    The Company has a Profit Sharing Plan (the "Plan") which covers
substantially all employees who meet a minimum employment requirement. The
Company's board of directors can elect to contribute up to 15% of the
participants' compensation for any plan year, subject to a maximum of $30,000
per participant. During the Plan years ended October 31, 1994, 1995 and 1996,
the Company declared total contributions of $1,003,000, $1,272,000 and $654,000,
respectively, which is included in accrued liabilities. In addition, $195,000 of
assets, included in the Plan, which had been forfeited by terminated employees,
was reallocated to participants.
 
7.  STOCK OPTION PLANS
 
    1996 PERFORMANCE STOCK OPTION PLAN
 
    In June 1996, the Company adopted the 1996 Performance Stock Option Plan (as
amended, the "1996 Plan"), which provides for the granting of options to
purchase units (each unit consisting of 2.582 shares of Common Stock and 99/100
of a share of Junior Preferred Stock (a "Unit")) at an aggregate weighted
average exercise price of $100.00 per unit. As of December 31, 1996, the Company
had issued options to purchase 60,399 Units under the 1996 Plan. Upon conversion
of the Junior Preferred Stock, an option to purchase a Unit will become an
option to purchase 9.182 shares of Common Stock at an exercise price of $10.89
per share. The options vest ratably over three years. The 1996 Plan will be
frozen upon the consummation of the Offering.
 
    MANAGEMENT STOCK OPTION AGREEMENTS
 
    In June 1996, the Company granted options to certain officers to purchase
86,688 Units at an exercise price of $100 per Unit. The options vest in three
equal installments commencing 2003, 2004,
 
                                      F-13
<PAGE>
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
 
7.  STOCK OPTION PLANS (CONTINUED)
and 2005 and will terminate upon the certain events. The agreements contain
provisions to accelerate the vesting period, including the achievement of a
certain targeted "Calculated Corporate Value", as defined.
 
    1997 EQUITY PARTICIPATION PLAN
 
    In January of 1997, the Company and its stockholders adopted the 1997 Equity
Participation Plan (the "1997 Plan"). Under the 1997 Plan, the Company may grant
options to purchase up to 875,000 shares of Common Stock; provided, however,
that grants to any one individual may not exceed 150,000 shares of Common Stock
in any calendar year. As of December 31, 1996, no options had been granted under
the 1997 Plan.
 
    OTHER OPTION ARRANGEMENTS
 
    In December 1996, the Company's institutional investors granted options to
certain officers and key managers of the Company to purchase 30,188.68 Units
held by such investors at a purchase price of $39.75 per Unit. The Company is
not a party to this agreement and has not, and will not, incur any obligation in
connection with such options. Under generally accepted accounting principles,
the Company recorded a charge to the statement of operations in the amount of
$1.9 million, with a corresponding increase to additional paid in capital.
 
    The Company applies APB Opinion No. 25 in accounting for its plans. Had the
Company determined compensation cost based upon the fair value at the grant date
for its stock options under SFAS No. 123 using the Black Scholes option pricing
model with the following weighted average assumptions: 1996 - expected dividend
yield 0%, risk free interest rate of 7.00%, and expected life of 10 years. The
Company's net loss for the year ended December 31, 1996 would have been
increased from $72.4 million to a pro forma loss of $73.2 million.
 
    Pro forma net loss reflects only options granted in 1996. Therefore, the
full impact of calculating compensation cost for stock options under SFAS No.
123 is not reflected in the pro forma net income amounts presented above because
compensation cost is reflected over the options' vesting period of 3 to 10 years
and compensation cost for options granted prior to January 1, 1996 is not
considered.
 
    At December 31, 1996, all the outstanding stock options had an exercise
price of $100 per Unit and a remaining contractual life of 10 years.
 
    At December 31, 1996, no options were exercisable.
 
    TERMINATED PLAN
 
    Prior to the Recapitalization, the Company had granted to certain members of
management options to purchase 81,407,400 of common stock of the Company at
prices ranging from $.0005 to $0.11 per share. Upon consummation of the
Recapitalization, these options were exchanged for cash and securities with
management and canceled. For financial statement purposes, the Company recorded
a charge of approximately $69.9 million (net of the $7.9 million previously
accrued as deferred compensation) in the statement of operations.
 
                                      F-14
<PAGE>
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
 
8.  INCOME TAXES
    The pro forma unaudited income tax adjustments presented represent income
taxes which would have been reported had the Company been subject to Federal and
State income taxes as a C Corporation. The historical pro forma provisions for
income taxes were as follows:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                       1994       1995       1996
                                                                                     ---------  ---------  ---------
<S>                                                                                  <C>        <C>        <C>
                                                                                             (IN THOUSANDS)
 
Historical income taxes............................................................  $     326  $     345        139
                                                                                     ---------  ---------  ---------
 
Pro forma adjustments (unaudited):
 
  Federal..........................................................................      3,645      5,001     --
  California.......................................................................        507        798       (139)
                                                                                     ---------  ---------  ---------
 
    Total pro forma adjustments....................................................      4,152      5,799       (139)
                                                                                     ---------  ---------  ---------
 
    Total pro forma provision for income taxes.....................................  $   4,478  $   6,144  $  --
                                                                                     ---------  ---------  ---------
                                                                                     ---------  ---------  ---------
</TABLE>
 
    Pro forma income tax expense differs from the statutory tax rate of 35% as
applied to earnings before income taxes, as follows:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                     1994       1995        1996
                                                                                   ---------  ---------  ----------
<S>                                                                                <C>        <C>        <C>
                                                                                            (IN THOUSANDS)
Expected income tax expense (benefit)............................................  $   3,204  $   3,921     (25,295)
State income taxes, net of federal benefit.......................................        541        743      (3,650)
Non deductible deferred compensation.............................................        441      1,080      --
Non deductible transaction costs.................................................     --         --           3,281
Benefit not recorded due to net carryforward position............................     --         --          25,379
Other............................................................................        292        400         285
                                                                                   ---------  ---------  ----------
                                                                                   $   4,478  $   6,144      --
                                                                                   ---------  ---------  ----------
                                                                                   ---------  ---------  ----------
</TABLE>
 
                                      F-15
<PAGE>
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
 
8.  INCOME TAXES (CONTINUED)
    The tax effects of temporary differences that give rise to significant
portions of deferred tax assets and liabilities are presented below:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                 1996
                                                                                               ---------
<S>                                                                                            <C>
                                                                                          (IN THOUSANDS)
 
Deferred tax assets:
 
  Federal net operating loss carryforward....................................................  $  22,483
  State net operating loss carryforwards.....................................................      1,622
  Deferred compensation......................................................................        772
  Accrued liabilities........................................................................        648
  Inventory reserves.........................................................................        336
                                                                                               ---------
 
Total gross deferred tax assets..............................................................     25,861
                                                                                               ---------
 
Deferred tax liabilites
 
  Depreciation...............................................................................        140
  Other......................................................................................        342
                                                                                               ---------
Total gross deferred liabilities.............................................................        482
                                                                                               ---------
Deferred tax assets net of deferred tax liabilities..........................................     25,379
                                                                                               ---------
 
Less valuation allowance.....................................................................     25,379
                                                                                               ---------
 
Net deferred tax assets......................................................................     --
                                                                                               ---------
                                                                                               ---------
</TABLE>
 
In assessing the realizability of deferred tax assets, management considers
whether it is more likely than not that some portion or all of the deferred tax
assets will not be realized. The ultimate realization of deferred tax assets is
dependent upon the generation of future taxable income during the periods in
which those temporary differences become deductible. Management considers
scheduled reversal of deferred tax liabilities, projected future taxable income
and tax planning strategies in making this assessment. In order to fully realize
the deferred tax asset, the Company will need to generate future taxable income
of approximately $64 million prior to the expiration of the net operating loss
carry forwards in 2011.
 
    In connection with the Recapitalization, the Company entered into a tax
indemnification agreement with its former sole stockholder pursuant to which the
Company has agreed to indemnify such stockholder for any loss, damage, or
liability and all expenses incurred, suffered, sustained or required to be paid
by such stockholder in the event that certain specified aspects of the
Recapitalization are not treated for tax purposes in the manner contemplated by
the Recapitalization and related transactions.
 
                                      F-16
<PAGE>
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
 
9.  OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION
    Accrued Expenses
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                              DECEMBER 31,
                                                                                      ----------------------------
                                                                                          1995           1996
                                                                                      -------------  -------------
                                                                                             (IN THOUSANDS)
<S>                                                                                   <C>            <C>
Wages, salaries and benefits........................................................  $       2,218  $       2,161
Sales tax payable...................................................................          1,666          2,011
Profit sharing accrual..............................................................          1,272            786
Other...............................................................................          1,905          2,933
                                                                                      -------------  -------------
                                                                                      $       7,061  $       7,891
                                                                                      -------------  -------------
                                                                                      -------------  -------------
</TABLE>
 
10. PREFERRED STOCK
 
    REDEEMABLE SENIOR PREFERRED STOCK AND WARRANTS
 
    In connection with the recapitalization, the Company issued 800,000 shares
of Senior Preferred Stock with an initial aggregate liquidation value of $20.0
million.
 
    Dividends on the Senior Preferred Stock accrue at a rate of 14%. Such
dividends are payable quarterly on each of March 15, June 15, September 15 and
December 15, beginning June 15, 1996. On or prior to June 15, 2002, dividends
shall not be payable in cash to holders, but shall, whether or not declared,
accrete to the liquidation value of the Senior Preferred Stock compounded on
each dividend payment date. Under certain circumstances the holders can elect to
receive additional shares of the Senior Preferred stock in lieu of accreting to
the liquidation value.
 
    OPTIONAL REDEMPTION
 
    The Company may, at its option, to the extent that funds are legally
available for such payment, redeem, prior to June 15, 1999, in whole or in part,
shares of Senior Preferred Stock at a redemption price equal to 103% of the
liquidation value thereof if such redemption shall occur before June 15, 1997,
or 106% of the liquidation value thereof if the redemption occurs on or after
June 15, 1997 to and including June 15,1999, without interest, PROVIDED,
HOWEVER, that an initial public offering shall have occurred and the aggregate
redemption price of the Senior Preferred Stock does not exceed the net proceeds
received by the Company in the initial public offering. In January 1997, the
Company and holders of all outstanding shares of Senior Preferred Stock entered
into an agreement pursuant to which the Company will redeem all outstanding
shares of Senior Preferred Stock at 103% of the liquidation value thereof
simultaneously with the consummation of the Offering.
 
    The Senior Preferred Stock is redeemable, on or after June 15,1999, at the
option of the company at a price equal to a percentage of the liquidation value
as follows:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                        PERCENTAGE OF
      YEAR BEGINNING JUNE 15,         LIQUIDATION VALUE
            -----------              -------------------
<S>                                  <C>
 1999..............................             110%
 2000..............................             108
 2001..............................             106
 2002..............................             104
 2003..............................             102
 2004 and thereafter...............             100
</TABLE>
 
    The Senior Preferred stock is mandatorially redeemable on June 15, 2008 at a
redemption price equal to the aggregate liquidation value plus all accrued and
unpaid cash dividends.
 
                                      F-17
<PAGE>
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
 
10. PREFERRED STOCK (CONTINUED)
    Holders of the Senior Preferred Stock have no voting rights with respect to
any matters except as provided by law or as set forth in the Senior Preferred
Stock Certificate of Determination. Such Certificate of Determination provides
that in the event that (i) dividends on the Senior Preferred Stock are in
arrears and unpaid for six consecutive quarterly periods after June 15, 2002;
(ii) for any reason (including the reason that funds are not legally available
for redemption), the Company shall have failed to discharge any mandatory
redemption obligation; or (iii) the Company shall have failed to provide a
notice within the time period required by a redemption pursuant to a Change of
Control (each of the foregoing, a "Voting Trigger"), the Board will be increased
by two directors and the holders of the Senior Preferred Stock, together with
the holders of shares of every other series of preferred stock of the Company
with like rights to vote for the election of two additional directors, voting as
a class, will be entitled to elect two directors to the expanded Board of
Directors. Such voting rights will continue until the Company shall have
fulfilled its obligations that gave rise to a Voting Trigger.
 
    The Senior Preferred Stock with respect to dividend rights and rights on
liquidation, winding up and dissolution, ranks Senior to Junior Preferred Stock
and the Common Stock.
 
    In connection with the issuance of the Senior Preferred Stock the holders
received detachable warrants (in addition to the Senior Preferred Stock) for the
aggregate $20.0 million paid. The warrants are exchangeable for 73,684 Units (or
190,252 shares of Common Stock and 72,947 shares of Junior Preferred Stock).
 
    The market value of the warrants at issuance was deemed to be $6.5 million
with the Senior Preferred Stock valued at $13.5 million. The warrants are
exercisable at a price of $0.01 per Unit. The Senior Preferred stock will
accrete to its redemption value ($20.0 million) using the effective interest
method through its mandatory redemption date of June 15, 2008. The carrying
amount of the Senior Preferred Stock will be adjusted periodically for both the
above noted accretion as well as by amounts representing dividends not currently
declared or paid, but which will be payable under the mandatory redemption
features.
 
    JUNIOR PREFERRED STOCK
 
    The Company has authorized the issuance of up to 1,500,000 shares of 8%
Junior Preferred Stock, $.01 par value ("Junior Preferred Stock").
 
    In connection with the Recapitalization 1,386,000 shares of Junior Preferred
Stock were issued. Each outstanding share of Junior Preferred Stock has a
liquidation preference of $100.00. Dividends accrue at a rate of 8% per annum on
the sum of the liquidation preference plus accumulated but unpaid dividends
thereon.
 
    The Junior Preferred Stock ranks junior to the Senior Preferred Stock and
senior to the Common Stock, with respect to dividend rights and rights on
liquidation.
 
    The Company may be required to mandatorily redeem all or a portion of the
Junior Preferred Stock under certain conditions. Specifically, the company would
be required to redeem within 45 days of an initial public offering (IPO)
resulting in a market capitalization of more than $500 million, at a redemption
price per share equal to 100% of the liquidation value plus all accrued and
unpaid cash dividends as follows:
 
           (i)
           If the IPO results in a market capitalization of the Company of less
           than $750 million but more than or equal to $500 million, the Company
    shall redeem up to 25% of the outstanding shares of Junior Preferred Stock
    held by each holder of such shares who requests redemption;
 
                                      F-18
<PAGE>
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                   NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)
 
10. PREFERRED STOCK (CONTINUED)
          (ii)
           If the IPO results in a market capitalization of the Company of less
           than $1 billion but more than or equal to $750 million, the Company
    shall redeem up to 50% of the outstanding shares of Junior Preferred Stock
    held by each holder of such shares who request redemption; and
 
         (iii)
           If the IPO results in a market capitalization of the Company of more
           than or equal to $1 billion, the Company shall redeem up to 100% of
    the outstanding shares of Junior Preferred Stock held by each holder of such
    shares who requests redemption.
 
    In the event the Company intends to consummate an IPO, the holders of sixty
percent (60%) of the outstanding Junior Preferred Stock may require the Company
to convert on a PRO RATA basis all or any portion of the outstanding Junior
Preferred Stock into shares of Common Stock, such conversion to occur
automatically upon the closing of an IPO. In January 1997, the Company and
holders of the requisite number of shares of Junior Preferred Stock entered into
an agreement pursuant to which each outstanding share of Junior Preferred Stock
will be converted into 6.667 shares of Common Stock upon consummation of this
Offering.
 
    Accumulated but unpaid dividends on the Junior and Senior Preferred Stock
aggregated $7,951,000 as of December 31, 1996.
 
11. SALE-LEASEBACK TRANSACTIONS
    On February 15, 1996, the Company entered into two sale-leaseback
transactions with a related party-in-interest. The combined sale amount for the
two properties was $1,753,000 resulting in a $3,587 net gain for the Company.
The two properties are leased back from the related party-in-interest through
2006 for a combined monthly rental of $16,258.
 
12. PRO FORMA DATA (UNAUDITED)
    Prior to June 5, 1996, the Company elected to be treated as an S Corporation
for federal and state income tax purposes. Pro forma information has been
provided to reflect the estimated statutory provision for income taxes assuming
the Company has been taxed as a C corporation. See note 7.
 
    Pro forma net earnings per share has been computed by dividing pro forma net
earnings (loss) by the weighted average number of shares outstanding during the
period. The pro forma net earnings (loss) per share gives effect to: (i) the
issuance of Common Stock sold in the Offering, the issuance of Common Stock upon
the conversion of all outstanding shares of Junior Preferred Stock in connection
with the Offering, the issuance of Common Stock upon the exercise of outstanding
warrants and common stock equivalents and (ii) the redemption of Common Stock
from certain members of the Company's management upon consummation of the
Offering.
 
                                      F-19
<PAGE>
                                  UNDERWRITING
 
    Subject  to the terms and conditions  contained in an underwriting agreement
(the "U.S. Underwriting Agreement"), the Company  has agreed to sell to each  of
the  U.S. underwriters named  below (the "U.S. Underwriters"),  and each of such
U.S. Underwriters, for whom Goldman, Sachs  & Co., Donaldson, Lufkin &  Jenrette
Securities  Corporation, Montgomery  Securities, Dain  Bosworth Incorporated and
Chase Securities Inc.  are acting  as representatives, has  severally agreed  to
purchase  from the Company the  respective number of shares  of Common Stock set
forth opposite its name below:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                  NUMBER OF
                                                                                  SHARES OF
                                                                                   COMMON
                                  UNDERWRITER                                       STOCK
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------  ---------
<S>                                                                               <C>
Goldman, Sachs & Co.............................................................
Donaldson, Lufkin & Jenrette Securities Corporation.............................
Montgomery Securities...........................................................
Dain Bosworth Incorporated......................................................
Chase Securities Inc. ..........................................................
 
                                                                                  ---------
    Total.......................................................................  5,400,000
                                                                                  ---------
                                                                                  ---------
</TABLE>
 
    Under the terms and conditions of the U.S. Underwriting Agreement, the  U.S.
Underwriters are committed to take and pay for all of the shares offered hereby,
if any are taken.
 
    The  U.S. Underwriters propose to  offer the shares of  Common Stock in part
directly to the public  at the initial  public offering price  set forth on  the
cover  page of this Prospectus and in part to certain securities dealers at such
price less a concession of $       per  share. The U.S. Underwriters may  allow,
and  such dealers may reallow, a concession not in excess of $      per share to
certain brokers and dealers. After the  shares of Common Stock are released  for
sale  to the public, the offering price and other selling terms may from time to
time be varied by the representatives.
 
    The Company has entered into  an underwriting agreement (the  "International
Underwriting  Agreement") with  the underwriters  of the  international offering
(the "International Underwriters") providing for  the concurrent offer and  sale
of  1,350,000 shares  of Common Stock  in an international  offering outside the
United States.  The  offering price  and  aggregate underwriting  discounts  and
commissions  per share for the  two offerings are identical.  The closing of the
offering made  hereby  is  a  condition to  the  closing  of  the  international
offering,  and vice versa. The representatives of the International Underwriters
are  Goldman  Sachs  International,  Donaldson,  Lufkin  &  Jenrette  Securities
Corporation,   Montgomery  Securities,  Dain  Bosworth  Incorporated  and  Chase
Securities Inc.
 
    Pursuant to an  Agreement between  the U.S.  and International  Underwriting
Syndicates  (the "Agreement Between") relating to the two offerings, each of the
U.S. Underwriters named herein has agreed that, as a part of the distribution of
the shares offered hereby and subject to certain exceptions, it will offer, sell
or deliver  the shares  of Common  Stock, directly  or indirectly,  only in  the
United  States of America  (including the States and  the District of Columbia),
its territories, its  possessions and  other areas subject  to its  jurisdiction
(the  "United States") and to U.S. persons,  which term shall mean, for purposes
of this paragraph: (a) any individual who is a resident of the United States  or
(b)  any corporation, partnership or other entity organized or under the laws of
the United States  or any political  subdivision thereof and  whose office  most
directly involved with the purchase is located in the United States. Each of the
International Underwriters has agreed pursuant to the Agreement Between that, as
a  part of the distribution of the shares offered as a part of the international
offering, and  subject to  certain  exceptions, it  will  (i) not,  directly  or
indirectly,   offer,  sell  or  deliver  shares  of  Common  Stock  (a)  in  the
 
                                      U-1
<PAGE>
United States  or to  any U.S.  persons or  (b) to  any person  who it  believes
intends  to reoffer, resell or deliver the shares in the United States or to any
U.S. persons, and (ii) cause any dealer to  whom it may sell such shares at  any
concession to agree to observe a similar restriction.
 
    Pursuant  to  the Agreement  Between,  sales may  be  made between  the U.S.
Underwriters and  the International  Underwriters of  such number  of shares  of
Common Stock as may be mutually agreed. The price of any shares so sold shall be
the  initial public offering price, less an  amount not greater than the selling
concession.
 
    The Company has granted the U.S.  Underwriters an option exercisable for  30
days after the date of this Prospectus to purchase up to an aggregate of 810,000
additional  shares of Common  Stock solely to cover  over-allotments, if any. If
the  U.S.   Underwriters  exercise   their  over-allotment   option,  the   U.S.
Underwriters  have severally agreed, subject  to certain conditions, to purchase
approximately the  same percentage  thereof  that the  number  of shares  to  be
purchased  by  each of  them,  as shown  in the  foregoing  table, bears  to the
5,400,000  shares  of  Common  Stock  offered.  The  Company  has  granted   the
International  Underwriters a similar  option to purchase up  to an aggregate of
202,500 additional shares of Common Stock.
 
    Each of the Company, its directors, officers and certain stockholders of the
Company, including  Chase Ventures,  Wells Fargo,  Weston Presidio  and the  DLJ
Investors,  has agreed that, during  the period beginning from  the date of this
Prospectus and continuing to and including the  date 180 days after the date  of
this  Prospectus, it will not offer, sell, contract to sell or otherwise dispose
of any securities of the Company  (other than pursuant to employee stock  option
plans  existing, or on the conversion or exchange of convertible or exchangeable
securities outstanding, on the date of this Prospectus) which are  substantially
similar  to  the  shares  of  Common Stock  or  which  are  convertible  into or
exchangeable for securities  which are  substantially similar to  the shares  of
Common  Stock without the prior written consent  of Goldman, Sachs & Co., except
for the shares of  Common Stock offered in  connection with the concurrent  U.S.
and international offerings.
 
    Under Rule 2720 of the National Association of Securities Dealers, Inc. (the
"NASD"), affiliates of DLJ and Chase Securities may be deemed to have a conflict
of   interest  with   the  Company.   See  "The   Recapitalization  and  Related
Transactions," "Certain Transactions -- Transactions with Affiliates of DLJ  and
Chase  Securities." This  Offering is  being conducted  in accordance  with Rule
2720, which provides that, among other things, when an NASD member  participates
in  the  underwriting of  a  company's equity  securities  where there  exists a
conflict of interest with such company, the initial public offering price can be
no higher than that recommended by a "qualified independent underwriter" meeting
certain standards. In accordance with this requirement, Goldman, Sachs & Co. has
served in  such  role  and  has  recommended a  price  in  compliance  with  the
requirements  of Rule  2720. Goldman, Sachs  & Co. will  receive compensation of
$10,000 for serving  in such role.  In connection with  this Offering,  Goldman,
Sachs & Co., in its role as qualified independent underwriter, has performed due
diligence  investigations and  reviewed and  participated in  the preparation of
this Prospectus and the Registration Statement of which this Prospectus forms  a
part.  In  addition,  the  U.S.  Underwriters  may  not  confirm  sales  to  any
discretionary account  without  the  prior  specific  written  approval  of  the
customer.
 
    Prior  to this Offering, there has been no public market for the shares. The
initial public  offering price  will be  negotiated among  the Company  and  the
representatives  of the  U.S. Underwriters  and the  International Underwriters.
Among the factors to  be considered in determining  the initial public  offering
price  of the Common Stock, in addition to prevailing market conditions, will be
the Company's historical  performance, estimates of  the business potential  and
earnings prospects of the Company, an assessment of the Company's management and
the  consideration  of the  above  factors in  relation  to market  valuation of
companies in related businesses.
 
   
    During and after the Offering, the Underwriters may purchase and sell Common
Stock in  the open  market.  These transactions  may include  overallotment  and
stabilizing  transactions, "passive" market making  (see below) and purchases to
cover syndicate short  positions created  in connection with  the Offering.  The
Underwriters  also may impose a penalty bid, whereby selling concessions allowed
to
    
 
                                      U-2
<PAGE>
   
syndicate members or other broker-dealers in respect of the Common Stock sold in
the Offering  for  their account  may  be reclaimed  by  the syndicate  if  such
securities   are  repurchased  by  the  syndicate  in  stabilizing  or  covering
transactions. These activities may stabilize,  maintain or otherwise affect  the
market  price of the Common Stock which may  be higher than the price that might
otherwise prevail in the open market. These transactions may be effected on  the
NASDAQ  National Market or otherwise, and these activities, if commenced, may be
discontinued at any time.
    
 
   
    As permitted by Rule 103 under the Exchange Act, Underwriters or prospective
Underwriters that  are market  makers ("passive  market makers")  in the  Common
Stock  may make  bids for or  purchases of  Common Stock in  the NASDAQ National
Market until such time, if any, when  a stabilizing bid for such securities  has
been  made. Rule 103  generally provides that  (1) a passive  market maker's net
daily purchases of  the Common Stock  may not  exceed 30% of  its average  daily
trading  volume in such securities for  two full consecutive calendar months (or
any 60 consecutive  days ending within  the 10 days)  immediately preceding  the
filing date of the registration statement of which this Prospectus forms a part,
(2)  a passive market maker may not  effect transactions or display bids for the
Common Stock at a price that exceeds the highest independent bid for the  Common
Stock  by persons who are not passive market makers and (3) bids made by passive
market makers must be identified as such.
    
 
    The Common Stock  has been  approved for  quotation on  the Nasdaq  National
Market under the symbol "GTRC."
 
    Each  of DLJ and Chase  Securities has in the past  provided, and may in the
future provide, investment banking services for the Company and its  affiliates.
An affiliate of Chase Securities has in the past provided, and may in the future
provide,  general financing and  banking services to  the Company. Affiliates of
DLJ own  all  of  the outstanding  shares  of  Senior Preferred  Stock  with  an
aggregate  liquidation  value of  approximately $20.0  million and  will receive
approximately $22.9 million of the net  proceeds of this Offering in  connection
with  the redemption of  such shares. See  "Use of Proceeds."  Affiliates of DLJ
will also, immediately after this Offering, continue to own all of the  Warrants
to purchase 676,566 shares of Common Stock. An affiliate of Chase Securites will
beneficially  own, immediately after  this Offering, 4,381,265  shares of Common
Stock (net  of certain  options  granted to  certain  members of  the  Company's
management).  See "Certain Transactions  -- Transactions with  Affiliates of DLJ
and Chase Securities" and  "-- Options Granted by  Certain Investors to  Certain
Members of Management."
 
    The  Company has agreed  to indemnify the  several U.S. Underwriters against
certain liabilities, including  liabilities under the  Securities Act. The  U.S.
Underwriters have agreed to reimburse the Company for certain expenses.
 
                                      U-3
<PAGE>
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
    NO  PERSON  HAS BEEN  AUTHORIZED  TO GIVE  ANY  INFORMATION OR  TO  MAKE ANY
REPRESENTATION OTHER THAN THOSE CONTAINED IN  THIS PROSPECTUS, AND, IF GIVEN  OR
MADE, SUCH INFORMATION OR REPRESENTATIONS MUST NOT BE RELIED UPON AS HAVING BEEN
AUTHORIZED.  THIS  PROSPECTUS  DOES  NOT  CONSTITUTE  AN  OFFER  TO  SELL  OR  A
SOLICITATION OF AN OFFER TO BUY ANY SECURITY OTHER THAN THE SECURITIES TO  WHICH
IT RELATES NOR DOES IT CONSTITUTE AN OFFER TO SELL OR A SOLICITATION OF AN OFFER
TO  BUY  ANY OF  SUCH SECURITIES  IN ANY  CIRCUMSTANCES IN  WHICH SUCH  OFFER OR
SOLICITATION IS UNLAWFUL. NEITHER THE DELIVERY  OF THIS PROSPECTUS NOR ANY  SALE
MADE HEREUNDER SHALL, UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES, CREATE ANY IMPLICATION THAT THERE
HAS  BEEN NO CHANGE IN THE AFFAIRS OF  THE COMPANY SINCE THE DATE HEREOF OR THAT
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED  HEREIN IS CORRECT  AS OF ANY  TIME SUBSEQUENT TO  ITS
DATE.
 
                                 --------------
 
                               TABLE OF CONTENTS
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                           PAGE
<S>                                                                       <C>
Summary.................................................................      3
Risk Factors............................................................      9
The Recapitalization and Related Transactions...........................     14
Use of Proceeds.........................................................     15
Dividend Policy.........................................................     15
Dilution................................................................     16
Capitalization..........................................................     17
Selected Historical Financial Data......................................     18
Unaudited Pro Forma Condensed Financial Data............................     20
Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results
  of Operations.........................................................     24
Business................................................................     29
Management..............................................................     38
Principal Stockholders..................................................     51
Certain Transactions....................................................     53
Description of Certain Indebtedness.....................................     57
Shares Eligible for Future Sale.........................................     59
Description of Capital Stock............................................     60
Certain United States Federal Tax Considerations for Non-United States
  Holders...............................................................     64
Legal Matters...........................................................     66
Experts.................................................................     66
Additional Information..................................................     66
Index to Financial Statements...........................................    F-1
Underwriting............................................................    U-1
</TABLE>
    
 
                                6,750,000 SHARES
 
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
 
                                  COMMON STOCK
                           (PAR VALUE $.01 PER SHARE)
 
                            ------------------------
 
                                      [LOGO]
 
                            ------------------------
 
                              GOLDMAN, SACHS & CO.
 
                          DONALDSON, LUFKIN & JENRETTE
      SECURITIES CORPORATION
 
                             MONTGOMERY SECURITIES
 
                                 DAIN BOSWORTH
                                  Incorporated
 
                             CHASE SECURITIES INC.
 
                      REPRESENTATIVES OF THE UNDERWRITERS
 
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<PAGE>
                                  UNDERWRITING
 
    Subject  to the terms and conditions  contained in an underwriting agreement
(the "U.S. Underwriting Agreement"), the Company  has agreed to sell to each  of
the  U.S. underwriters named  below (the "U.S. Underwriters"),  and each of such
U.S. Underwriters, for whom Goldman, Sachs  & Co., Donaldson, Lufkin &  Jenrette
Securities  Corporation, Montgomery  Securities, Dain  Bosworth Incorporated and
Chase Securities Inc.  are acting  as representatives, has  severally agreed  to
purchase  from the Company the  respective number of shares  of Common Stock set
forth opposite its name below:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                  NUMBER OF
                                                                                  SHARES OF
                                                                                   COMMON
                                  UNDERWRITER                                       STOCK
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------  ---------
<S>                                                                               <C>
Goldman, Sachs & Co.............................................................
Donaldson, Lufkin & Jenrette Securities Corporation.............................
Montgomery Securities...........................................................
Dain Bosworth Incorporated......................................................
Chase Securities Inc. ..........................................................
 
                                                                                  ---------
    Total.......................................................................  5,400,000
                                                                                  ---------
                                                                                  ---------
</TABLE>
 
    Under the terms and conditions of the U.S. Underwriting Agreement, the  U.S.
Underwriters are committed to take and pay for all of the shares offered hereby,
if any are taken.
 
    The  U.S. Underwriters propose to  offer the shares of  Common Stock in part
directly to the public  at the initial  public offering price  set forth on  the
cover  page of this Prospectus and in part to certain securities dealers at such
price less a concession of $       per  share. The U.S. Underwriters may  allow,
and  such dealers may reallow, a concession not in excess of $      per share to
certain brokers and dealers. After the  shares of Common Stock are released  for
sale  to the public, the offering price and other selling terms may from time to
time be varied by the representatives.
 
    The Company has entered into  an underwriting agreement (the  "International
Underwriting  Agreement") with  the underwriters  of the  international offering
(the "International Underwriters") providing for  the concurrent offer and  sale
of  1,350,000 shares  of Common Stock  in an international  offering outside the
United States.  The  offering price  and  aggregate underwriting  discounts  and
commissions  per share for the  two offerings are identical.  The closing of the
offering made  hereby  is  a  condition to  the  closing  of  the  international
offering,  and vice versa. The representatives of the International Underwriters
are  Goldman  Sachs  International,  Donaldson,  Lufkin  &  Jenrette  Securities
Corporation,   Montgomery  Securities,  Dain  Bosworth  Incorporated  and  Chase
Securities Inc.
 
    Pursuant to an  Agreement between  the U.S.  and International  Underwriting
Syndicates  (the "Agreement Between") relating to the two offerings, each of the
U.S. Underwriters named herein has agreed that, as a part of the distribution of
the shares offered hereby and subject to certain exceptions, it will offer, sell
or deliver  the shares  of Common  Stock, directly  or indirectly,  only in  the
United  States of America  (including the States and  the District of Columbia),
its territories, its  possessions and  other areas subject  to its  jurisdiction
(the  "United States") and to U.S. persons,  which term shall mean, for purposes
of this paragraph: (a) any individual who is a resident of the United States  or
(b)  any corporation, partnership or other entity organized or under the laws of
the United States  or any political  subdivision thereof and  whose office  most
directly involved with the purchase is located in the United States. Each of the
International Underwriters has agreed pursuant to the Agreement Between that, as
a  part of the distribution of the shares offered as a part of the international
offering, and  subject to  certain  exceptions, it  will  (i) not,  directly  or
indirectly,   offer,  sell  or  deliver  shares  of  Common  Stock  (a)  in  the
 
                                      U-1
<PAGE>
United States  or to  any U.S.  persons or  (b) to  any person  who it  believes
intends  to reoffer, resell or deliver the shares in the United States or to any
U.S. persons, and (ii) cause any dealer to  whom it may sell such shares at  any
concession to agree to observe a similar restriction.
 
    Pursuant  to  the Agreement  Between,  sales may  be  made between  the U.S.
Underwriters and  the International  Underwriters of  such number  of shares  of
Common Stock as may be mutually agreed. The price of any shares so sold shall be
the  initial public offering price, less an  amount not greater than the selling
concession.
 
    The Company has granted the U.S.  Underwriters an option exercisable for  30
days after the date of this Prospectus to purchase up to an aggregate of 810,000
additional  shares of Common  Stock solely to cover  over-allotments, if any. If
the  U.S.   Underwriters  exercise   their  over-allotment   option,  the   U.S.
Underwriters  have severally agreed, subject  to certain conditions, to purchase
approximately the  same percentage  thereof  that the  number  of shares  to  be
purchased  by  each of  them,  as shown  in the  foregoing  table, bears  to the
5,400,000  shares  of  Common  Stock  offered.  The  Company  has  granted   the
International  Underwriters a similar  option to purchase up  to an aggregate of
202,500 additional shares of Common Stock.
 
    Each of the Company, its directors, officers and certain stockholders of the
Company, including  Chase Ventures,  Wells Fargo,  Weston Presidio  and the  DLJ
Investors,  has agreed that, during  the period beginning from  the date of this
Prospectus and continuing to and including the  date 180 days after the date  of
this  Prospectus, it will not offer, sell, contract to sell or otherwise dispose
of any securities of the Company  (other than pursuant to employee stock  option
plans  existing, or on the conversion or exchange of convertible or exchangeable
securities outstanding, on the date of this Prospectus) which are  substantially
similar  to  the  shares  of  Common Stock  or  which  are  convertible  into or
exchangeable for securities  which are  substantially similar to  the shares  of
Common  Stock without the prior written consent  of Goldman, Sachs & Co., except
for the shares of  Common Stock offered in  connection with the concurrent  U.S.
and international offerings.
 
    Under Rule 2720 of the National Association of Securities Dealers, Inc. (the
"NASD"), affiliates of DLJ and Chase Securities may be deemed to have a conflict
of   interest  with   the  Company.   See  "The   Recapitalization  and  Related
Transactions," "Certain Transactions -- Transactions with Affiliates of DLJ  and
Chase  Securities." This  Offering is  being conducted  in accordance  with Rule
2720, which provides that, among other things, when an NASD member  participates
in  the  underwriting of  a  company's equity  securities  where there  exists a
conflict of interest with such company, the initial public offering price can be
no higher than that recommended by a "qualified independent underwriter" meeting
certain standards. In accordance with this requirement, Goldman, Sachs & Co. has
served in  such  role  and  has  recommended a  price  in  compliance  with  the
requirements  of Rule  2720. Goldman, Sachs  & Co. will  receive compensation of
$10,000 for serving  in such role.  In connection with  this Offering,  Goldman,
Sachs & Co., in its role as qualified independent underwriter, has performed due
diligence  investigations and  reviewed and  participated in  the preparation of
this Prospectus and the Registration Statement of which this Prospectus forms  a
part.  In  addition,  the  U.S.  Underwriters  may  not  confirm  sales  to  any
discretionary account  without  the  prior  specific  written  approval  of  the
customer.
 
    Prior  to this Offering, there has been no public market for the shares. The
initial public  offering price  will be  negotiated among  the Company  and  the
representatives  of the  U.S. Underwriters  and the  International Underwriters.
Among the factors to  be considered in determining  the initial public  offering
price  of the Common Stock, in addition to prevailing market conditions, will be
the Company's historical  performance, estimates of  the business potential  and
earnings prospects of the Company, an assessment of the Company's management and
the  consideration  of the  above  factors in  relation  to market  valuation of
companies in related businesses.
 
   
    During and after the Offering, the Underwriters may purchase and sell Common
Stock in  the open  market.  These transactions  may include  overallotment  and
stabilizing  transactions, "passive" market making  (see below) and purchases to
cover syndicate short  positions created  in connection with  the Offering.  The
Underwriters  also may impose a penalty bid, whereby selling concessions allowed
to
    
 
                                      U-2
<PAGE>
   
syndicate members or other broker-dealers in respect of the Common Stock sold in
the Offering  for  their account  may  be reclaimed  by  the syndicate  if  such
securities   are  repurchased  by  the  syndicate  in  stabilizing  or  covering
transactions. These activities may stabilize,  maintain or otherwise affect  the
market  price of the Common Stock which may  be higher than the price that might
otherwise prevail in the open market. These transactions may be effected on  the
NASDAQ  National Market or otherwise, and these activities, if commenced, may be
discontinued at any time.
    
 
   
    As permitted by Rule 103 under the Exchange Act, Underwriters or prospective
Underwriters that  are market  makers ("passive  market makers")  in the  Common
Stock  may make  bids for or  purchases of  Common Stock in  the NASDAQ National
Market until such time, if any, when  a stabilizing bid for such securities  has
been  made. Rule 103  generally provides that  (1) a passive  market maker's net
daily purchases of  the Common Stock  may not  exceed 30% of  its average  daily
trading  volume in such securities for  two full consecutive calendar months (or
any 60 consecutive  days ending within  the 10 days)  immediately preceding  the
filing date of the registration statement of which this Prospectus forms a part,
(2)  a passive market maker may not  effect transactions or display bids for the
Common Stock at a price that exceeds the highest independent bid for the  Common
Stock  by persons who are not passive market makers and (3) bids made by passive
market makers must be identified as such.
    
 
    The Common Stock  has been  approved for  quotation on  the Nasdaq  National
Market under the symbol "GTRC."
 
    Each  of DLJ and Chase  Securities has in the past  provided, and may in the
future provide, investment banking services for the Company and its  affiliates.
An affiliate of Chase Securities has in the past provided, and may in the future
provide,  general financing and  banking services to  the Company. Affiliates of
DLJ own  all  of  the outstanding  shares  of  Senior Preferred  Stock  with  an
aggregate  liquidation  value of  approximately $20.0  million and  will receive
approximately $22.9 million of the net  proceeds of this Offering in  connection
with  the redemption of  such shares. See  "Use of Proceeds."  Affiliates of DLJ
will also, immediately after this Offering, continue to own all of the  Warrants
to purchase 676,566 shares of Common Stock. An affiliate of Chase Securites will
beneficially  own, immediately after  this Offering, 4,381,265  shares of Common
Stock (net  of certain  options  granted to  certain  members of  the  Company's
management).  See "Certain Transactions  -- Transactions with  Affiliates of DLJ
and Chase Securities" and  "-- Options Granted by  Certain Investors to  Certain
Members of Management."
 
    The  Company has agreed  to indemnify the  several U.S. Underwriters against
certain liabilities, including  liabilities under the  Securities Act. The  U.S.
Underwriters have agreed to reimburse the Company for certain expenses.
 
                                      U-3
<PAGE>
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
    NO  PERSON  HAS BEEN  AUTHORIZED  TO GIVE  ANY  INFORMATION OR  TO  MAKE ANY
REPRESENTATION OTHER THAN THOSE CONTAINED IN  THIS PROSPECTUS, AND, IF GIVEN  OR
MADE, SUCH INFORMATION OR REPRESENTATIONS MUST NOT BE RELIED UPON AS HAVING BEEN
AUTHORIZED.  THIS  PROSPECTUS  DOES  NOT  CONSTITUTE  AN  OFFER  TO  SELL  OR  A
SOLICITATION OF AN OFFER TO BUY ANY SECURITY OTHER THAN THE SECURITIES TO  WHICH
IT RELATES NOR DOES IT CONSTITUTE AN OFFER TO SELL OR A SOLICITATION OF AN OFFER
TO  BUY  ANY OF  SUCH SECURITIES  IN ANY  CIRCUMSTANCES IN  WHICH SUCH  OFFER OR
SOLICITATION IS UNLAWFUL. NEITHER THE DELIVERY  OF THIS PROSPECTUS NOR ANY  SALE
MADE HEREUNDER SHALL, UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES, CREATE ANY IMPLICATION THAT THERE
HAS  BEEN NO CHANGE IN THE AFFAIRS OF  THE COMPANY SINCE THE DATE HEREOF OR THAT
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED  HEREIN IS CORRECT  AS OF ANY  TIME SUBSEQUENT TO  ITS
DATE.
 
                                 --------------
 
                               TABLE OF CONTENTS
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                           PAGE
<S>                                                                       <C>
Summary.................................................................      3
Risk Factors............................................................      9
The Recapitalization and Related Transactions...........................     14
Use of Proceeds.........................................................     15
Dividend Policy.........................................................     15
Dilution................................................................     16
Capitalization..........................................................     17
Selected Historical Financial Data......................................     18
Unaudited Pro Forma Condensed Financial Data............................     20
Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results
  of Operations.........................................................     24
Business................................................................     29
Management..............................................................     38
Principal Stockholders..................................................     51
Certain Transactions....................................................     53
Description of Certain Indebtedness.....................................     57
Shares Eligible for Future Sale.........................................     59
Description of Capital Stock............................................     60
Certain United States Federal Tax Considerations for Non-United States
  Holders...............................................................     64
Legal Matters...........................................................     66
Experts.................................................................     66
Additional Information..................................................     66
Index to Financial Statements...........................................    F-1
Underwriting............................................................    U-1
</TABLE>
    
 
                                6,750,000 SHARES
 
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
 
                                  COMMON STOCK
                           (PAR VALUE $.01 PER SHARE)
 
                            ------------------------
 
                                      [LOGO]
 
                            ------------------------
 
                          GOLDMAN SACHS INTERNATIONAL
 
                          DONALDSON, LUFKIN & JENRETTE
      SECURITIES CORPORATION
 
                             MONTGOMERY SECURITIES
 
                                 DAIN BOSWORTH
                                  Incorporated
 
                             CHASE SECURITIES INC.
 
                      REPRESENTATIVES OF THE UNDERWRITERS
 
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<PAGE>
                                    PART II
                     INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS
 
ITEM 13.  OTHER EXPENSES OF ISSUANCE AND DISTRIBUTION.
 
    The estimated expenses in connection with the Offering are as follows:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
EXPENSE                                                                              AMOUNT
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------  ------------
<S>                                                                               <C>
The Commission's Registration Fee...............................................  $     37,636
NASD Fee........................................................................        12,920
Nasdaq National Market Fee......................................................        50,000
Printing Expenses...............................................................       150,000
Legal Fees and Expenses.........................................................       400,000
Accounting Fees and Expenses....................................................       200,000
Transfer Agent and Registrar Fees...............................................        10,000
Blue Sky Fees and Expenses (including counsel's fees)...........................        20,000
Miscellaneous Expenses..........................................................       219,444
                                                                                  ------------
    Total.......................................................................  $  1,100,000
                                                                                  ------------
                                                                                  ------------
</TABLE>
 
ITEM 14.  INDEMNIFICATION OF OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS.
 
    The  Certificate of Incorporation of Guitar Center, Inc. (the "Company"), as
in effect immediately  following the consummation  of the sale  of Common  Stock
offered pursuant to this Registration Statement (the "Offering"), provides that,
to  the extent permitted by the Delaware  General Corporation Law, a director or
officer shall not be  personally liable to the  Company or its stockholders  for
monetary  damages arising from a breach of their fiduciary duties to the Company
and  its  stockholders,  to  the  extent  permitted  by  the  Delaware   General
Corporation  Law. Such limitation of liability  does not affect the availability
of equitable remedies such as injunctive relief or rescission.
 
    The  Company's  Amended  and  Restated  Bylaws,  as  in  effect  immediately
following  the consummation  of the  Offering (the  "Bylaws"), provide  that the
Company   shall    indemnify    its    directors    and    officers    to    the
fullest  extent  permitted  by  applicable law.  The  Company  has  entered into
indemnification agreements with its directors and executive officers  containing
provisions  which are in some respects broader than the specific indemnification
provisions contained in  the Delaware General  Corporation Law. Such  agreements
require  the  Company, among  other things,  (i) to  indemnify its  officers and
directors against certain liabilities that may  arise by reason of their  status
or  service as directors or  officers provided such persons  acted in good faith
and in a manner reasonably believed to  be in the best interests of the  Company
and,  with respect to any criminal action, had no cause to believe their conduct
was unlawful; (ii) to advance the  expenses actually and reasonable incurred  by
its  officers and  directors as a  result of  any proceeding against  them as to
which they could be  indemnified; and (iii) to  obtain directors' and  officers'
insurance  if available  on reasonable terms.  There is no  action or proceeding
pending or, to the knowledge  of the Company, threatened  which may result in  a
claim  for indemnification  by any director,  officer, employee or  agent of the
Company.
 
    Policies of insurance may  be obtained and maintained  by the Company  under
which  its directors and officers will be insured, within the limits and subject
to the limitations of the policies, against certain
expenses in connection with the defense of, and certain liabilities which  might
be  imposed as  a result  of, actions,  suits or  proceedings to  which they are
parties by reason of being or having been such directors or officers.
 
    The form of Underwriting Agreement,  filed as Exhibit 1.1. hereto,  provides
for  the indemnification of the Company,  its controlling persons, its directors
and certain of  its officers  by the Underwriters  against certain  liabilities,
including  liabilities  under  the  Securities  Act  of  1933,  as  amended (the
"Securities Act").
 
                                      II-1
<PAGE>
ITEM 15.  RECENT SALES OF UNREGISTERED SECURITIES.
 
    All capitalized terms not otherwise defined herein, shall have the  meanings
ascribed  to  such  terms  in  Part I  of  this  Registration  Statement. Unless
otherwise indicated herein,  share and Unit  numbers do not  give effect to  the
2.582-to-1  stock split effectuated by the Company on January 15, 1997 or to the
Junior Preferred Stock Conversion.
 
    In June 1996,  Guitar Center  Management Company,  Inc. (the  "Predecessor")
effected  a Recapitalization in  order to transfer  ownership of the Predecessor
from its sole stockholder,  the Scherr Trust, to  members of management and  the
Investors. The Recapitalization included the following transactions: (i) members
of  the Predecessor's management  purchased 500,000 shares  of the Predecessor's
common stock, no  par value ("Predecessor  Common Stock"), for  $0.5 million  in
cash;  (ii) members of  the Predecessor's management  received 495,000 shares of
junior preferred stock,  no par  value ("Predecessor  Junior Preferred  Stock"),
with  an  aggregate liquidation  preference of  $49.5  million, in  exchange for
cancellation  of  outstanding  options  exercisable  for  49,500,000  shares  of
Predecessor  Common Stock;  (iii) the  Scherr Trust  received 198,000  shares of
Predecessor Junior Preferred Stock, with an aggregate liquidation preference  of
$19.8  million, in exchange  for 19,800,000 shares  of Predecessor Common Stock;
(iv) the  Investors purchased  700,000 shares  of Predecessor  Common Stock  and
693,000  shares of Predecessor Junior Preferred Stock for $70.0 million in cash;
(v) the DLJ Investors purchased 800,000 shares of 14% senior preferred stock, no
par  value  (the  "Predecessor  Senior  Preferred  Stock"),  with  an  aggregate
liquidation value of $20.0 million, and warrants (the "Predecessor Warrants") to
purchase  73,684  shares  of  Predecessor  Common  Stock  and  72,947  shares of
Predecessor Junior Preferred  Stock, for  an aggregate purchase  price of  $20.0
million  in cash;  (vi) DLJ Bridge  purchased $51.0  million aggregate principal
amount of unsecured increasing rate notes  for cash. All shares numbers in  this
paragraph  give effect to a 100 to 1  stock split effected by the Predecessor on
June 5,  1996. Such  transactions were  exempt from  registration by  virtue  of
Section 3(a)(9) or Section 4(2) of the Securities Act.
 
    In  June  1996,  the Predecessor  granted  to certain  employees  options to
purchase an  aggregate  of 60,399  Units  (a unit  consisting  of one  share  of
Predecessor  Common  Stock  and  99/100ths  of  a  share  of  Predecessor Junior
Preferred Stock (each  a "Predecessor Unit"))  pursuant to its  1996 Plan.  Such
transactions  were exempt by  virtue of Section  4(2) of and  Rule 701 under the
Securities Act. In June 1996, the Predecessor granted options to purchase 43,344
Predecessor Units to each of Messrs. Larry Thomas and Marty Albertson, executive
officers of the Predecessor. Such transactions were exempt by virtue of  Section
4(2)  of  the  Securities  Act.  After  the  effectiveness  of  the Registration
Statement the Company expects  to file a Registration  Statement on Form S-8  to
register the shares issuable upon exercise of such options.
 
    In  July 1996, the  Company sold $100 million  aggregate principal amount of
11% senior notes  due 2006 ("Senior  Notes") to DLJ  and Chase Securities.  Such
transaction  was exempt by virtue of Section 4(2) of the Securities Act. DLJ and
Chase Securities resold an aggregate of $100 million principal amount of  Senior
Notes  to "Qualified Institutional  Investors" (within the  meaning of Rule 144A
under the Securities Act) in transactions meeting the requirements of Rule 144A.
 
    The Company was  incorporated in Delaware  in October 1996.  Pursuant to  an
agreement  and plan of merger, the Predecessor  merged with and into the Company
in October  1996 and  each share  of  Predecessor Common  Stock, each  share  of
Predecessor  Junior Preferred Stock, each  share of Predecessor Senior Preferred
Stock, each Warrant to purchase Predecessor Common Stock and Predecessor  Junior
Preferred  Stock, and  each employee option  to purchase  Predecessor Units were
converted into one share of Common Stock, $.01 par value of the Company ("Common
Stock"), one share  of Junior  Preferred Stock, $.01  par value  of the  Company
("Junior  Preferred Stock"), one share of Senior Preferred Stock, $.01 par value
of the Company, a  Warrant to purchase Common  Stock and Junior Preferred  Stock
and an employee option to purchase units of the Registrant (each unit consisting
of  one share of Common Stock and 99/100ths of a share of Junior Preferred Stock
(each, a "Unit")), respectively. Such transaction is exempt by virtue of Section
4(2) of and Rule 145 under the Securities Act.
 
                                      II-2
<PAGE>
    Effective December 30, 1996, certain  employees of the Company entered  into
written,  irrevocable  agreements  to  purchase  3,100  Units  for  an aggregate
purchase price of approximately $0.3 million pursuant to a Supplemental Employee
Stock Purchase Plan of the Company.  Such transactions were exempt by virtue  of
Section 4(2) of the Rules 505 and 506 under the Securities Act.
 
    In  January 1997,  the Company granted  options to purchase  an aggregate of
17,338 Units to two executive officers of the Company, pursuant to its 1996 Plan
and the terms of their employment  agreements. Such transactions were exempt  by
virtue  of Section 4(2)  of the Securities  Act. After the  effectiveness of the
Registration Statement the Company expects  to file a registration statement  on
Form S-8 to register the shares issuable upon exercise of such options.
 
ITEM 16.  EXHIBITS.
 
(a) Exhibits. See Exhibit Index
 
(b) Financial Statements Schedules:
 
    II.  Valuation and Qualifying Accounts...................................S-1
 
    All  other schedules  are omitted  because the  required information  is not
present in amounts sufficient to require submission of the schedule pursuant  to
the  applicable accounting regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission
or because the information required is  included in the financial statements  or
notes thereto.
 
ITEM 17.  UNDERTAKINGS.
 
    Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising out the Securities Act of
1933, as amended (the "Securities Act"), may be permitted to directors, officers
and  controlling persons of the registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions,
or otherwise,  the registrant  has been  advised  that, in  the opinion  of  the
Securities  and  Exchange  Commission, such  indemnification  is  against public
policy as expressed in  the Act and is,  therefore, unenforceable. In the  event
that  a  claim  for indemnification  against  such liabilities  (other  than the
payment by the registrant of expenses  incurred or paid by a directors,  officer
or controlling person of the registrant in the successful defense in any action,
suit  or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person
in connection with the securities being registered, the registrant will,  unless
in  the  opinion of  its  counsel the  matter  has been  settled  by controlling
precedent, submit to a  court of appropriate  jurisdiction the question  whether
such  indemnification  by  it  is  against public  policy  as  expressed  in the
Securities Act and will by governed by the final adjudication of such issue.
 
    The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes that:
 
           (1)
           For purposes of determining any  liability under the Securities  Act,
           the  information omitted from the form of prospectus filed as part of
    this registration statement in  reliance upon Rule 430A  and contained in  a
    form of prospectus filed by the registrant pursuant to Rule 424(b)(1) or (4)
    or  497(h) under  the Securities Act  shall by deemed  to be a  part of this
    registration statement as of the time it was declared effective.
 
           (2)
           For the purpose  of determining  any liability  under the  Securities
           Act, each post-effective amendment that contains a form of prospectus
    shall  be  deemed  to  be  a  new  registration  statement  relating  to the
    securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that time
    shall be deemed to be the initial BONA FIDE offering thereof.
 
    The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes to provide the Underwriters  at
the  closing  specified  in  the Underwriting  Agreement,  certificates  in such
denominations and registered in  such names as required  by the Underwriters  to
permit prompt delivery to each purchaser.
 
                                      II-3
<PAGE>
                        SIGNATURES AND POWER OF ATTORNEY
 
   
    Pursuant  to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, the
Registrant has duly caused this Amendment No. 2 to Registration Statement to  be
signed  on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City
of Los Angeles, State of California on this 10th day of March, 1997.
    
 
                                      GUITAR CENTER, INC.
 
                                      By:            */s/ LARRY THOMAS
 
                                      ------------------------------------------
                                         Name: Larry Thomas
                                         Title: PRESIDENT AND CHIEF EXECUTIVE
                                      OFFICER
 
   
    Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, this
Amendment No.  2 to  Registration Statement  has been  signed by  the  following
persons in the capacities indicated on the dates indicated.
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<C>                                                     <S>                                  <C>
                         NAME                                          TITLE                         DATE
- ------------------------------------------------------  -----------------------------------  --------------------
                  */s/ LARRY THOMAS                     President, Chief Executive Officer
     -------------------------------------------         and Director (Principal Executive      March 10, 1997
                     Larry Thomas                        Officer)
 
                    /s/ BRUCE ROSS                      Vice President, Chief Financial
     -------------------------------------------         Officer and Secretary (Principal       March 10, 1997
                      Bruce Ross                         Financial and Accounting Officer)
 
                 */s/ MARTY ALBERTSON
     -------------------------------------------        Executive Vice President, Chief         March 10, 1997
                   Marty Albertson                       Operating Officer and Director
 
                 */s/ RAYMOND SCHERR
     -------------------------------------------        Director                                March 10, 1997
                    Raymond Scherr
 
                 */s/ DAVID FERGUSON
     -------------------------------------------        Director                                March 10, 1997
                    David Ferguson
 
                 */s/ JEFFREY WALKER
     -------------------------------------------        Director                                March 10, 1997
                    Jeffrey Walker
 
                 */s/ MICHAEL LAZARUS
     -------------------------------------------        Director                                March 10, 1997
                   Michael Lazarus
 
                  */s/ STEVEN BURGE
     -------------------------------------------        Director                                March 10, 1997
                     Steven Burge
 
                 *By: /s/ BRUCE ROSS
     -------------------------------------------
                      Bruce Ross                                                                March 10, 1997
                   ATTORNEY-IN-FACT
</TABLE>
    
 
                                      II-4
<PAGE>
                                                                     SCHEDULE II
 
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                       VALUATION AND QUALIFYING ACCOUNTS
                          YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1996
                             (AMOUNTS IN THOUSANDS)
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                         BALANCE AT    ADDITIONS   DEDUCTIONS                BALANCE
                                                          BEGINNING   CHARGED TO      FROM                   AT END
                                                           OF YEAR    OPERATIONS    ALLOWANCE     OTHER      OF YEAR
                                                         -----------  -----------  -----------  ---------  -----------
<S>                                                      <C>          <C>          <C>          <C>        <C>
December 31, 1996
  Allowance for doubtful receivables...................   $     200       --        $     (50)     --       $     150
  Allowance for obsolesence & damaged goods............   $     100    $     500       --          --       $     600
</TABLE>
 
                                      S-1
<PAGE>
                                 EXHIBIT INDEX
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
 EXHIBIT
  NUMBER    DESCRIPTION
- ----------  ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<C>         <S>
   1.1**    Form of U.S. Underwriting Agreement
   1.2**    Form of International Underwriting Agreement
   3.1*     The Company's Certificate of Incorporation
   3.2*     Amendment to the Company's Certificate of Incorporation
   3.3**    Amendment to the Company's Certificate of Incorporation
   3.4**    Amendment to the Company's Certificate of Incorporation
   3.5**    The Company's Restated Certificate of Incorporation
   3.6**    The Company's Bylaws (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.3 contained in Registration Statement on
             Form S-1 (File No. 333-10491))
   3.7**    The Company's Amended and Restated Bylaws
   4.1*     Indenture, dated as of July 2, 1996 by and between the Company and U.S. Trust Company of California as
             trustee
   4.2*     Form of Restricted Stock Agreements dated as of May 1, 1996 between the Company and certain members of
             management
   4.3*     Warrants (1-4) dated June 5, 1996, for the purchase of shares of Common Stock and Junior Preferred
             Stock issued to certain investors
   4.4      Form of Stock Certificate
   5.1**    Opinion of Latham & Watkins as to the validity of the shares of Common Stock offered hereby
  10.1*     Recapitalization Agreement, dated May 1, 1996 by and among the Company and the stockholders named
             therein
  10.2*     Registration Rights Agreement, dated June 5, 1996, among the Company and the stockholders named
             therein
  10.3*     Tax Indemnification Agreement, dated as of May 1, 1996, by and among the Company, Ray Scherr, and the
             individuals identified on the signature pages thereto
  10.4*     Employment Agreement dated June 5, 1996, between the Company
             and Lawrence Thomas (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.5 contained in Registration Statement on
             Form S-1 (File No. 333-10491))
  10.5**    The Company's Amended and Restated 1996 Performance Stock Option Plan
  10.6*     Employment Agreement dated June 5, 1996, between the Company
             and Marty Albertson
  10.7**    Employment Agreement dated June 5, 1996, between the Company and Bruce Ross, as amended
  10.8*     Employment Agreement dated June 5, 1996, between the Company and Raymond Scherr
  10.9**    Employment Agreement dated June 5, 1996, between the Company and Barry Soosman, as amended
  10.10*    Securities Purchase Agreement dated June 5, 1996, by and among the Company
             and the parties named therein
  10.11**   Form of Indemnification Agreement between the Company and each of its directors and executive officers
  10.12*    Credit Agreement dated June 5, 1996, between the Company
             and Wells Fargo Bank, N.A.
</TABLE>
    
<PAGE>
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
 EXHIBIT
  NUMBER    DESCRIPTION
- ----------  ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<C>         <S>
  10.13*    Revolving Promissory Note dated June 5, 1996, issued by the Company in favor of Wells Fargo Bank, N.A.
             in the principal amount of $25,000,000
  10.14*    Security Agreement dated June 5, 1996, between the Company and Wells Fargo, N.A.
  10.15*    Registration Rights Agreement, dated July 2, 1996, by and among the Company, Chase Securities and DLJ
  10.16*    Management Stock Option Agreement, dated June 5, 1996, by and between the Company and Lawrence Thomas
  10.17*    Management Stock Option Agreement, dated June 5, 1996, by and between the Company and Marty Albertson
  10.18*    Registration Agreement dated June 5, 1996, among the Company
             and the parties named therein (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.11 contained in Registration
             Statement on Form S-1 (File No. 333-10491))
  10.19*    Stockholders Agreement, dated June 5, 1996, among the Company, and the investors listed therein
  10.20**   Purchase Agreement and Escrow Instructions, dated February 15, 1996, by and between the Company and
             G.C. Realty LLC (Arlington, Texas)
  10.21**   Purchase Agreement and Escrow Instructions, dated February 15, 1996, by and between the Company and
             G.C. Realty LLC (North Chicago, Illinois)
  10.22**   Offer, Agreement and Escrow Instructions for Purchase of Real Estate, dated August 11, 1995, by and
             between Raymond I. Scherr and Guitar Center Management Company, Inc., Profit Sharing Plan (South
             Chicago, Illinois)
  10.23**   Lease, dated August 31, 1995, by and between G.C. Realty LLC and the Company (Covina, California)
  10.24**   Amendment No. 1 to Amended and Restated 1996 Performance Stock Option Plan
  10.25**   Form of Employee Stock Purchase Plan Agreement
  10.26**   1997 Equity Participation Plan
  10.27**   Stockholders Consent, dated as of January 24, 1997, by and among the Company and certain of its
             stockholders
  10.28**   Modification to Amended and Restated 1996 Performance Stock Option Plan
  10.29     Management Stock Repurchase Agreement
  10.30**   Amendment No. 2 to the Amended and Restated 1996 Performance Stock Option Plan
  10.31**   Amendment No. 1 to Management Stock Option Agreement, dated as of October 15, 1996, between the
             Company and Larry Thomas (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.21 contained in Registration
             Statement on Form S-1 (File No. 333-10491))
  10.32**   Amendment No. 1 to Management Stock Option Agreement, dated as of October 15, 1996, between the
             Company and Marty Albertson (Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.22 contained in Registration
             Statement on Form S-1 (File No. 333-10491))
  16.1      Letter re change in certifying accountant
  23.1      Consent of KPMG Peat Marwick LLP, independent auditors
  23.2      Consent of Ernst & Young LLP, independent auditors
  23.4**    Consent of Latham & Watkins (included in Exhibit 5.1)
  24.1**    Power of Attorney
  27.1**    Financial Data Schedule
</TABLE>
    
 
- ------------------------
   *Incorporated  by reference to the same  numbered exhibit in the Registration
    Statement on Form S-1 (File No. 333-10491).
   
  **Previously filed.
    

<PAGE>
                                                                  EXHIBIT 4.4

                                    [LOGO]
COMMON STOCK                                                CUSIP 402040 10 9
                                 GUITAR CENTER, INC.
                INCORPORATED UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE


This Certifies that



is the owner of

           FULLY PAID AND NONASSESSABLE SHARES OF COMMON STOCK,
                        PAR VALUE $.01 PER SHARE, OF

GUITAR CENTER, INC., a Delaware corporation (the "Corporation"). The shares 
represented by this certificate are transferable only on the stock transfer 
books of the Corporation by the holder of record hereof, or by the holder's 
duly authorized attorney or legal representative, upon the surrender of this 
certificate properly endorsed. This certificate is not valid until 
countersigned by the Corporation's transfer agent and registrar.

    IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Corporation has caused this certificate to be 
executed by the facsimile signatures of its duly authorized officers and has 
caused a facsimile of its corporate seal to be hereunto affixed.

Dated:

     /s/                                        /s/ 
- --------------------------                      -------------------------
        SECRETARY                                       PRESIDENT



COUNTERSIGNED AND REGISTERED
CHASEMELLON SHAREHOLDER SERVICES, L.L.C.


                   Transfer Agent and Registrar

By

                             Authorized Officer
<PAGE>
                                       
                              GUITAR CENTER, INC.

     A statement of the rights, preferences, privileges and restrictions 
granted to or imposed upon the respective classes or series of shares of 
stock of the Corporation, and upon the holders thereof as established by the 
Certificate of Incorporation or by any certificate of determination of 
preferences, and the number of shares constituting each series or class and 
the designations thereof, may be obtained by any stockholder of the 
Corporation upon request and without charge from the Secretary of the 
Corporation at the principal office of the Corporation.

     The following abbreviations, when used in the inscription on the face of 
this certificate, shall be construed as though they were written out in full 
according to applicable laws or regulations:

TEN COM -as tenants in common          UNIF GIFT MIN ACT-......Custodian......
TEN ENT -as tenants by the entireties                   (Cust)        (Minor)
JT TEN  -as joint tenants with right of          under Uniform Gifts to Minors
         survivorship and not as tenants                 Act------------------
         in common                                              (State)

                          UNIF TRF MIN ACT-.......Custodian (until age.......)
                                           (Cust)
                                            ...........under Uniform Transfers
                                              (Minor)
                                            to Minors Act....................
                                                               (State)

     Additional abbreviations may also be used though not in the above list.

FOR VALUE RECEIVED,__________________hereby sell, assign and transfer unto

PLEASE INSERT SOCIAL SECURITY OR OTHER
   IDENTIFYING NUMBER OF ASSIGNEE
- --------------------------------------

- --------------------------------------

- -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
(PLEASE PRINT OR TYPEWRITE NAME AND ADDRESS, INCLUDING ZIP CODE, OF ASSIGNEE)

- -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

- -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

- ------------------------------------------------------------------------Shares
of the capital stock represented by the within Certificate, and do hereby
irrevocably constitute and appoint

- ----------------------------------------------------------------------Attorney
to transfer the said stock on the books of the within named Corporation with
full power of substitution in the premises.

Dated 
      ------------------------------
                                      ----------------------------------------
                                      NOTICE: THE SIGNATURE TO THIS ASSIGNMENT
                                              MUST CORRESPOND WITH THE NAME AS
                                              WRITTEN UPON THE FACE OF THE
                                              CERTIFICATE IN EVERY PARTICULAR
                                              WITHOUT ALTERATION OR ENLARGEMENT
                                              OR ANY CHANGE WHATEVER.
Signature(s) Guaranteed:


By
  -------------------------------------
  THE SIGNATURE(S) SHOULD BE GUARANTEED
  BY AN ELIGIBLE GUARANTOR INSTITUTION
  (BANKS, STOCKBROKERS, SAVINGS AND LOAN
  ASSOCIATIONS AND CREDIT UNIONS WITH
  MEMBERSHIP IN AN APPROVED SIGNATURE
  GUARANTEE MEDALLION PROGRAM),
  PURSUANT TO S.E.C. RULE 17Ad-15




<PAGE>
                                                                 EXHIBIT 10.29

                        MANAGEMENT STOCK REPURCHASE AGREEMENT

    This Management Stock Repurchase Agreement, dated as of February 19, 1997
(this "AGREEMENT"), is among Guitar Center, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the
"COMPANY"), and the employees of the Company listed on the signature pages
hereto (the "MANAGEMENT STOCKHOLDERS").

                                       RECITALS

    A.   The Board of Directors of the Company has determined that it is in the
best interests of the Company to obtain additional financing for the operations
of the Company by effecting an initial public offering ("IPO") of Common Stock,
par value $.01 per share ("COMMON STOCK").

    B.   Contemporaneous with the closing of the IPO, all shares of the Junior
Preferred Stock will be mandatorily converted into shares of Common Stock (the
"CONVERSION").

    C.   In connection with the Conversion, a significant amount of non-cash
income will be deemed to have been earned by the Management Stockholders for
federal and state income tax purposes in connection with compensation deemed
earned by them in their capacity as employees of the Company (whether or not the
Management Stockholders have received any cash with respect to the underlying
stock).  To ensure that the Management Stockholders have sufficient cash to
finance a portion of such federal and state income tax obligations, the Company
and the Management Stockholders, severally and not jointly, have agreed to enter
into this Agreement.

    D.   The repurchase arrangements between the Company and each Management
Stockholder provided for herein have been approved by the Board of Directors of
the Company and by a majority of the disinterested directors as being in the
best interest of the Company.


                                      AGREEMENT

    In consideration of the premises and the mutual covenants herein contained
and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and adequacy of which
are hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto agree as follows:

    1.   STOCK REPURCHASE.

         (a)  In connection with the Conversion, the Company agrees to
repurchase from the Management Stockholders, and the Management Stockholders,
severally and not jointly, agree to sell to the Company, that aggregate number
of shares of Common Stock that can be repurchased for a total of $18,417,266,
allocated among each of the Management Stockholders as set forth on the
signature pages hereof (the "REPURCHASE AMOUNT").

         (b)  For purposes of this Agreement, the aggregate number of shares of
Common Stock to be repurchased by the Company from each Management Stockholder
(the "REPURCHASED SHARES"), in the case of each Management Stockholder, shall be
the (i) Repurchase Amount for such Management Stockholder divided by (ii) the
initial public offering price set forth on

<PAGE>

the cover page of the final prospectus, less the gross underwriting discount
actually paid by the Company (net of any reimbursed expenses) (the
"COMMISSION").  Fractional shares shall be rounded to the nearest whole share.

         (c)  In connection with the determination of the number of Repurchased
Shares, the parties hereto agree that the Chief Financial Officer of the Company
shall, at the time of pricing of the IPO, fill in the blanks on the signature
pages hereof associated with each Management Stockholder's Repurchased Shares in
accordance with the mathematical calculation called for by Section 1(b), above.

         (d)  The Management Stockholders, severally and not jointly,
acknowledge that the initial public offering price and the Commission in the IPO
will be binding upon each Management Stockholder.  The Management Stockholders,
severally and not jointly, acknowledge that they will not be consulted during
the determination of the initial public offering price or Commission and, should
the Company decide not to pursue the IPO, that each will be similarly bound by
that decision.

         (e)  In connection with this Agreement, each Management Stockholder
agrees to deliver to the Company on or prior to the closing date of the IPO:

              (i)  a duly executed spousal consent (in substantially the form
    of Exhibit A attached hereto); and

              (ii)  the certificate(s) representing his Repurchased Shares.

Upon delivery of such instruments at the closing of the IPO, the Company will
pay the related Repurchase Price in cash by wire transfer.

         (f)  It is expressly agreed that the obligation of the Company to
repurchase, and the Management Stockholders, severally and not jointly, to sell,
the Repurchased Shares is conditioned upon, and shall only occur concurrently
with, the consummation of the IPO.

         (g)  The Company confirms that this Agreement and the related terms of
the disposition of shares of Common Stock to the Company has been approved by
the Board of Directors of the Company in advance of the effectiveness hereof and
represents that the repurchase of the Repurchased Shares as contemplated hereby
does not violate Section 160 of the Delaware General Corporation Law, the
Restated Certificate of Incorporation of the Company or any indenture,
instrument or agreement to which the Company is a party or by which it is bound.

         (h)  Upon the consummation of the repurchase of the Repurchased Shares
as contemplated hereby, the Company will acquire sole and exclusive record and
beneficial ownership of such shares, free and clear of any adverse claims of any
sort whatsoever.

    2.   MISCELLANEOUS.

         2.1. COOPERATION.  Subject to the terms and conditions herein
provided, each of the parties hereto agrees to use all reasonable efforts to
take, or cause to be taken, all actions and to do, or cause to be done, all
things necessary, proper or advisable to consummate and make effective



                                          2


<PAGE>

at the times contemplated herein the agreements provided for herein and the
actions contemplated by this Agreement.

         2.2. TERMINATION.  This Agreement shall be terminated automatically
without liability to any party if the IPO has not been consummated on or prior
to June 30, 1997.

         2.3. WAIVER; AMENDMENT.  Subject to applicable law, at any time prior
to the consummation of the IPO, any party hereto may waive compliance as to such
party with any of the agreements of any other party or with any conditions to
its own obligations.  Any agreement on the part of a party to any such waiver
shall be valid only if set forth in an instrument in writing signed on behalf of
such party by a duly authorized officer.  No party hereto shall be bound by any
waiver which it has not signed.

         2.4. INTERPRETATION.  All defined terms herein include the plural as
well as the singular.  The words "herein," "hereof" and "hereunder" and other
words of similar import refer to this Agreement as a whole and not to any
particular Section or other subdivision.  This Agreement shall not be construed
for or against any party hereto by reason of the authorship or alleged
authorship of any provisions hereof or by reason of the status of the respective
parties hereto.  The headings contained in this Agreement are for reference
purposes only and shall not affect in any way the meaning or interpretation of
this Agreement.

         2.5. COUNTERPARTS.  This Agreement may be executed in any number of
counterparts, and each of such counterparts shall, for all purposes, constitute
one agreement binding on all the parties hereto, notwithstanding that all
parties are not signatories to the same counterpart.

         2.6. BINDING EFFECT.  Except as otherwise provided herein, this
Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the parties hereto
and their administrators, successors, legal representatives and assigns.

         2.7. MISCELLANEOUS.  This Agreement (i) constitutes the entire
agreement and supersedes all other prior agreements and undertakings, both
written and oral, among the parties hereto, or any of them, with respect to the
subject matter hereof; (ii) is not intended to confer upon any other person any
rights or remedies hereunder; (iii) shall not be assigned, except by Company to
a directly or indirectly wholly owned subsidiary of the Company which, in a
written instrument shall agree to assume all of the Company's obligations
hereunder and be bound by all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement;
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that no such assignment shall relieve the assigning party of
the obligations hereunder; and (iv) shall be governed in all respects, including
validity, interpretation and effect, by the internal laws of the State of
Delaware, without giving effect to the
principles of conflict of laws thereof.


                               (SIGNATURE PAGES FOLLOW)


                                         S-1


<PAGE>

         IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Management
Stock Repurchase Agreement to be executed as of the date first written above.

                                       GUITAR CENTER, INC.


                                       By:    /s/ BRUCE ROSS
                                           --------------------------
                                             Authorized Signatory


                                         S-2
<PAGE>

         IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Management
Stock Repurchase Agreement to be executed as of the date first written above.


Number of Shares of                         /s/ LARRY THOMAS
Common Stock Sold                           -------------------------
                                            Larry Thomas

- ---------------
(To Be Completed By Chief Financial
Officer pursuant to Section 1(c))


$6,706,145
Repurchase Price


                                         S-3

<PAGE>

         IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Management
Stock Repurchase Agreement to be executed as of the date first written above.


Number of Shares of                         /s/ MARTY ALBERTSON
Common Stock Sold                           -------------------------
                                            Marty Albertson


- ---------------
(To Be Completed By Chief Financial
Officer pursuant to Section 1(c))


$4,470,756
Purchase Price


                                         S-4

<PAGE>

         IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Management
Stock Repurchase Agreement to be executed as of the date first written above.


Number of Shares of                         /s/ ROD BARGER
Common Stock Sold                           -------------------------
                                            Rod Barger


- ---------------
(To Be Completed By Chief Financial
Officer pursuant to Section 1(c))


$793,433
Purchase Price


                                         S-5

<PAGE>

         IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Management
Stock Repurchase Agreement to be executed as of the date first written above.


Number of Shares of                         /s/ BILL MCGARRY
Common Stock Sold                           -------------------------
                                            Bill McGarry


- ---------------
(To Be Completed By Chief Financial
Officer pursuant to Section 1(c))


$1,154,084
Purchase Price


                                         S-6

<PAGE>

         IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Management
Stock Repurchase Agreement to be executed as of the date first written above.


Number of Shares of                         /s/ RICH PIDANICK
Common Stock Sold                           -------------------------
                                            Rich Pidanick


- ---------------
(To Be Completed By Chief Financial
Officer pursuant to Section 1(c))


$793,433
Purchase Price


                                         S-7

<PAGE>

         IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Management
Stock Repurchase Agreement to be executed as of the date first written above.


Number of Shares of                         /s/ ANDY HEYNEMAN
Common Stock Sold                           -------------------------
                                            Andy Heyneman


- ---------------
(To Be Completed By Chief Financial
Officer pursuant to Section 1(c))


$577,042
Purchase Price


                                         S-8

<PAGE>

         IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Management
Stock Repurchase Agreement to be executed as of the date first written above.


Number of Shares of                         /s/ GEORGE LAMPOS
Common Stock Sold                           -------------------------
                                            George Lampos


- ---------------
(To Be Completed By Chief Financial
Officer pursuant to Section 1(c))


$323,332
Purchase Price


                                         S-9

<PAGE>

         IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Management
Stock Repurchase Agreement to be executed as of the date first written above.


Number of Shares of                         /s/ DON KELSEY
Common Stock Sold                           -------------------------
                                            Don Kelsey


- ---------------
(To Be Completed By Chief Financial
Officer pursuant to Section 1(c))


$245,958
Purchase Price


                                         S-10

<PAGE>

         IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Management
Stock Repurchase Agreement to be executed as of the date first written above.


Number of Shares of                         THE DAVE DIMARTINO
                                            REVOCABLE LIVING TRUST



                                       By: /s/ DAVE DIMARTINO
- ---------------                           ------------------------  
Common Stock Sold                              Dave DiMartino

(To Be Completed By Chief Financial            Trustee
Officer pursuant to Section 1(c))


$3,353,083
Purchase Price


                                         S-11

<PAGE>

                                                                       EXHIBIT A


                           CONSENT AND AGREEMENT OF SPOUSE


    I, ________________________, am the spouse of ______________________, one
of the stockholders of Guitar Center, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the
"COMPANY").  I understand that my spouse is a party to that certain Management
Stock Repurchase Agreement dated as of February 19, 1997 by and among the
Company and certain of its stockholders (the "AGREEMENT"), and that I have
reviewed the Agreement.

    The Agreement contains certain provisions regarding my spouse selling or
retaining any equity securities, or rights to receive equity securities (the
"SECURITIES") issued by the Company.  I agree that my spouse may sell any
Securities in compliance with the terms of the Agreement and that I will not
sell any such Securities in violation of the Agreement.


Executed as of February 19, 1997.



- -----------------------------------
         (Signature)


Name:
    ------------------------------
         (Please print name)


                                         A-1

<PAGE>
                                                                    EXHIBIT 16.1
 
Securities and Exchange Commission
450 Fifth Street, N.W.
Washington, DC 20549
 
Gentlemen:
 
   
We  have  read  the statements  under  the  heading "Experts"  contained  in the
Registration Statement on Form S-1 dated March 10, 1997, of Guitar Center,  Inc.
and  are  in agreement  with the  statements contained  in the  second paragraph
therein.
    
 
                                          ERNST & YOUNG LLP
 
   
March 10, 1997
    

<PAGE>
                                                                    EXHIBIT 23.1
 
                        CONSENT OF KPMG PEAT MARWICK LLP
 
The Board of Directors
Guitar Center, Inc.:
 
    The  audit referred to in  our report dated February  10, 1997, included the
related financial statement schedule as of  and for the year ended December  31,
1996,  included in the registration statement. This financial statement schedule
is the  responsibility of  the Company's  management. Our  responsibility is  to
express  an opinion on this financial statement  schedule based on our audit. In
our opinion, such financial statement  schedule, when considered in relation  to
the basic consolidated financial statements taken as a whole, presents fairly in
all material respects the information set forth therein.
 
    We  consent to the use of our report included herein and to the reference to
our firm under the heading "Experts" in the prospectus.
 
                                          KPMG PEAT MARWICK LLP
 
   
Los Angeles, California
March 10, 1997
    

<PAGE>
                                                                    EXHIBIT 23.2
 
                          CONSENT OF ERNST & YOUNG LLP
 
   
    We  consent to the reference to our  firm under the caption "Experts" and to
the use of our report dated March  6, 1996, in the Registration Statement  (Form
S-1 No. 333-20931) and related Prospectus of Guitar Center, Inc. dated March 10,
1997.
    
 
                                          ERNST & YOUNG LLP
 
   
Los Angeles, California
March 10, 1997
    


© 2022 IncJournal is not affiliated with or endorsed by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission